Home

Mercedes-Benz 2008 CL63 AMG Automobile User Manual

1. Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4 28 8K 19200 Disable Disable 9600 24 0K 14400 Disable Disable 9600 19 2K 9600 Disable Disable 9600 16 8K 4800 Disable Disable 9600 14 4K 4800 Disable Disable 9600 12 0K 2400 Disable Disable 9600 9 6K Disable Disable Disable 9600 7 2K Disable Disable Disable Disable 4 8K Disable Disable Disable Disable 2 4K Disable Disable Disable Disable ele Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4 28 8K 19200 Disable Disable 9600 24 0K 14400 9600 19 2 9600 9600 16 8 4800 9600 14 4 4800 N A N A 9600 12 0K 2400 N A N A 9600 9 6K Disable N A N A 9600 7 2K Disable N A Disable 4 8K Disable N A N A Disable 2 4K Disable N A Disable 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Multipoint MSD Figure G 10 shows a sample configuration for multipoint MSD Addr 1 Addr 2 Addr 3 19200 TMp 19200 TMp Addr 4 3920Plus 3 Addr 5 Cable1 Adar 6 Adar 7 Cable 1 Addr 8 Addr 9 Could be 3910 or 3920P us Addr 10 Addr 11 Addr 12 495 14614a Figure G 10 Sample Configuration Multipoint MSD 3920Plus Use TMp Control Template default configuration options with the following exception NetworkPosition Set to Control 3920Plus Use T
2. If the remote modem accepts password the entry is successful the Top Level menu of the remote modem appears on the local modem s LCD An 8 appears in the upper right hand corner indicating that what is displayed on your LCD is actually the Top Level menu of the remote 392xPlus modem If the message Remote FP Busy appears the remote modem s front panel is already in Remote mode The Top Level menu of the remote 392xPlus modem is similar to the local 392xPlus modem with the following exceptions The Talk Data and Security branches do not appear Change Directory is the only function available under the Call Setup branch Local Analog Loop and Remote Digital Loop do not appear under the Test branch when using the secondary channel When using the primary channel the Test branch does not appear Poll List Display is the only function available under the PList branch Exit Remote replaces Remote on the local modem s LCD To return to local modem operation select ExitRem Any changes made to configuration options in the remote modem are saved The following conditions can cause Remote branch access to fail The local modem is not able to communicate with the remote modem because of a poor dial network or leased line connection or the remote modem is not a 3900 Series modem If this is the case the status message No Response appears on the LCD If a connection is established but the remote mode
3. The configuration of the current operating line facility either APL primary or backup appears Refer to Table 3 7 Press the gt key to display the next screen Status Backup lt A Bkup 2wAPL Good A ae e This screen displays the configuration and condition of the inactive line facility either APL primary or backup There are four condition codes Good Bad and blank 3 26 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Table 3 7 provides information about the Status Backup screens The first column lists all possible configurations for the modem s currently active line The second column lists all possible configurations for the modem s inactive lines The third column provides information about the inactive line condition XXXX represents the condition code of the inactive line Table 3 7 Backup Status Screens Active Line Inactive Line 1st Screen Display 2nd Screen Display Possible Inactive Backup Line Condition LinezPri 4w APL or LinezPri 2w APL Bckup 2wAPL XXXX or Bckup Dial blank Good indicates that line continuity is detected Bad indicates that line continuity is not detected 2 indicates that the line condition is unknown Backup Facility Check is making its first determination of the line conditions since the last retrain blank indicates that the BackupLineCheck configuration option is disabled or
4. 3 64 Cal Senp Brane o2 5 PI eee ee Cpe eae sees 3 65 Tolk Data Branch ce eee m e Rene t eerte 3 73 Security Branch i c Ree es REESE REDE TRUE EE 3 75 Remote Branch asse e Re Ree andes 3 76 4 DCP Configuration Loops tape dere esee opa deep o dest 4 1 Configure Branch 1 eoe rete ee behead 4 3 Configuration Tables cirenean e rere 4 8 BIultiport Mode I Ate eee nes 4 8 SIngleport MOOG oerte bees Siete seek 4 31 5 AT Command Set and S Registers OVERVIEW A DTP 5 1 Operating Nodes scena res educ e deese pn 5 1 Command Guidelines Eee Ete Ce EA 5 2 AF OIL List EP 5 5 Sane ester List uuu diced p er eet pee ak 5 15 6 Dial Access Security Appendices COVOIVIEW ebd 6 1 Security Branch pni RE EE Ra ER ERR 6 4 Security Configuration Options 05 56 ce ho bw Ret 6 13 Security Password Entry Techniques 6 15 Database Table Exemples Reb Rep 6 16 As Momi DIES eae es DU 1 B EroublesbOGUHE Luliiecttee4 Re Up eee v b py B 1 C Pin Assignmenis clilmks cc nk lade es pecias C 1 D CCITT V 25bis Dialing Commands and Responses D 1 BE Character Table seio ertt RR wed E 1 Default Configuration Options
5. 77 De 2002620 MODEL 3921 Plus SINGLEPORT MODEM 65 E NS UE ou ox go B oO 7 Q 7 8 4747 EQ 7 TT gt gt V E ay LILY e AM Z 2 z MODEL 3921 Plus MULTIPORT MODEM CIRCUIT CARD GUIDES 495 14708 Figure 2 3 Installing the Model 3921 Pius Modem 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 2 8 Modem Installation If the Model 3921 Plus modem is to communicate with an installed SDCP install the modem as described above and perform the following steps 1 Press the Select key on the SDCP The Carr Slot screen appears with the cursor on the slot selection position 01 on the first LCD line in following screen example Carr Slot 1 01A A T 1 E 2 Press the F1 f or F2 key until the slot number you want appears 3 If you have more than one carrier press lt 1 key to move the cursor to the carrier selection position 1 on the first LCD line in the following screen example Carr Slot 1 01A A T 1 PU Aj EJ Press the F1 or F2 key until the carrier number you want appears The carrier number selection has a range of 1 to 8 since a single SDCP can control a configuration of up to eight carriers This is only possible if the SDU
6. 04 F 1 Sample Configurations eese ee eee G 1 H usos ee Made ee aoa te See ae geh H 1 Glossary Index ii November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Table of Contents List of Figures Figure Page 1 1 Model 3920Plus Standalone Singleport and Multiport Modems 1 3 1 2 Model 3921Plus Singleport Modem 0 ee eee 1 5 1 3 Model 3921Plus Multiport Modem 0 eee ee ee eee 1 6 2 1 Model 3920Plus Multiport Back Panel and Power Supply 2 4 2 2 Modems Back Connector Plates cesso lt wae 2 7 2 3 Installing the Model 3921Plus Modems esee 2 8 2 4 Circuit Pack LOCE ekz AERE ATA RARE Peo e he held ids 2 10 3 1 Model 3920PIUS DOP exu eie tee 3 3 3 2 Optional SDCP and Model 3921Plus Faceplate 3 4 353 LCD und Keypad ue ca he pe hee Renee ee Bae ERE 3 7 3 4 Jbaeal Analog Loopback coena ene Rr Ur 3 57 3 5 Remote Distal Loopback RE eR ep Re HE SE Rer 3 58 3 6 Local Digital Loopback sos cerere derinio ip eee edes WED AUT oH 3 60 3 7 Pattern Test and Local Analog Loopback Test 3 61 3 8 Pattern Test and Digital Loopback Test 00 0 0 ee eee ee ee eee 3 62 3 9 End to End Pat
7. 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 65 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems To access the Call Setup branch from the Top Level menu make the following selections Leased 28 8 A ences lt Em 2 8 Press the key until Call Setup appears Select Call Setup Dial For dial backup applications Dial allows you to dial any telephone number stored in directory locations 1 24 Any telephone number dialed using the DCP must already exist in a directory location Refer to Change Directory for information on storing telephone numbers in directory locations For leased backup applications Dial allows you to switch to the backup leased line Any valid non empty directory location may be used The remote modem cannot automatically answer the simulated call Use the Answer function of the remote modem in conjunction with the Dial function to manually switch to the backup leased line To access Dial from the Call Setup branch make the following selection Call Setup gt A Dial Disconnect A 9 cm Select Dial to display the first directory telephone number DialDirectory CA 01 5551234 A 8 To view other directory locations select Nxt DialDirectory A Nxt nen A Once the directory location you want appears on the LCD press the F2 or F3 key to dial the number 3 66 November 1996 3920 A2 G
8. 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 13 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Messages listed in Table 3 4 are common operational messages that occur during modem operation These messages normally appear on the second line of the LCD Table 3 4 Common Operational Messages PE Indicates Please Wait A command to a local device takes more than two seconds to complete Command Sent A command is sent to a remote modem No Rem Response or A remote modem does not respond to a command within 5 seconds Remote Modem Fail Command Complete A command issued to a local or remote modem is completed Invalid Command The modem cannot complete a command Messages listed in Table 3 5 are dial access security messages Table 3 5 Dial Access Security Messages Secun Indicates Get VF PsWd The answering modem is waiting for the originating caller to transmit a VF password Get DTE PsWd The answering modem is waiting to receive a valid DTE password from the remote DTE VF PsWd Timeout The modem did not finish answering a call disconnected because the allowed time limit was exceeded before the modem received a VF password from the originating dialer Unknown DTEpswd The modem did not finish answering a call disconnected because the DTE passwords received from the remote DTE were invalid No Orig PsWd The modem did not attempt to establish a call as requested because the AT dial command
9. 4 46 Dial Line Configuration Options Singleport Mode 4 50 Leased Line Configuration Options Singleport Mode 4 53 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options Singleport Mode 4 58 Test Configuration Options Singleport Mode 4 64 Miscellaneous Configuration Options Singleport Mode 4 66 E detta LI e Lacus 5 3 397 x Pl AT Commands Rr EE re MOI SERERE 5 6 392xPlus S Registet hie Se eX RES Sey REED pe e ERE 5 16 Edit Password Table Group OpBons sore Er bx ROT eee eee 6 8 Set Answer Security Group Options serii a sese ee eee bee i 6 9 Set Originate Security Group Options ee cener eraat RE REA 6 10 Security Configuration eee Pub ee 6 13 Security Database Table Using VF Side Passwords 6 16 Security Database Table Using DTE Side Passwords 6 17 Security Database Table Using Both VF Side and DTE Side Passwords 6 17 Moder Healt occu ode HERE EMS RSD ERAN ETE RES B 1 Leased Line Operaloum ERES sug brane be aera RN B 2 Dial Backup Operation pes cise aa beca cetpmeeeREG e o es ak eis PE nee B 2 Modem DTE Connechtton i ERE Mad
10. Async EIA Not shown when the Digital Bridge configuration option is enabled A 2 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Menu Tree from previous page Singleport mode only A Control Call Setup Tik Data n Remote Dial Test Backup Security only Dial A Answer A Change_Directory Choose Address TMp Control only Disconnect A Dial Standby A or Choose Password Return to Dial TMp only Directory Locations 1 24 i r i Not in TMp Trib Secondary Prim data blckd Self Rem_Digital_Loop Pattern A ExitRem appears A instead of Remote when using Remote mode Abort A Loc Analog Loop Loc Digital Loop A A Set_Access Ctrl Reset_Security Admin Password EditPassWdTable Set_Orig_Secur Set_Answer_Sec Set_Admin_PsWd 3921 Plus only Make_Busy Download_Code Data_Stream or DownloadSoftware Speaker Reset RemoveMakeBusy EIA LEDs Service Line VF Thresh Update or DiscServiceLine Does not appear in TMp Control mode Does not appear in Remote mode Self Loc Digital Loop and Pattern appear if the secondary channel is used Rem Digital Loop does not appear in TMp mode 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 A 3 Troubleshooting d TRI d PP ng ig toed eae eT ha ee B 1 Overview This appendix points out basic problems that can occur when operating a 392xPlus modem Use Tables B 1
11. 4 18 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Line Dialer Multiport Mode The Line Dialer configuration options establish parameters used by the modem to answer or originate calls Table 4 2 shows each Line Dialer configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Table 4 2 1 of 3 Line Dialer Configuration Options Multiport Mode gt lt AutoAnswerRing 1 Nxt 1 Disable 2 4 6 8 10 Auto Answer Ring Count Determines the number of rings necessary before the answering modem answers an incoming call For example if this option is set to 2 then the answering modem answers after the second ring NOTE The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries Disable If selected the modem must be answered using either the DCP s Answer command or the Talk Data function Refer to Talk Data in Chapter 3 DCP Operation for more on Manual Answer Dialer Type Tone Nxt Tone Pulse Dialer Type Selects either tone DTMF dialing or pulse rotary dialing mode NOTE Pulse Mode is disabled in Denmark and in Sweden DialTone Detect Enable Nxt Enable Disable Dial Tone Detect
12. 2 Press the key until Factory comes into view then press the F1 key to display the factory preset configurations Factory preset configurations are Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Trellis Multipoint Async Dial Sync Dial and UNIX Dial If Sync Leased or Async Leased is selected you must choose either Answer or Originate mode If TMp is selected you must choose either Control or Trib Tributary mode 3 Press the gt key until the appropriate factory preset appears on the LCD and press the corresponding function key to select your choice For certain factory presets you will also need to choose the appropriate mode 4 Choose Function appears and displays the Edit and Save functions 5 Press the F3 key Save to save the new factory preset configuration to one of three configuration areas Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 These three configuration areas are nonvolatile memory locations Active Saved contains the most recently saved changes to any configuration options In the event of power loss the modem retrieves these configuration options Customer 1 and Customer 2 are user defined configuration areas The LCD now displays Sav EditArea to 6 Press the key until the appropriate configuration area appears on the LCD then press the corresponding function key to select your choice Saving configuration options to the Active Saved configuration area automatically saves them to the Active Operating co
13. A Gm 5 As the firmware transfers the local and remote LCD s bottom line displays the status of the download process plus the number of records sent versus the total number of records for that data bank number For Single download applications if the download is successful the local modem displays Remote Clone OK and the remote modem displays Frmware Upgrade If the download took place over the dial network the modems disconnect when the download is complete If the Single download is unsuccessful RemClone Failed appears on the LCD s top line Attempt another download from the local modem If this fails contact your service representative 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 49 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Automatic Firmware Download New releases may be available for the 392xPlus modems The latest 392xPlus firmware is available at no charge from the Automatic Firmware Download Center Refer to page A in the front of this document for contact information To download the firmware your modem must be configured for dialing Save your modem s current configuration to the Customer 1 or Customer 2 memory area and load the Async Dial factory template refer to Chapter 4 DCP Configuration for more information about saving and changing configuration options If you have a DTE terminal or PC attached to your modem informational messages appear on it when the modem connects These messages show
14. Async DTE Rate 19200 Nxt 19200 57600 38400 28800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 0 300 This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Asynchronous DTE Data Rate Identifies the asynchronous DTE s operating rate to the modem Data rates from 57 600 bps to 300 bps are supported NOTE To prevent losing data in 57 600 bps applications a 16650 UART on the PC s serial port is required as well as a communications package which can take advantage of its 16 byte buffer In addition a 386 PC 25 MHz or faster is required and the RS232 cable length must be minimized to reduce capacitance NOTE To configure the Async DTE Rate differently than the modem rate ensure that the Error Control Mode configuration option see the V 42 MNP Buffer Singleport Mode section is set to BufferMode The AT prefix determines Async DTE Rate 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 33 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 7 2 of 8 DTE Interface Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt Asyn Data Bits 8 Nxt 8 7 9 DirectMde 6 DirectMde This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Asynchronous Number of Data Bits Determines if the asynchronous data length is composed of 6 7 8 or 9 data bits This data length excludes start parity and stop bits 8 Sets data length to 8 data bits 7 Sets data length to 7 data bits 9 DirectMode S
15. Speaker Volume Medium Nxt Medium Low High Speaker Volume Controls the level of speaker volume NOTE Speaker Volume can also be temporarily set using the Control branch however a reset or power cycle will restore the modem to the Speaker Control and Speaker Volume configuration option settings The AT command for Low is LO or L1 The AT command for Medium is L2 The AT command for High is L3 4 66 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 14 2 of 3 Miscellaneous Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt Access frm Remt Enable Nxt Enable Disable Access from Remote Determines if your modem s DCP can be accessed by a remote modem via the VF line CAUTION If this configuration option is disabled the modem cannot be accessed by another modem Enable Allows access from a remote modem Disable Does not allow access from a remote modem NOTE The remote modem must be a Model 3920Plus or Model 3921 Plus modem The AT command is S Register S55 n where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable RemAccssPasswrd 00000000 Nxt 1 00000000 Remote Access Password Allows the entry of a password for establishing control of a remote modem from the DCP of a local modem The same password must be used in both the local and remote modem CAUTION A remote access password should be selected for security purposes NOTE If the Access from Remote configuration option is set to Disable the
16. A capability to respond to a call received over a dial line When leased line operation fails this function forces the modem to dial the telephone number stored in directory location 1 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 Glossary 1 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems automatic dial standby automatic rate control backbone network backplane baud Bisync bit bps broadcast buffer byte carrier carrier mount CCITT channel character character echo When operating in Dial Backup mode this function forces the modem to periodically check the quality of the leased line If the leased line is found to be at normal operating condition the modem disconnects from the dial network and continues normal operation over the leased line network Modems adjust their signaling rate based on current line conditions The primary route from a control modem to its first tributary when the communications network contains extended control modems A common bus at the rear of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier connecting each circuit card slot to the SDCP and or SDU It also distributes low voltage ac power to each slot A unit of signaling speed that is equal to the number of symbols per second This is not necessarily the same as bits per second although the terms are frequently interchanged Binary Synchronous Communications An IBM communications protocol that has become an industry standard It uses a defined set of
17. COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 12 3 of 6 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options Singleport lt EC Fallbck Char 013 ASCI Nxt 013 ASCI This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and EC Negotiate Buffer is not configured for Disable Error Control Fallback Character This configuration option allows you to enter the ASCII value of the error control fallback character This provides the remote modem with the ability to end the error control link negotiating handshaking sequence by sending this character The modems will connect in Buffer mode no error control Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs When the modem receives this fallback character it switches to Buffer mode and transmits an EC fallback character to the DTE When comparing incoming characters for a match against the EC fallback character the modem ignores parity The AT command is An where n is a value from 0 to 127 Flw Cntl of DTE CTS to DTE Nxt CTS to DTE Disable XON XOFF This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is not configured for DirectMode Flow Control of DTE Determines how the modem controls the flow of data from the DTE CTS to DTE Method of flow control in which the modem raises and lowers its CTS interface lead to indicate when the DTE should start and stop sending data Disable The mo
18. E 2 e The function field displays the function selected Active Delete or Skip The address field xxx displays the network management address of the modem to be changed The valid address field range is from 001 to 256 To increment digits within the address field xxx use the lt i and gt keys to position the cursor _ under the digit to be incremented Press the F2 T key to increment the digit Press Enter Ent to implement the function yyyyyy you selected Active Delete or Skip The message Command Complete appears on the second line of the LCD to indicate that the poll list change occurred If the message Poll List Check appears you attempted to delete an address that is not on the poll list or you attempted to add an address that is already on the poll list If the message Poll Lst too Big appears you exceeded the maximum number of downstream devices To return to the selected function Active Delete or Skip press the A key The address automatically increments upon returning to this function To exit this function Active Delete or Skip and remain in the PList Change branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press Z key The Add function does not appear in Remote mode or on control modems Add allows you to add the tributary modem to a control modem s poll list This function should be initiated from only one tributary modem at a time To acce
19. key until Control appears Select Control 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 35 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Speaker Speaker allows you to make temporary adjustments to the modem s speaker volume Upon a reset speaker volume returns to its configured setting For more information on speaker settings refer to the Misc section in Chapter 4 To access Speaker from the Control branch make the following selection Control gt A Speaker Reset 45 lt tm r Select Speaker Speaker Control gt Off Low Med 2 lt a re Press the gt key and appropriate function keys to choose the desired selection DCP selections are Off Turns the speaker off Low Adjusts the speaker to low volume Med Adjusts the speaker to medium volume High Adjusts the speaker to high volume The message Command Complete appears on the LCD To exit Speaker and remain in the Control branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key 3 36 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Reset Data Stream Reset causes the modem to stop operation and perform a complete program restart The modem begins the power up test sequence that ends with the Top Level menu displayed on the LCD Configuration options stored in an Active Saved configuration area are copied to the Active Operating configuration area To access Reset f
20. network interface module NIM 2 2 3 41 network management address 3 31 4 29 4 68 network management system connection 2 6 operating modes AT commands 5 1 Talk Data 3 10 3 73 3 75 operational messages 3 11 3 16 Options Status branch 3 28 options strap See configuration options originate access security 6 2 6 15 6 16 part numbers 3 23 passwords administrative 6 5 6 6 remote access 3 76 3 78 3 79 4 4 4 7 4 28 4 67 security 6 2 6 4 6 15 6 16 pattern test 3 61 3 63 phone See telephone external phone numbers See telephone numbers pin assignments C 2 PList Poll List branch 3 10 3 30 3 35 power consumption 1 14 power supply connection 2 5 2 6 power up self test 2 11 public switched telephone network PSTN See dial pulse code modulation 3 22 quick configuration display 1 10 3 15 rates automatic control 4 24 4 54 dial line 1 14 4 22 4 50 5 18 leased line 1 14 4 24 4 53 5 19 rear connector plate 1 6 rear panel connectors C 2 Record Status branch 3 28 3 30 Remote access password 3 76 3 78 3 79 4 4 4 7 4 28 4 67 branch 3 10 3 76 3 80 remote digital loopback test 3 58 3 59 requirements ac power 1 13 government 1 11 1 12 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 Index 3 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems reset control 3 37 result codes enable disable 4 43 5 7 extended 4 43 5 8 list 5 3 5 4 numeric or word 4 44 5 7 ringer equivalence n
21. 3 3 3 6 escape character 4 42 5 2 5 16 line Connection dial 2 5 2 6 leased 2 5 2 6 Line Dialer configuration options group 4 19 4 46 Index 2 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Index Load Number LN 1 12 N loopback local analog 3 57 3 58 local digital 3 60 3 61 remote digital 3 58 3 59 Make Busy 3 40 3 41 manual dial See Talk Data menu structure 3 10 tree A 1 A 3 messages LCD 3 11 3 16 3 18 3 19 3 27 3 28 result codes 5 3 5 4 Misc configuration options group 4 28 4 66 mixed inbound rates 4 53 Model 3920Plus P standalone multiport 1 2 standalone singleport 1 2 Model 3921Plus carrier mounted mulitport 1 4 carrier mounted singleport 1 4 Model 392xPlus 1 2 features 1 7 menu structure 3 9 operational modes 1 7 model number Mod 3 23 modifiers dial string 3 72 5 6 modulation dial line configuration option 4 22 4 24 4 50 4 53 modulation schemes dial line 1 13 4 22 4 50 5 18 leased line 1 13 4 24 4 53 5 19 MSD Modem Sharing Device 1 9 multiplexer TDM See MUX mode multipoint operation 1 8 1 10 Q multiport backup 1 10 Multiport mode 1 10 4 8 configuration options Dial Line 4 22 4 23 DTE Interface 4 10 4 18 Leased Line 4 24 4 26 R Line Dialer 4 19 4 21 Misc 4 28 4 32 Test 4 27 multiport modem 1 2 1 7 model 3921Plus 1 4 MUX mode 1 7 1 9 4 10 DTE Bridge 4 10 mux disabled 1 7 mux enabled 1 7 TDM MSD 1 9 4 10
22. An Maximum Frame Size Configure Edit 64 bytes V42 MNP Buffer 1 128 bytes A2 192 bytes A3 256 bytes A4 32 bytes A5 16 bytes Cn Error Control Negotiate Buffer Configure Edit co Disable V42 MNP Buffer C1 Enable 2 Disables and switches modem to Buffer mode Dn CTS Control Configure Edit DO Forced On Forces CTS to always ON DTE Itertace D1 Standard RS232 D2 Wink When Disconnect CTS is turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect D3 Follows DTR The state of CTS follows the state of DTR D4 Follows RTS The state of CTS follows the state of RTS Gn Modem to Modem Flow Control Configure Edit G0 Disable V42 MNP Buffer 1 Enable Kn Buffer Control Send Break Control Break Forces Escape Break Buffer Control Configure Edit Break Buffer Send Break Break Forces V42 MNP Control Control Escape Send Break WO Discard Data Break First Enable Control K1 Discard Data Break First Disable Configure Edit K2 Keep Data Break First Enable V42 MNP Buffer K3 Keep Data Break First Disable WA Keep Data Data First Enable Break Forces K5 Keep Data Data First Disable Escape Configure Edit DTE Dialer 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 5 13 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 5 2 9 of 9 392xPlus AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence Nn Error Control Mode Configure Edit WO Buffer Mode V42 MNP Buffer W1 Direct Mode N2 MNP or Disco
23. COMSPHERE 392xPLUS MODEMS MODELS 3920PLUS AND 3921 PLUS INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUAL Document No 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems COMSPHERE 392x Plus Modems Models 3920 and 3921 Plus Installation and Operation Manual 3920 A2 GN31 30 4th Edition November 1996 Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release or a Firmware Update Description document to this manual For the Model 3920Plus standalone modems the Universal Service Order Code USOC for Permissive mode is RJ11C The Canadian equivalent to RJ11C is For the 3921 Plus carrier mounted modems the USOC for Permissive mode is RJ21X The Canadian equivalent to RJ21X is CA21A For regulatory approval refer to the product labeling or contact your local representative Warranty Sales and Service Information Contact your sales or service representative directly for any help needed For additional information concerning warranty sales service repair installation documentation or training use one of the following methods e Via the Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at http www paradyne com Via Telephone Call our automated call system to receive current information via fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 International call 727 530 2340 Trademarks All products an
24. Call your sales representative to order additional product documentation viii November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Overview Introduction OVERVIEW acte lees opts RA EROR E RR E e CaN E aes COMSPHERE 392xPIns Models oce keiten vetere Model 3920Plus Standalone Singleport Modem Model 3920Plus Standalone Multiport Modem Model 3921Plus Carrier Mounted Singleport Modem Model 3921Plus Carrier Mounted Multiport Modem 39 xPlus Operational Modes da eer epee 299 Pius FEATS er iai eaea a a a i ESE qat a Sine leport acce ed Sie end ce noe Rote e te dot as 392xPlus Features 2 EY ex EORR Rex v Applications eere URP pere e ne RE sass hilos M PIC Dirak eased Backup ubere DERI S MSD i cer Dieta BOR decenas e PE scetur RU V 34 Modulation i rec e RR mmm ER E Ee x Multtport Backup c Re RR RR ICI RR PERDE Government Requirements and Equipment Return United States ss enn ere RR p UR I eh REFS Canada cete kt erp SR dae ecale nad odes Gee RR Hb E RES Technical Specifications cce fepe eec The COMSPHERE 392xPlus modems are full feature high speed leased modems providing reliable asynchronous and sy
25. EE gt Press any function key to select Clone_Remote The next screen to appear is determined by the modem s configuration Refer to the appropriate section based on your modem s configuration Clone Remote in Point to Point Configurations Clone Remote in Broadcast Configurations or Clone Remote in Multipoint Configuration Clone Remote in Point to Point Configurations Before using Clone Remote in point to point configurations verify the following e The 392xPlus modems have an established leased line connection using either V 34 family V 33 V 32 family or V 29 modulation refer to the Leased Line section in Chapter 4 or a dial network connection using either V 34 family or V 32 family modulations refer to the Dial Line section in Chapter 4 e The remote modem s Access From Remote configuration option is enabled refer to the Misc section in Chapter 4 e The password Remote Access Password configuration option is the same in both the local and remote modems For an example of how to change the password refer to the Editing and Saving a Configuration Option section in Chapter 4 After completing these checks proceed to the section titled Implementing a Clone Remote Operation which follows the descriptions of multipoint cloning operations Clone Remote in Broadcast Configurations A tributary modem configured for extended diagnostics Diagnostic Connection configuration option set to Modem DC can perform
26. Long Space Disc Enable Nxt Enable Disable Long Space Disconnect Determines the modem s response to a continuous spacing condition sent from the remote modem before it goes on hook Issuing a long space is one method of disconnecting a call Enable Modem disconnects if it receives a continuous space from the DTE For modulations lower than 4800 bps the modem s transmitter will transmit 4 seconds of long space upon a disconnect Disable Modem does not disconnect if it receives a continuous space from the DTE Modem will not transmit a long space disconnect The AT command for Disable is YO The AT command for Enable is Y1 No Carrier Disc 2sec Nxt 2sec Disable 5sec 10sec 20sec No Carrier Disconnect If the modem no longer receives carrier from the remote modem it disconnects the call This configuration option determines how long carrier is OFF before the modem disconnects Loss of carrier is one method of disconnecting a call 2 5 10 20 sec Modem disconnects if carrier turns OFF for more than 2 seconds 5 seconds 10 seconds or 20 seconds Disable Modem does not disconnect if carrier turns OFF NOTE The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries The AT command is S Register S10 n where n is 255 for Disable or 0 to 254 in 0 1 second increments for Enable No Data Disc Disable Nxt Disable 10min 30min 60min No Data Disconnect Forces the modem to disconnect if no data is transmitted
27. ede er ES D 3 Delayed Call Indicator mette rione soto te Bide D 3 Call Answer Commands veorkRR Ges REX uS sh Race eR E PUE D 3 Incoming Call INC 4 5 Re renis abita S D 3 Disregard Incoming Call DEG ihnen t ette o mete xe D 3 Connect Incoming Call CIC sed ak ape mee ex uen D 4 Prosram Normal BRNO iu RERO a RET ERES EXE D 4 Request List of Delayed Numbers D 4 Request List of Forbidden Numbers RLF D 4 Request List of Stored Numbers RLN D 5 List Delayed Numbers Response LSD i D 5 List Forbidden Numbers Response LSF D 5 List Stored Number Response LSN etes RR D 5 Command Response os Uer UR RRCLERIOY NU E D 6 Valid CV E at ce RR hs eee ege al M ede vacancies D 6 Invalid CNW sd mer eC ee d ua D 6 Overview This appendix describes V 25bis dialing commands and responses CCITT V 25bis is an international dialing protocol that permits direct and stored number dialing using DTEs in either Asynchronous bisynchronous or HDLC operating mode The 392xPlus modems support V 25bis request and answer commands As commands are entered from the DTE the 392xPlus modems issue a response to the DTE which indicates if the call failed or connected or if the command is valid or invalid
28. primary leased lines and the LCD displays the status message Command Complete Once the modem is in Dial Standby mode Return_to_Dial appears on the LCD Selecting this function forces the modem to backup networks and the LCD displays the status message Command Complete 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 3 69 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Change Directory Change Directory allows you to enter or modify telephone numbers The modem has nonvolatile memory locations that allow you to store up to 24 telephone numbers Each directory location can accept up to 40 characters this includes the telephone number and dial command modifiers Any telephone number dialed using the DCP Dial command must appear in a directory location NOTE If the modem is operating on leased lines and has a dial line attached for dial backup purposes it is required that directory location 1 contain the telephone number used for dial backup To access Change Directory from the Call Setup branch make the following selections Call Setup lt A Change Directory A fel a Press the key until Change Directory appears Press any function key to select Change_Directory 01 551234 Ay ine i _ CR 2 gt The phone number listed in directory location 1 appears Select Nxt to display other directory locations 3 70 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation
29. 2400 bps Dial Line Modulations Paradyne V 34 33 600 31 200 bps CCITT V 34 28 800 26 400 24 000 21 600 19 200 16 800 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps Paradyne V 32 terbo 19 200 16 800 bps CCITT V 32bis 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 4800 bps CCITT V 32 9600 4800 bps CCITT V 22bis 2400 bps CCITT V 22 1200 bps CCITT V 23 1200 600 bps CCITT V 21 300 bps Bell 212A 1200 bps Bell 103J 300 bps Paradyne Point to Point Diagnostic 2400 bps ENVIRONMENT Operating Temperature Relative Humidity Shock and Vibration Storage Temperature 32 F 0 C to 122 F 50 C 5 to 90 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping 4 F 20 C to 158 F 70 C DTE INTERFACE 25 pin D subminiature connector EIA 232 D CCITT V 24 MODEL 3920 5 POWER SUPPLY AC POWER REQUIREMENTS 100 to 250 Vac 50 to 60 Hz 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 1 13 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 1 2 2 of 2 Technical Specifications for 392x Plus Modems Specifications Description POWER CONSUMPTION Model 3920Plus Singleport Model 3921 Plus Singleport Model 3920Plus Multiport Model 3921 Plus Multiport 6 watts typical including power supply speaker off 4 watts typical each card Speaker consumption is approximately 1 watt at high volume 8 watts typical including power supply speaker off 6 watts typical each card Speaker consumption is
30. A private telephone line connection exclusively for the user No dialing is necessary Light Emitting Diode A light or status indicator on the DCP that glows in response to the presence of a certain condition e g an alarm The modem s transmit VF signal is looped to its receiver A disconnect can occur if the modem receives an extended space from a remote modem for example when a remote modem is commanded to disconnect it transmits a continuous space to the local modem before disconnecting Any test that verifies a device s integrity by connecting the device s output to the device s input then checking the received signal for errors The structure containing the menu hierarchy starting at a Top Level menu and extending down to various modem functions In a multipoint network several different data rates from tributary modems transmitters communicating with one control modem This protocol Microcom Networking Protocol detects and corrects data errors caused by telephone line noise and signal distortion MNP5 includes data compression Modulator DEModulator A device that transforms signals from digital to analog form and vice versa The process of varying some characteristics usually amplitude frequency and or phase of a carrier wave to form data transmissions Modem Sharing Device Allows from 2 to 4 physical ports to share a communication channel A device that enables the simultaneous transmission of multiple i
31. Access frm Remt RemAccssPasswrd Dir 1_ Callback NMS Call Msgs NetworkPosition NetMngmtAddress Diag Connection Link Delay sec 495 14624 01 4 32 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration DTE Interface Singleport Mode lt The DTE Interface configuration options contain EIA 232 D CCITT V 24 and asynchronous character format information essential for maintaining a connection and for transmitting data between the DTE and the modem Table 4 7 shows each DTE Interface configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Table 4 7 1 of 8 DTE Interface Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt Async Sync Mode Sync Nxt Sync Async Asynchronous Synchronous Mode Determines whether the modem operates in Asynchronous mode or Synchronous mode If the AT command set is enabled and this configuration option is set to Sync then the modem operates in Async mode when offline For Async Dial Async Leased and UNIX Dial Async is the factory default The AT commands for Async Mode are amp MO or amp QO The AT commands for Sync Mode are amp M1 amp M2 amp M3 or amp Q1 amp Q2 amp Q3
32. Bell 212A and Bell 103J Dial Line Rate 28800 V34 Nxt 33600 31200 28800 V34 26400 V34 24000 V34 21600 V34 19200 V34 16800 V34 14400 V34 12000 V34 9600 V34 7200 V34 4800 V34 2400 V34 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b 2400 V22bis 1200 V22 1200 212A 0 300 V21 0 300 103 1200 75 V23 75 1200 V23 600 75 V23 75 600 V23 Dial Line Rate This configuration option determines the modem s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on dial lines Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs NOTE Certain changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset 33600 31200 28800 V34 26400 V34 24000 V34 21600 V34 19200 V34 16800 V34 14400 V34 12000 V34 9600 V34 7200 V34 4800 V34 2400 V34 The modem operates using V 34 modulation at the data rate selected 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b The modem operates using V 32 terbo V 32bis or V 32 modulation at the data rate selected 2400 V22bis 1200 V22 1200 212A Modem operates using the modulation and data rate selected 0 300 V21 0 300 103J Modem operates in full duplex Asynchronous mode These data rates do not support V 42 or MNP error control 1200 75 V23 75 1200 V23 600 75 V23 75 600 V23 The modem will run in asynchronous semi full duplex mode at the rate chosen The AT command i
33. COMEIMICW A PTT UICE F 1 Table F 1 lists the six sets of default preset configuration options labeled Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Trellis Multipoint Async Dial Sync Dial and UNIX Dial These six sets contain the most commonly used configuration options for modems installed into these hardware environments For information on setting the default configuration options refer to the Overview section in Chapter 4 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 F 1 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table F 1 1 of 10 Factory Default Configuration Options Contiduration Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial iin Default Default Default Default Default Default P Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings DTE Interface Multiport mode MUX Sub group MUX Mode TDM MSD TDM MSD TDM MSD Disable Disable TDM MSD trib DTE Bridge control Tx Clock Source Internal Internal Loop Internal Internal t Internal trib Internal control Backup Tx Clock Internal Internal Loop Internal Internal Internal Source 6 trib Internal control CT111 Rate Disable Disable Disable Disable lt q Disable lt q Disable Control MSD Port Host Host Host Host lt q Host lt q Host Control Port Rate Sub group Modem MSD 6 Disable Disable Disable Control Disable lt q Disable lt q Disable Rate at 33 6 K Rate at 28 8 K Rate at 24 0 K Rate
34. Cable 2 Cable 2 4800 DTE Cable1 Cable1 Sync Cable1 Cable1 Cable 1 Cable 1 4800 1 Cable 3 4800 V32b 4800 V32b 1 Leased Us 4800 DTE 3910 A 3910 B Sync Cable 2 able Cable 2 Cable 1 Figure G 2 Sample Configuration Extended Point to Point Configuration Options 3920Plus A Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following exception Rate Refer to Sample Port Rate Table in this section 3920Plus Sync Leased Originate default configuration options with the following exceptions TX Clock Source Setto RXC Loop Rate Refer to Sample Port Rate Table in this section Port TXC Source Set Port 4 to External G 4 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Sample Configurations 3910 A 3910 B Sample Port Rate Table Cables Cable 1 Cable 2 Cable 3 Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following exceptions TX Clock Source Set to External LeasedLine Rate Set to 4800 V32b Autorate Leased Line Set to Disable Use Sync Leased Originate default configuration options with the following exceptions TX Clock Source Setto RXC Loop LeasedLine Rate Set to 4800 V32b Autorate Leased Line Set to Disable Port Rate Port 1 Port 2 Port3 Port 4 28 8K 9600 9600 4800 4800 24 0K 9600 Disable 4800 4800 19 2K 9600 Disable 4800 4800 16 8K 9600 Disable Disable 4800
35. Modem is configured for XON XOFF Psthru XON XOFF Passthrough Considers an XON XOFF character as data and passes it on to the remote modem In this case the DTE at one end of the communications link can send flow control characters to the other DTE This is also known as DTE to DTE flow control Disable Flow control characters are processed but are not passed on to the remote modem Enable Flow control characters are processed and passed on to the remote modem The AT command for Disable is The AT command for Enable is X1 Mdm Mdm FlowCtl Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is configured for V42 MNPorBfr MNP or Buf fr or Bufr or BufferMode Modem to Modem Flow Control If a modem s buffers begin to fill due to data it is receiving from the remote modem but is not passing on to the DTE it can issue XON XOFF flow control characters to the remote modem This only applies if Buffer nonerror control mode is selected If Error Control mode is enabled flow control between the modems will happen automatically regardless of the setting of this option Disable Modem does not respond to XON and XOFF characters received over the VF line Also the modem will not transmit an XOFF character to the remote end if its receive buffers are full Enable Modem stops transmitting data to the remote modem if it receive
36. November 1996 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Displays current status of modem along with data rate and error control mode to next page gt Tributary only Ld EditArea frm Display Clear Change Add Acquire Active f Delete Activ Operating Customer1 Factory Skip Active Saved Customer2 Sync_Leased TMp Sync_Dial Port Select Async_Leased Async_Dial UNIX_Dial Multiport Mode Choose Mode Choose Mode DeviceHS Identity V 34 Options Service_Log al Control Trib VF DTE Backup Record Answer xOriginat Major Ser TxRate Minor Mod RxRate Displa Status FRev SymbolRate e Dial HP TxLevel Thresh FPt Boy Pate Security Country LSD Line Pri 4W APL Port1 DTR Line Pri 2W APL Port2 Display Clear DSR Line Bkup 2W APL Port3 Tst Line Dial Backup Bon Line Dial ONLY Sree RXD Line No Sync RTS Sig Noise NrEchLvl GPS FarEchLv Choose Function FarEchDel EchoFreqOff Phase Hts Edit StrapGroup Save Impul Hts DropOuts eee Active Saved Customer Customer2 Hi Jtr Singleport ik a Singleport mode amp Async Singleport mode only onl mode onl Gain Hts DTE Interface Line Dialer Leased Line Test Security DTE Dialer Dial Line V42 MNP Buffer Misc Mux Enabled only MUX Copy Porti Port2 Port3 Port4
37. Sets the modem for dial tone detection enable or blind dialing disable NOTE It may not be possible to disable Dial Tone Detect in some countries Enable Modem disconnects the call if a dial tone is not detected within 10 seconds and displays No Dial Tone on both the LCD and asynchronous DTE terminal Disable Modem dials a call whether or not it detects a dial tone on the line This is known as blind dialing The period of time the modem waits before dialing is specified in the Blind Dial Paus configuration option Blind Dial Paus 2sec Nxt 2sec 4sec 6sec 8sec 10sec 20sec This configuration option only appears when Dial Tone Detect is disabled Blind Dial Pause Determines how long the modem waits before dialing a telephone number when Dialtone Detect is disabled NOTE The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries BusyTone Detect Enable Nxt Enable Disable Busy Tone Detect Sets the modem to monitor for Busy Tone Enable or ignore Busy Tone Disable NOTE This configuration option is normally enabled however if the modem receives false busy tones this configuration option can be disabled and the modem ignores all busy tones 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 19 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 2 2 of 3 Line Dialer Configuration Options Multiport Mode Pause Time 25 Nxt 2sec 4sec 6sec 8sec 10sec 20sec Pause Time Determines the number of seconds
38. Stndrd RS232 Nxt Stndrd RS232 Forced On WinkWhenDisc Follows DTR On Early Delay ToData Data Set Ready Control DSR is a signal from the modem to the DTE indicating the modem is connected and ready for operation Standard RS232 Allows the modem to control DSR to the DTE The modem raises DSR when it begins the handshake process DSR lowers upon disconnect The modem is not ready to receive data until DSR CTS and LSD are active An ON state indicates to the DTE that the modem is ready to receive data An OFF state indicates that the modem is not ready to receive data and the DTE will not send data to the modem During a Local Analog Loop and a Remote Digital Loop DSR is ON Forced On Forces DSR output ON constantly This is usually used for leased line applications and when the DTE requires DSR to always be ON Wink When Disconnect DSR is normally forced ON but is turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect Follows DTR When the modem receives DTR from the DTE it sends DSR to the DTE On Early DSR is low when the modem is in the idle state DSR goes high immediately upon a command to enter Data mode This setting is required for some modem pooling applications Delay to Data Operation is similar to the Standard RS232 except that DSR does not turn ON until the modem enters Data mode Normally the modem raises DSR when it begins the handshaking process Use this setting when the DTE cannot operate with a long DSR to
39. The Training message may also appear in normal Trellis Multipoint TMp operation 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 11 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 3 3 2 of 3 Top Level Menu Status Status Message Indicates Call Failure Busy Signal The answering modem is busy Delayed As a result of failed call attempts this number can not be called at this time Number T Please try again later Dial Line in Use The modem is operating on dial networks when another call attempt is issued Forbidden Number t As a result of failed call attempts this number can not be called again Invalid Number The modem has dialed a telephone number not stored in a directory location Line Occupiedtt The line is being used by the associated telephone No Answer Tone The answering modem did not answer within the time limit specified by the No Answer Timeout configuration option The network tones if any could not be interpreted by the modem No Dial DTR The modem cannot dial because DTR is OFF No Dial Test The modem cannot dial because it is running a Test No Dial Tone The modem has aborted the call because it cannot detect a dial tone No Quiet Answer The modem has detected No Quiet Answer before the time out setting of the No Answer Disconnect configuration option Ringback The answering modem did not answer within the time limit specified by the Timeout No Answer
40. This configuration option does not appear when V 34 is enabled for a leased or dial line CT111 Rate Control Allows the DTE to control modem rate via Pin 23 of the EIA 232 D interface This configuration option determines the effect of the DTE Rate control signal CT111 is also known as CH on the EIA 232 D interface Disable Disregards CT111 Rate Control Fallback1 Forces the modem to decrease its configured data rate to the next lower data rate when CT111 is OFF Valid only for V 32bis V 33 V 29 modulation Modem will only fall back within the same modulation scheme When CT111 turns ON the modem returns to its previous data rate Fallback2 Not available for TMp tributaries Forces the modem to decrease two data rates while remaining in the same modulation scheme When CT111 turns ON the modem returns to its previous data rate NOTE This configuration option is only valid in Async Direct mode and Synchronous mode For proper operation disable the V 32bis Autorate and V 32bis Automode configuration options The AT command is S Register S61 n where nis 0 for Disable 1 for Fallback1 and 2 for Fallback2 DTE RatezVF Disable End Disable Enable This configuration option does not appear when Async Sync is configured for Sync DTE Rate VF Forces the DTE s data rate to be equal to the VF telephone line data rate Disable The data rate of the connection between the DTE and modem is the value of the Async DTE Rate
41. Thresh Sig Noise EUNT DPD Line No Sync Security NrEchLvl Country RXD Port FarEchLv RTS Port FarEchDel CTS Port3 EchoFreqOft Port4 Phase Hts Impul Hts DropOuts Retrains Phas Jtr NonLinear FreqOffset Gain Hts To access Status from the Top Level menu select Status CA Leased 28 8 rt Status Configure GS e 8 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 17 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Device Health and Status DeviceHS DeviceHS provides a snapshot of current modem alarms which are active at the time the DeviceHS function is selected To access DeviceHS from the Status branch make the following selection zx Status gt DeviceHS VF A 5 Select DeviceHS Device HS gt Major Minor L8 8 If alarms present press the appropriate function key to view the messages associated with these alarms Table 3 6 If needed press the gt key to scroll to additional alarm types If no alarms are present the word Normal appears on the LCD Table 3 6 1 of 3 Health and Status Messages Type Message Indicates Major Device Failure A device self test has failed The probable cause is a modem hardware problem or diagnostic memory failure Facility Fault A severe data transport problem is occurring due to poor line conditions No signal or a very poor sig
42. all the carriers in the cabinet A single SDCP can control up to 8 carriers with a total of 128 modems Shared Diagnostic Unit A circuit card that plugs into a dedicated slot in the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier to provide the SDCP and network management interfaces to the modems in the carrier It translates the network management protocol to the devices in the carrier and routes incoming messages to the appropriate slots A data transmission channel with a lower signaling rate than the primary channel It is mostly used for modem diagnostics An SDCP key that allows the selection of a specific card slot in the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier A way of transmitting data in which bits are sent sequentially one at a time A Model 392xPlus operational mode is available in both the singleport and multiport modem Singleport mode only supports one port For the multiport modem it is in effect when the MUX mode configuration option is set to Disable Singleport mode is the only operational mode for the singleport modem Registers that contain information affecting the modem parameters All S Registers must be preceded by the AT prefix Sub Network Health and Status A display of alarm occurrences in downstream modems Data transmission that is synchronized by timing signals Characters are sent at a fixed rate This type of transmission is more efficient than asynchronous transmission Glossary 8 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Gloss
43. must choose either Answer or Originate mode If TMp is selected you must choose either Control or Trib Tributary mode These sets contain the most commonly used configurations options for modems installed into these hardware environments These predefined configuration options are intended to give you a head start and only require a minimum of changes to the default settings Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Figure 4 1 graphically displays the interaction between the edit area and configuration areas as viewed from the perspective of the DCP CONTENTS OF Active Saved ARE AUTOMATICALLY COPIED TO Active Operating WHEN A SAVE IS COMMANDED VIA THE DCP ON A RESET OR ON POWER UP Active Operating Active Saved Customer1 Customer2 Factory Sync Leased Answer Originate Async Leased Answer Originate TMp Control Trib Async Dial Sync Dial UNIX Dial Load Edit Area From Multiport mode EDIT AREA ALLOWS YOU TO VIEW AND EDIT CONFIGURATION OPTIONS ANY CHANGES MADE TO CONFIGURATION OPTIONS ARE SAVED TO Active Saved Customer1 OR Customer2 Figure 4 1 DCP Configuration Process 4 2 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Configure Branch The Configure branch of the Top Level menu contains all of the modem s configuration options which determine how the modem operates These configuration options are accessed by scrolling down and across
44. on the LCD Service Line Disconnect Service Line The Service Line Disconnect Service Line is only available in Models 3921 B1 001 and 3021 B1 011 The Service Line function allows you to switch a specific Model 3921Plus installed in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier from normal leased or dial operation to service line operation This switch only places the modem on the service line For a connection to be established you must still use the normal dialing methods as described earlier in this chapter in the Call Setup Branch section A service line 15 an extra dial line connected COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier This line is normally shared by up to four Model 3921Plus multiport or eight singleport modems installed in either Slots 1 8 or Slots 9 16 However by daisy chaining the service line connector of one Network Interface Module NIM to the service line of another NIM installed in the same carrier you can permit eight multiport or sixteen singleport modems to share one service line The service line can also be extended to other carriers in a cabinet For more information on daisy chaining NIMs to the service line refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual A service line is ideal for a dial backup of Model 3921P us modems operating on leased lines Remember that a service line can back up only one failed leased line at a time To enable service line from the Control branch make the following selections Pr
45. the services on which the equipment is to be connected 3 An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant See Installation Instructions for details 4 The ringer equivalence REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENS contact the telephone company to determine the maximum RENS for the calling area 5 If the 392xPlus modem cause harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required But if advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary 6 The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modific
46. which will only be used when V 34 or V 32 modulation is active For example a tributary running TMp modulation will have the port rate equal to the line rate The lowest numbered port on the control modem is recommended as the MSD output port Disable Disables MUX Mode on the modem Refer to the Singleport Mode section in this chapter for the mux disabled configuration options DTE Bridge Enables the modem as a digital bridge for dial backup of a multipoint configuration by bridging the signal on the digital side of the Front End Processor FEP modems In this configuration only two ports can be used on the control and backup modems both on the FEP side Data received on Port 1 is transmitted across the communication link and looped back through Port 2 Data received across the communication link and on Port 2 is sent through Port 1 NOTE DTE Bridge mode is only available when the NetworkPosition configuration option is set to Control NOTE MSD mode is only available when the NetworkPosition configuration option is set to Tributary Tx Clock Source Internal Nxt Internal Loop Porti Port2 Port3 Port4 Transmit Clock Source Determines the source of timing for synchronous data transmitted from the modem to the analog channel NOTE If the DTE Bridge configuration is enabled Ports 2 3 and 4 are not available Internal The transmit data s clock source is derived from the modem s internal clock This clock is available
47. 212A indicates Bell 212A modulation 103J indicates Bell 103J modulation XXXX Modem Transmit Rate indicates the rate at which the modem is transmitting data Possible values are 2400 4800 7200 9600 12 0 12 000 14 4 14 400 16 8 16 800 19 2 19 200 21 6 21 600 24 0 24 000 26 4 26 400 28 8 28 800 31 2 31 200 or 33 6 33 600 bps yyyyy Symbol Rate indicates the baud rate used by V 34 modulation Refer to CCITT specifications Possible values are 3429 3200L 3200H 3000L 3000H 2800L 2800H 2743L 2743H 2400L 2400H ZL Transmit Level indicates the power level at which the modem is transmitting when running V 34 modulation Possible values are 01 64 dBm To exit the Quick Configuration function and return to the Top Level menu press gt A or x key 3 16 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Status Branch The Status branch of the Top Level menu allows you to view the current status of the leased line or dial connection the identity for example serial number and model number of your equipment and the DTE interface Service_Log Port Select DeviceHS VF Identity DTE V 34 Backup Options Record h Major Display Clear Sent LSD TxRate Line Pri 4W APL Display Minor Mod DTR RxRate Line Pri 2W APL Clear Status SigQual FRev DSR SymbolRate Line Bkup 2W APL Dial RevLevel HPt Tst Tx Level Line Dial Backup 6 AsymRate Line Dial ONLY
48. 32 Dial Transmit Level Selects the modem s transmit power level over dial lines The transmit output level can be selected in 1 dBm decrements from 9 dBm to 32 dBm NOTE In North America the range of allowable values is 10 dBm to 32 dBm plus Permissive 9 dBm This configuration option is locked in other countries the user cannot change the level NOTE The factory default setting is country dependent Default is Permissv 9 in North America Train Time Long End Long Short Train Time Controls V 34 and V 32 family train time Determines whether minimum or maximum time durations are used during the handshaking sequence for both dial and 4 wire 2 wire leased line applications Long Selects long train Use this setting whenever far end frequency offset phase roll may be encountered This is usually only required when transmitting over satellite links Short Allows the modem to train up faster when using V 32 terbo V 32bis or V 32 modulation Asymmetric Rate Disabled Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option does not appear unless V 34 is enabled Asymmetric Rate Controls rate symmetry when running V 34 modulation by enabling or disabling the V 34 modulation from using equal transmit and receive rates Enable The modem operates in asymmetric rate mode the transmit and receive rates can be different when running V 34 modulation The Asymmetric Rate configuration option must be enabled in bot
49. 392xPlus Modems NOTE Note that a warning appears on the second line of the screen if you enter an invalid VF threshold out of range You cannot save your edits until all thresholds are within their valid range Refer to Table 3 8 for valid VF threshold ranges RSL High dBm Ze 119 B GS L5 em Press the gt key to move the cursor to the next position 9 Select the F2 key to change the number above the cursor 9 to 0 RSL High dBm CA Nx t 10 JS J e NOTE If you want to modify additional VF thresholds select Nxt To save the edited threshold s RSL High dBm mm is t 10 CES re n gt Press the A key to scroll up to the Edit Save screen VF Thresholds A en Save n Select Save 3 52 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation If the edited VF thresholds are valid the Save command stores them into nonvolatile memory When the Save completes the message Save Completed appears Save VF Thresh A d Out of Range A L5 If the edited VF threshold is invalid out of range the error message Thd Out of Range appears This indicates the Save procedure was unsuccessful Return to the Edit screen and correct the invalid threshold range To correct the invalid VF thr
50. 4800 24 0 9600 Disable 4800 4800 19 2K 9600 Disable 4800 4800 16 8K 9600 Disable Disable 4800 14 4 9600 Disable Disable 4800 12 0K Disable Disable Disable 4800 9 6K Disable Disable Disable 4800 7 2K Disable Disable Disable 4800 4 8K Disable Disable Disable 4800 2 4K Disable Disable Disable Disable 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 G 7 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Cables Cable 1 Cable 2 Cable 3 Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTF1 2 3 or 4 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED Use part number 818 2759 0111 or an equivalent customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 crossover cable with DB 25 P plug connectors on both ends to attach to the modems See Appendix C for pin assignments Point to Point with Automatic Dial Backup Figure G 4 shows a sample configuration for point to point applications with automatic dial backup DTE 9600 Sync DTE 9600 Sync Sync Sync Cable 1 DTE 4800 3920Plus A Leased 3920Plus B 4800 Ir Sync qp cows ync prp 4800 4800 DTE 9600 DTE Cable 4 5 I Cable 4
51. 5 eleven frames 6 twelve frames 7 thirteen frames 8 fourteen frames 9 fifteen frames The factory setting is O six frames This command only applies when the modem connects using V 42bis data compression or V 42 error control If the modem is configured for Direct mode MNP mode Buffer mode or Synchronous operation this command is ignored This command does not have a front panel equivalent S90 DTE Rate VF Register allows the DTE s data rate to be equal to the VF Configure WEdit telephone line data rate If Enabled the data rate between the DTE and DTE Interface modem is the same as the modem s VF data rate As a result when the modem is in Data mode the speed of the data passed between the modem and DTE occurs at the VF data rate Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 5 25 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 5 3 11 of 12 392x Plus S Registers S Register Description DCP LCD Command Sequence S91 Cellular Enhancement Register allows the modem to use non standard techniques to enhance V 42 operation for cellular applications It is still compatible however with modems which do not have the cellular enhancement implemented or enabled Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable Configure Edit V42 MNP Buffer 92 V 29 Train On
52. 8 16 800 19 2 19 200 21 6 21 600 24 0 24 000 26 4 26 400 28 8 28 800 31 2 31 200 or 33 6 33 600 bps Symbol Rate indicates the baud rate used by V 34 modulation Refer to CCITT specifications Possible values are 3429 3200L 3200H 3000L 3000H 2800L 2800H 2743L 2743H 2400L 2400H Transmit Level indicates the power level at which the modem is transmitting when running V 34 modulation Possible values are 01 64 dBm Asymmetric Rate indicates the rate symmetry when running V 34 modulation Refer to the Asymmetric Rate configuration option in the Dial Line or Leased Line section of Chapter 4 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 25 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Backup The Status Backup function displays the configuration of the modem s current operating line facility and the configuration and condition of the inactive line NOTE The modem s rear panel has two line interface jacks LEASE and DIAL see Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 The jack labeled LEASE is the APL primary interface and accepts either 2 wire or 4 wire APL The jack labeled DIAL is the backup interface and accepts either 2 wire APL Dual Lease Line or Dial lines To access Backup from the Status branch make the following selection Press the gt key until Backup appears Status 2 DE A 5 Select Backup Status Backup gt CA 4w APL A lt nj e
53. 8 392x Plus Mul port Features there 1 8 Applications s REN see ee s 1 8 Government Requirements and Equipment Return 1 11 Technical Specifications e eerte deer 1 13 2 Modem Installation bide baths ger Vag REIS 2 1 392xPlus Modem Package cioe kee meklari 2 1 Model 3920Plus Modem 2 3 Connecting Cables to the Model 3920Plus Modem 2 3 Removing and Replacing the Model 3920Plus Modem 2 6 Model 3921Plus Modem Installation 2 6 Removing and Replacing the Model 3921Plus Modem 2 11 392xPlus Modem Power UPD ovk hr Rev 2 11 Selecting Factory Configuration Options for 392xPlus 2 11 3 DCP Operation ngo M EDIT 3 2 Diagnostic Control Panels 2 sieste aitei 3 2 Status ERE EGRE Se 3 3 Diagnostic Control Panel Operation 3 7 Menu er veu eR PRU RE 3 9 Status Brame sos kos eee Roe REI ee sace eg RAS 3 17 Conhgure Bianche ses rn es Seta eee oe Rin 3 30 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Poll Eist Brane oe bee Oe Reh eR OREM RSM 3 30 Control Braneli ova eb te eRvEY RS VePP IR ATEM 3 35 Test Branch ET 3 54 Sub Network Health and Status Branch
54. 8 tt 8 8 8 tt Async Parity Bit None tt None None tt None None None tt Asyn Stop Bits 1tt 1 1tt 1 1 1tt DTR Action Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Standard RS232 DSR Control Standard RS232 Forced On Standard RS232 Forced On Forced On Standard RS232 RTS Action Standard RS232 Ignore Standard Ignore Ignore Standard RS232 RS232 trib Ignore control RTS Antistream 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec 6 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec CTS Control Standard RS232 Forced On Standard RS232 Forced On Wink When Disc Standard RS232 RTS CTS Delay 0 0 0 0 0 0 LSD Control Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Wink When Disc Standard RS232 tt Not applicable when Async Sync mode is set to Sync Refer to Chapter 4 DCP Configuration for additional information lt q Not applicable when MUX Mode is disabled F 4 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Default Configuration Options Table F 1 40f10 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial 9 Sails 9 Default Default Default Default Default Default P Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings DTE Interface Singleport mode Cont d Tx Clock Source Internal Internal Loop Internal Internal Internal trib Internal control Backup Tx Clock Internal Internal T Loop
55. Answer and Originate security options are disabled Refer to sections Set Answer Sec and Set Orig Sec in Chapter 6 The Dial Line Rate or LeasedLine Rate configuration option is set to an invalid modulation Refer to the Dial Line or Leased Line configuration option in the Multiport Mode section of Chapter 4 for the valid rates 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 B 5 Overview Pin Assignments OVERVIEW A rr C 1 ELA 252 D Pin Assignments esu estre eR CERE UE C 2 VF Connector Pin Assignments 0 cee eee eee e C 3 Auxiliary Cables Not Supplied sere men C 4 This appendix lists E A 232 D and VF TELCO pin assignments and provides information about auxiliary cables which are not supplied 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 C 1 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems EIA 232 D Pin Assignments Table C 1 lists the EIA 232 D pin assignments for the modem Table C 1 EIA 232 D Pin Assignments Pin Name cum CCITT EM Circuit Function 1 AA 101 Shield 2 TXD BA 103 DTE Transmit Data 3 RXD BB 104 DCE Receive Data 4 RTS CA 105 DTE Request to Send 5 CTS CB 106 DCE Clear to Send 6 DSR CC 107 DCE Data Set Ready 7 SG AB 102 Signal Ground 8 LSD CF 109 DCE Line Signal Detect 9 12V Reserved for test purposes may be used to drive one RS 232 load 10 12V Reserved for test purposes may be used to
56. Equipment grounding is vital to ensure safe operation Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug by modifying the plug or using an adapter Prior to installation use an outlet tester or a voltmeter to check the ac receptacle for the presence of earth ground If the receptacle is not properly grounded the installation must not continue until a qualified electrician has corrected the problem If a three wire grounding type power source is not available consult a qualified electrician to determine another method of grounding the equipment Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating these slots and openings must not be blocked or covered Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the product where persons will walk on the power cord Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel General purpose cables are provided with this product Special cables which may be required by the regulatory inspection authority for the installation site are the responsibility of the customer When installed in the final configuration the product must comply with the applicable Safety Standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed If necessary cons
57. Far Echo 0 38 dBm Above 20 dBm Frequency Offset 1 Hz to 15 Hz Above 4 Hz Phase Jitter 1 degree to 45 degrees Above 9 degrees Phase Hits 1 to 255 hits 20 hits per 15 minutes Impulse Hits 1 to 255 hits 20 hits per 15 minutes Gain Hits 1 to 255 hits 20 hits per 15 minutes Drop Outs 1 to 255 dropouts 20 dropouts per 15 minutes Test Branch The Test branch of the Top Level menu allows you to initiate various modem tests Use these tests if you are having data communication problems such as periodic character loss random errors or constant format errors By the process of elimination you can usually isolate the fault in your system There are six selections under Test Abort Self Self Test Loc Analog Loop Local Analog Loopback Rem Digital Loop Remote Digital Loopback Loc Digital Loop Local Digital Loopback and Pattern The only tests that can operate concurrently on a single modem are Pattern with a Local Analog Loopback and Pattern with a Remote Digital Loopback If any test is operating besides the two combinations just mentioned it must be canceled before starting another test The Test branch only initiates and cancels tests If parameters need to be set refer to the Tests section in Chapter 4 subHs Call Setup Tik Data Abort Self Loc Analog Loop Rem_Digital_Loop Loc Digital Loop Pattern Port Port Port Select Select Select 3 54 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Abort To
58. Internal Internal Internal Source trib Internal control XTXC Clamps Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable TXC e CT111 Rate Control Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable DTE Rate VF Disable tt Disable Disable tt Disable Disable Disable tt Extend Main Ch Disable Disable Disable Disable lt q Disable lt Disable Upstream Port 1 1 1 144 14 1 DTE Dialer x DTE Dialer Type Disable Disable Disable AT AT Disable AT Escape Char 0430 0430 0430 043 043 0430 Escape Guard 1 sec 1 sec 1 sec 1 sec 1 sec 1sec Time Break Forces Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Escape Command Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 6 Character Echo Carriage Return 01306 0130 013 013 013 013 Character Backspace 008 008 008 e 008 008 008 Character Linefeed Character 010 0100 0100 010 010 0100 Result Codes Enable Enable 6 Enable Enable Enable in Enable 6 Originate Extended Result Enable Enable 6 Enable Enable Enable Enable 6 Codes T Not applicable when Async Sync mode is set to Async tt Not applicable when Async Sync mode is set to Sync Refer to Chapter 4 DCP Configuration for additional information Not applicable when MUX Mode is enabled 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table F 1 bof10 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Sync
59. Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial allen 9 Default Default Default Default Default Default Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings DTE Dialer X Cont d Result Codes Words 6 Words Words 6 Words Words Words Format AT Command Normal 6 Normal 6 Normal Normal Normal Normal 6 Mode V 25bis ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII Coding V 25bis Idle Mark Mark Mark Mark Mark Mark Fil e V 25bis New Line CR LF CR LF CR LF CR LF CR LF CR LF Char Line Dialer Auto Answer Ring 1 1 1 1 1 1 Count Dialer Type Tone Tone Tone Tone Tone Tone Dial Tone Detect Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Blind Dial Pause 2 2 2 2 2 2 Busy Tone Detect Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Pause Time 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec No Answer Timeout 45 sec 45 sec 45 sec 45 sec 45 sec 45 sec Fast Disconnect Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Line Current Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Disconnect gt 8 sec gt 8 sec gt 8 sec gt 8 sec gt 8 sec gt 8 sec Long Space Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Disconnect No Carrier 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec Disconnect No Data Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disconnect Auto Make Busy 6 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Make Busy Via Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable DTR X Refer to Chapter 4 DCP Configuration for additional information Not applicable
60. Level menu press the 2 key 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 23 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems DTE DTE displays the state and or activity of the following interface leads LSD DTR DSR TST TXD RXD RTS and CTS The interface leads status is updated every 5 seconds To access DTE from the Status branch make the following selections PAN Identity Be Press the gt key until DTE appears Select DTE Select DTE Port gt CA Port2 A c L9 Select the appropriate port by pressing the corresponding function key Press the gt key to scroll other ports into view Only Ports 1 and 2 appear when the the DTE Bridge configuration option is enabled This screen does not appear in Singleport mode DSR Tst gt A _ EB B lt n m The activity and state of the modem s DTE signal appear on the LCD s bottom line Press the gt key to scroll other signals into view The LCD s bottom line displays a pair of symbols for each interface lead The first symbol indicates the signal s activity since entering the DTE status display An asterisk indicates at least one transition while a blank space indicates no transitions The second symbol indicates the state of the interface lead at the sampling time A solid block indicates a Space or ON condition while an underscore _ indicates a Mark or OFF c
61. Loop The modem s transmit clock is derived from its received analog signal The derived clock is available as an output on Pin 15 TXC of the EIA 232 D interface Port1 The transmit data s clock source is provided on Pin 24 XTXC of the EIA 232 D interface for Port 1 of the EIA 232 D interface for Port 2 Port3 The transmit data s clock source is provided on Pin 24 XTXC of the EIA 232 D interface for Port 3 Port4 The transmit data s clock source is provided on Pin 24 XTXC of the EIA 232 D interface for Port 4 Port2 The transmit data s clock source is provided on Pin 24 XTXC CT111 Rate Cntl Disable End Disable Fallback1 Fallback2 This configuration option does not appear when V 34 is enabled for a leased or dial line CT111 Rate Control Allows the DTEs to control modem rate via Pin 23 of the EIA 232 D interface This configuration option determines the effect of the DTE Rate control signals CT111 is also known as CH on the EIA 232 D interface Disable Disregards all CT111 Rate Control Fallback1 Forces the modem to decrease its configured data rate to the next lower data rate when any of the CT111 signals are OFF When all of the CT111 signals are ON the modem returns to its previous data rate Fallback2 Forces the modem to decrease two data rates while remaining in the same modulation scheme when any of the CT111 signals are OFF When all of the CT111 signals are ON the mod
62. RS232 Forced On WinkWhenDisc Follows DTR Sim Cntl Car DTR DiscOFF Line Signal Detect Control LSD is a signal indicating that the carrier signal is being received from the remote modem It is normally turned OFF to the DTE when the power level of the received carrier signal drops below the carrier detect threshold Standard RS232 LSD is ON when the modem detects the remote modem s carrier signal LSD turns OFF when the carrier signal strength drops below carrier detect threshold Forced On Forces LSD to be ON at all times Wink When Disconnect LSD is normally forced ON but can be turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect This is used for UNIX9 DTEs Follows DTR The state of LSD follows the state of DTR When DTR turns ON LSD turns ON When DTR turns OFF LSD turns OFF Simulated Control Carrier LSD follows the state of RTS of the remote DTE via the V 13 simulated control carrier signaling This is required for hosts that cannot support full duplex operation If LSD Control is set to simulated control carrier then the RTS Action configuration option on the remote modem must be set to Simulated Control Carrier zDTR Disconnect OFF The state of LSD follows the state of DTR except when disconnecting once a connection is established In this instance DTR remains ON and LSD turns OFF DTR must then toggle OFF and then ON again for LSD to turn ON This setting is required for AT amp T DATAKIT dial out applications N
63. Rate LeasedLine Rate V54 Address DialTone Detect Autorate Leased Mode V54 Device Type Blind Dial Paus V32bis Override Autorate BusyTone Detect Dial Tx Level V32bis Override Pause Time Train Time Leased Tx Level NoAnswer Timout Asymmetric Rate Asymmetric Rate Fast Disconnect Auto Dial Back Line Crnt Disc AutoDialStandby Long Space Disc SpecialStandby No Carrier Disc DialStandbyTime No Data Disc CarrierOn Level Auto Make Busy Lease Lookback Dual_Leased_Ln BackupLine Check MUX Copy Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 MUX Mode From Port X TDM MSD DTE Bridge To Port X or All Rate Async EIA Tx Clock Source i ia S Modem MSD Async Sync DTR Action MSD Port Control Rate at 33 6 Async DTE Rate DSR Control Rate at 28 8 Asyn Data Bits RTS Action Rate at 24 0 Asyn Stop Bits RTS Antistream Rate at 19 2 K Async OverSpeed Control Rate at 16 8 K RTS CTS Delay Rate at 14 4 K LSD Control Rate at 12 0 K Rate at 9600 Rate at 7200 Rate at 4800 Rate at 2400 Not shown when the DTE Bridge configuration option is enabled XTXC Clamps TXC CT111 Control Rcv Remote Loop DTE RL CT140 DTE LL CT141 Port TXC Source DTE Alarm Mask Extend Main Ch Upstream Port Misc StrapsWhenDisc Speaker Control Speaker Volume Access frm Remt RemAccssPasswrd Dir 1_Callback NMS Call Msgs NetworkPosition NetMngmtAddress Diag Connection Link Delay sec 495 14623 01 NOTE The DTE Dialer V 42 MNP Buffer and Securit
64. RemAccssPasswrd A Nxt X 100000000 CA 2 tm e nj m Select Nxt until RemAccssPasswrd appears RemAccssPasswrd A Nxt 110000000 fess e Select the F2 1 key to increment password values RemAccssPasswrd A ie 10000000 A L 08 5 e Press the gt key to move the cursor to the next position RemAccssPasswrd A 112345678 Aa mj Continue this sequence until you have entered the new password value 4 6 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Summary To save the new password to a configuration area make the following selections RemAccssPasswrd A Nxt t12345678 EE Press the A key to scroll up twice Choose Function A Edit Save gt 89 Select Save Sav EditArea to gt A uns Select a configuration area Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 to save the changes Select the 2 key to exit to the Top Level menu or select the A key to remain in the Configure branch When using the DCP to edit configuration options keep the following in mind Nxt has two functions First it indicates that more configuration options are available within that group These are accessed by selecting Nxt pressing F1 and scrolling down to the next configuration option Second it indicate
65. Sync Leased Answer amp F3 UNIX Dial amp F4 Sync Leased Originate amp F5 Async Leased Answer amp F6 Async Leased Originate amp F7 TMp Control amp F8 TMp Trib Only the amp FO and amp F3 commands will leave you AT Command mode The other commands will take you out of AT command control and place the modem into Dumb mode The only way to return to AT command control is via the diagnostic control panel DCP For additional information refer to Appendix F Default Configuration Options 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 5 9 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 5 2 5 of 9 392xPlus AT Commands AT Command Description DCP LCD Command Sequence amp Gn V 22bis Guard Tone amp GO Disable amp G1 550 Hz amp G2 1800 Hz NOTE The V 22bis Guard Tone cannot be disabled in some countries Configure Edit Dial Line amp In Dial Transmit Level The AT command is amp In where nis 0 for 0 dBm 1 for 1 dBm 32 for 32 dBm NOTE In North America the range of allowable values is 10 dBm to 32 dBm This command is disabled in some countries it answers OK but does not change the level Configure Edit Dial Line amp Ln Leased Mode amp LO Disables leased line operation amp L1 2 wire originate leased line operation amp L2 4 wire originate leased line operation amp L3 2 wire answer leased line operation amp L4 4 wire answer leased line operation
66. System NMS Register has the following values 0 Call Connect amp Progress 1 Disable 2 Call Connect Only 3 Call Progress Only The factory setting is Call Connect amp Progress Configure Edit Misc S67 Directory Location 1 Callback Register determines if the modem uses the single number callback function Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable Configure Edit Misc S69 Make Busy Via DTR Register determines if the modem goes off hook busy when DTR is OFF Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable Configure Edit Line Dialer 70 V 27bis Train Register controls the train time for V 27bis operation Register has the following values 0 Short 1 Long The factory setting is Short Configure Edit Leased Line S71 XTXC Clamps TXC Register allows the modem s TXC output to be clamped off when TX Clock Source is configured for External Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable Configure Edit DTE Interface S72 RTS Antistreaming Register determines the antistreaming operation of the modem Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 10sec 2 30 sec 3 1 min 4 2 5 3 min 6 5 min The factory setting is Disable Configure Edit DTE Interface 3920 A2 GN31 30 No
67. The amp L command will cause the modem to reset before entering or exiting Leased Line mode Therefore it must be entered as the last command in an initialization string Configure Edit Leased Line 5 10 November 1996 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 5 2 6 of 9 392xPlus AT Commands DCP LCD AT Description Command Command Sequence amp Mn and Async Sync Mode and DTE Dialer Type Configure Edit san amp M0 amp Q0 Modem operates in Asynchronous mode using AT Command DTE Dialer protocol amp M1 amp Q1 Modem operates in Synchronous mode using AT Command protocol amp M2 amp Q2 Modem operates in Synchronous mode and dials telephone number stored in directory location 1 when DTR signal turns OFF and then ON amp M3 amp Q3 Modem operates in Synchronous mode using AT Command protocol amp M231 Modem operates in Asynchronous mode using no AT Command protocol amp M232 Modem operates in Asynchronous mode using V 25bis asynchronous AT Command protocol amp M233 Modem operates in Synchronous mode using V 25bis bisynchronous AT Command protocol amp M234 Modem operates in Synchronous mode using V 25bis HDLC AT Command protocol amp M235 Modem operates in Asynchronous mode using AT amp T Emulation AT Command protocol amp M236 Modem operates in Synchronous mode using no AT Command protocol The following commands disable the use of AT commands and force the modem into
68. The AT command is S Register S45 n where n is from 0 to 15 corresponding to 0 dBm to 15 dBm Asymmetric Rate Disabled Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option does not appear unless V 34 is enabled Asymmetric Rate Controls rate symmetry when running V 34 modulation by enabling or disabling the V 34 modulation from using equal transmit and receive rates Enable The modem operates in asymmetric rate mode the transmit and receive rates can be different when running V 34 modulation The Asymmetric Rate configuration option must be enabled in both modems Disable The modem operates in symmetric rate mode the transmit and receive rates are identical when running V 34 modulation Either modem can force symmetric mode by disabling the Asymmetric Rate configuration option Auto Dial Back Disable Nxt Disable Enable FastBackup Automatic Dial Backup Allows the modem to dial the number stored in directory location 1 to restore communications with the remote modem when the leased lines fail NOTE This configuration option must be set to Disable for TMp Control operation NOTE In point to point applications this configuration option must be set to Enable in both the local and remote modem The answering modem must have its Auto Answer Ring Number configuration option enabled Refer to the Line Dialer configuration option group for information regarding Auto Answer NOTE When this configuration option is enabled the or
69. The modem or an upstream device is running a disruptive test Disabled The modem s DTE port has been disabled On Dial Backup The modem is operating in Dial Backup mode FW Downloading A firmware download is in progress Primary Line Good The modem is currently operating on the 2 wire backup facility the Lease Lookback option is enabled and the modem detects continuity on the primary 4 wire leased lines Backup Line Bad The modem is currently operating on the primary 4 wire leased facility with 2 wire leased lines selected as the backup facility the BackupLineCheck configuration option is enabled and the modem detects continuity on the 2 wire backup leased lines Data Blocked The modem s data path is blocked On Lease Backup The modem is operating in 2 wire Leased Backup mode PSTN Test Fail The modem failed either the Dial Tone Detection or the Ring Tone Detection portion of the Call Test command Dial Make Busy Mode The modem is in a Make Busy condition Service Line Model 3921 Plus only The modem installed ina COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier has been switched to a service line Short Hold Time The modem s dial hold time has been shortened Non Answering The modem is in a non answering mode Thresh RSL High Threshd The received signal level RSL has exceeded the upper threshold RSL Low Threshld The RSL is less than the lower threshold SNR Threshold The signal to noise ratio has exceeded the threshold N
70. V 29 modulation schemes Choose Address TMp Control only Choose Password TMp only Not in TMp Trib Secondary Prim data blckd ExitRem appears instead of Remote when using Remote Mode The following conditions must be met before using the Remote branch e A connection using either leased lines or the dial network must be established e The Access from the Remote configuration option must be enabled in the remote modem n point to point networks the Remote Access Password configuration option must be the same for both the local and remote modems In multipoint networks the remote access password must be entered at the appropriate prompt e For multipoint control modems the network management address of the tributary modem must be entered at the appropriate prompt 3 76 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Remote DCP access is accomplished using either the primary or secondary channel if available of the VF line Using the primary channel gives a much faster response time due to the higher data rate but it also interrupts data flow because primary data is stopped when Remote mode is active Once Remote mode is terminated the primary channel is automatically made available for data transmission Unlike primary channel communications the secondary channel operates at a slower data rate and does not interrupt data flow V 34 V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 and TMp are the only modulations avail
71. V42 MNPorBfr V42 MNPorDsc MNP or MNP or Disc MNP5 Compression Determines if the modem uses MNP Class 5 data compression It can be set independently of V 42bis data compression Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs The AT command for Disable is 95 The AT command for Enable is C1 EC Negotiat Bfr Disable Nxt Disable Enable Disab amp Switch This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is configured for V42 MNPorBfr MNP or Buf r or LAPM or Bufr Error Control Negotiate Buffer Determines if the answering modem buffers the data that it received from the remote modem during an interval in which the modem attempts to establish a connection using error control Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs Disable Data is not buffered during the link negotiating handshaking sequence Enable Data is buffered while the link is being established Initialization data is not passed on the DTE during the handshaking sequence Disable and Switch Data is not buffered during the handshaking sequence However when the modem receives error control fallback character it switches to Buffer mode Refer to the EC Fallback Char configuration option The AT command for Disable is The AT command for Enable is C1 The AT command for Disab amp Switch is C2 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 59
72. When the Dual Leased Line configuration option is changed the modem will reset BackupLine Check Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option is only available when the Dual Leased Line device option is enabled and the V 34 is disabled in the LeaseLine Rate configuration option Backup Line Check Tests the backup circuit for availability while the modem is operating on the primary 4 wire leased lines The test involves detecting line energy across the normal bandwidth This test of the backup lines will not interrupt the data flow on the primary lines The configuration option settings must be the same at both ends NOTE In network applications where the modem is in backup mode and is connected to a modem other than the modem connected to the primary leased line enabling this configuration can cause problems 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 57 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems V 42 MNP Buffer Singleport Mode lt V 42 MNP Buffer configuration options determine the type of error correction and flow control used by the modems and attached DTEs Some choices within this group may not appear depending upon how previous configuration options have been selected If the Async Sync Mode configuration option is set for synchronous operation refer to the DTE Interface configuration options group then the V 42 MNP Buffer group does not appear on the LCD Any changes made to configuration options within this group only t
73. and begin dialing If using AT Dialing refer to Table B 4 Modem DTE Connection If using DTR Dialing verify the telephone number stored in directory location 1 and verify that the DTE is raising DTR from Off to ON to initiate a dial If using V 25bis Async verify that the correct character format is set to 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit and the carriage return and line feed are used as command terminators If using V 25bis Bisync verify that the correct character format uses two synchronous control characters and a start of text control character before the text block and an end of text control character after the text block If using V 25bis HDLC verify that the character format uses flag address and control characters before the text block and a frame sequence check and flag after the text block The modem dials but does not connect If the modem is operating behind a PBX determine if a 9 and comma are needed before the telephone number Verify whether Tone or Pulse dialing is needed Verify that both modems are configured the same in regard to Error Control Try calling in Buffer mode If both modems use V 32bis or V 32 modulation try setting the modem s V 32bis Train configuration option to Long B 4 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Troubleshooting Table B 5 2 of 2 Modem VF Connection Symptom Action Intermittent disconnects high error rates or ex
74. and received within a specified amount of time Disable Modem remains connected despite the lack of data flow 10 30 60 min Modem disconnects if data is not received and transmitted within 10 minute 30 minute or 60 minute intervals NOTE The factory default value is country dependent The AT command for Enable is Tn where nis from 1 minute to 255 minutes The AT command for Disable is TO 4 48 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 9 4 of 4 Line Dialer Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt Auto Make Busy Disable Nxt Disable Enable This option is only valid on Model 3921Plus Automatic Make Busy Forces the modem to go off hook under the following conditions if a local analog loopback is performed a self test is performed or if the modem is switched to the service line NOTE This configuration option should only be used when the modem is located behind a user s Private Branch Exchange PBX The Make Busy Network Interface Module NIM must be installed on the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual The AT command is S Register S40 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable MakeBusyVia DTR Disable End Disable Enable Make Busy Via DTR Determines if the modem goes off hook when DTR is OFF Enable this setting if the DTE normally keeps DTR ON and turns DTR OFF when the DTE cannot accept a call N
75. as an output on Pin 15 TXC of the EIA 232 D interface Receive Clock Loop The modem s transmit clock is derived from its received analog signal The derived clock is available as an output on Pin 15 TXC of the EIA 232 D interface Port1 The transmit data s clock source is provided on Pin 24 XTXC of the EIA 232 D interface for Port 1 of the EIA 232 D interface for Port 2 Port3 The transmit data s clock source is provided on Pin 24 XTXC of the EIA 232 D interface for Port 3 Port4 The transmit data s clock source is provided on Pin 24 XTXC of the EIA 232 D interface for Port 4 Port2 The transmit data s clock source is provided on Pin 24 XTXC 4 10 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 1 2 of 9 DTE Interface Configuration Options Multiport Mode x Bakup Src Internal Nxt Internal RXC Loop Porti Port2 Port3 Port4 This configuration option only appears when Dual Leased Ln is configured for Enable Backup Transmit Clock Source Selects the clock reference source when operating in the Dual Leased Line Mode This is a special mode in which one leased line is used to back up another NOTE If the DTE Bridge is enabled Ports 2 3 and 4 are not available Internal The transmit data s clock source is derived from the modem s internal clock This clock is available as an output on Pin 15 TXC of the EIA 232 D interface Receive Clock
76. at 19 2 K Rate at 16 8 K 33600 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 28800 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 24000 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 19200 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 16800 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 33600 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 28800 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 24000 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 19200 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 16800 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 or Enable Trib 33600 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 28800 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 24000 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 19200 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 16800 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 33600 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 28800 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 24000 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 19200 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 16800 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 33600 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 28800 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 24000 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 19200 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 16800 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 33600 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 28800 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 24000 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 19200 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 16800 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 T Not applicable when Async Sync mode is set to Async Refer to Chapte
77. bandwidth This test of the backup lines will not interrupt the data flow on the primary lines The configuration option settings must be the same at both ends NOTE In network applications where the modem is in backup mode and is connected to a modem other than the modem connected to the primary leased line enabling this configuration can cause problems 4 26 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Test Multiport x The Test configuration option determines the duration of a test Table 4 5 shows the Test configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix Table 4 5 Test Configuration Options Multiport Mode gt lt Test Timeout Disable End Disable 30sec 60sec 240sec Test Time out Determines how long a test runs before aborting Disable Allows a test to run indefinitely 30 60 or 240 seconds Allows the test to run for 30 seconds 60 seconds or 240 seconds V54 Address Disable Nxt Disable Address Values V 54 Address Determines which remote 392xP us modem is placed into a remote loopback test This test can be either a remote digital loopback or local analog loopback
78. cee eee eee 3 50 Automatic Firmware Download Failure 3 50 VP Thresholds Update i Rotam EE Rete reb dece sce eh 3 51 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 1 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Overview Loc Analog cox oE Ba AAS Oa ER ae Remi Digital Loop P UBRO RESP Cate RENE Loe DIpital LOOP 3 eaae pe mp oh ca abe nete chateau o pera Donc Tp Sub Network Health and Status Branch Call Setup Branchi z tie cece aces tend sd aret ree be Ce etie deos prede Du D d Du ide E a Disconnecb oe EOS EE QUEUE RET ut T E Dial Standby Return to Dial 00 eee eee ee eee Change Directory moc eiridh ee er e se wi eG e eI Or Pets Entering Telephone Numbers and Dial Command Modifiers into Directory Locations REGAN hehe ves Directory Status Does Not Appear in North America Talk Data Branch a sess cha eed es ees wes ODER Manual Dialing When the Remote Modem is Configured for AULO ADSWED 2i mcr s e eee TEESE FEE E Manual Dialing When the Remote Modem is Configured for Manual AMSWER 25 5 er vad Sb ale dee e ene ome ca Security Branch 555i eet Mad aie eee ada CER SE Ebay EE NS Remote Branch ened E Sha eH I OS ERE Diagnosti
79. configuration option Enable The data rate between the DTE and modem is the same as the modem s VF data rate As a result when the modem is in Data mode the speed of the data passed between the modem and DTE occurs at the VF data rate The AT command is S Register S90 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 39 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 7 8 of 8 DTE Interface Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt Extend Main Ch Disable Nxt Disable Enable Primary data can only be extended one link Extend Main Channel This configuration option supports extended diagnostics Specifies whether there is main primary channel connectivity between the modem s DTE ports and the DTE ports of modems one level below downstream or above upstream in the diagnostic network Enable If this configuration option is set to Enable on a port of a tributary modem test mode is propagated to the modems downstream when test mode goes ON for that port Disable If this configuration option is set to Disable on a port of a tributary modem test mode is not propagated for that port and primary channel data is clamped when in test mode NOTE For an extended control modem this configuration option is used along with the upstream port number where the main primary channel is extended Upstream Port Port1 End Porti Port2 Port3 Port4 Port5 Port6 Port7 Port8 This configurati
80. control characters and control character sequences for synchronized transmission of binary coded data between stations in a data communications system A contraction of binary digit A bit which is the smallest unit of information represents the choice between a one or a zero sometimes called mark or space Bits per second Indicates the speed at which bits are transmitted across a data connection A method of transmission The simultaneous transmission to two or more communicating devices A storage device used to compensate for differences in the data flow rate when transmitting data from one device to another A sequence of successive bits usually eight handled as a unit in data transmission The rack mounting that contains 17 slots 1 control slot for an SDU and 16 modem slots See data carrier A modem that is designed for installation in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier and used at central site operations An advisory committee Consultative Committee on International Telephone and Telegraph established by the United Nations to recommend communications standards and policies A path for electrical transmission between two or more points Also called a circuit line link path or facility A letter figure number punctuation or other symbol A way to check the accuracy of data transmission by sending to the monitor displaying all the characters being transmitted Glossary 2 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 3
81. dBm in all countries except North America NOTE The factory default setting is country dependent Default is 0 in North America The AT command is S Register S45 n where n is from 0 to 15 corresponding to 0 dBm to 15 dBm Asymmetric Rate Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option does not appear unless V 34 is enabled Asymmetric Rate Controls rate symmetry when running V 34 modulation by enabling or disabling the V 34 modulation from using equal transmit and receive rates Enable The modem operates in Asymmetric Rate mode the transmit and receive rates can be different when running V 34 modulation The Asymmetric Rate configuration option must be enabled in both modems Disable The modem operates in symmetric rate mode the transmit and receive rates are identical when running V 34 modulation Either modem can force Symmetric mode by disabling the Asymmetric Rate configuration option The AT command is S Register S15 n where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable Auto Dial Back Disable Nxt Disable Enable FastBackup Automatic Dial Backup Allows the modem to dial the number stored in directory location 1 to restore communications with the remote modem when the leased lines fail NOTE This configuration option must be set to Disable for TMp Control operation NOTE In point to point applications this configuration option must be set to Enable in both the local and remote modem The answering modem mus
82. diagnostic capabilities 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 1 7 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems e Network management system NMS support through the COMSPHERE 6800 or 6700 Series NMS using Advanced Diagnostic protocol ADp e Automatic and manual backup with standby capabilities for 4 wire 2 wire leased line applications The backup facility may be either a 2 wire dial line or a 2 wire leased line 392xPlus Singleport Features Features specific to 392xPlus singleport modems are e Four wire two wire leased line modulations e Dial line modulations Refer to Table 1 2 in the Technical Specifications section of this chapter for leased and dial line modulations information 392x Plus Multiport Features Features specific to 392xPlus multiport modems are e Four port time division multiplexer TDM operation Modem Sharing Device MSD e Digital Bridging e enabled four wire two wire leased line modulations V 34 family 33 600 28 800 24 000 19 200 16 800 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 4800 and 2400 bps V 32 terbo 19 200 and 16 800 bps V 32bis 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 and 4800 bps V 32 9600 and 4800 bps and Trellis Multipoint TMp 19 200 14 400 9600 7200 4800 and 2400 bps Mux enabled dial line modulations V 34 family 33 600 28 800 24 000 19 200 16 800 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 4800 and 2400 bps V 32 terbo 19 200 and 16 800 bps V 32bis 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 and 4800 bp
83. did not contain an originate access password Unknown VF PsWd The modem did not finish answering a call disconnected because the modem received an invalid VF password DTEpswd Timeout The modem did not finish answering a call disconnected because the allowed time limit was exceeded before the modem received a DTE password from the remote DTE Inval Orig PsWd The modem did not attempt to establish the call as requested because the originate password in the AT dial command was not valid DTR Dial Blocked DTR dialing is not permitted when security is enabled This message appears if DTR dialing is used and Answer Access or Originate Access security is enabled SecurityBlocked The access verification capabilities are not available and the modem does not pass data to the DTE under any circumstances This message appears only when the modem is in base mode a mode that occurs during a firmware download and Answer Access Security is enabled 3 14 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation The Top Level menu s main branches appear on the LCD in the order of Status Configure Control Test Call Setup Talk Data Security and Remote These branches are discussed in this chapter except for the Configure branch which is reserved for Chapter 4 DCP Configuration and the Security branch which is reserved for Chapter 6 Dial Access Security Quick Configuration Display The Quick Configuration display indic
84. field range is from 001 to 256 To increment digits within the address field xxx use the lt 1 and gt keys to position the cursor _ under the digit to be incremented Press the F2 T key to increment the digit Press F1 Ent to select the modem that will receive the download Choose Password A tyyyyyyyy A E 5 The password field yyyyyyyy displays the remote access password for the modem that will receive the download To increment digits within the password field use the lt 1 and gt keys to position the cursor _ under the digit to be incremented Press the F2 f key to increment the digit Press Enter Ent to select the modem that will receive the download After completing these actions proceed to the section titled Implementing a Clone Remote Operation 3 46 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Cloning a Multiple TMp Remote Choose DLL Type gt 2 Single Multiple A En Press the F3 key to select Multiple Clone Remote After completing this action proceed to the next section titled Implementing a Clone Remote Operation Viewing Multiple TMp Clone Results Choose DLL Type gt A MPtCloneResults A L8 L8 From the Choose DLL Type screen press the gt gt key until the MPtCloneResults screen appears to view the results of the last multiple TMp c
85. for COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier applications with network management 28800 V34 28800 V34 2600 TX gt 9600 9600 i 1 Leased Sync 2 2 Sync 4800 3921Plus 3920Plus 4 9600 Cable 2 Sync SDU Cable 2 Circuit m 4800 DTE Cable1 IN Cable1 Sync Cable 1 COMSPHERE Cable1 Cable 1 3000 Series Carrier Cable 1 4800 DTE Sync Cable Cable 1 Cable 5 or 6800 002 0025 0031 Figure 6 6 Sample Configuration Carrier with Network Management G 12 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Sample Configurations Configuration Options 3921Plus 3920Plus Sample Port Rate Table Cables Cable 1 Cable 2 Cable 5 Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following exception Rate Refer to the Sample Port Rate Table in this section Diag Connection Set to NMS CC NetMngmtAddress Set to 1 Use Sync Leased Originate default configuration options with the following exception Rate Refer to the Sample Port Rate table in this section Port Rate Port 1 Port 2 Port3 Port 4 28 8K 9600 9600 4800 4800 24 0K 9600 Disable 4800 4800 19 2K 9600 Disable 4800 4800 16 8K 9600 Disable
86. from the Test branch make the following selections Test A Loc_Digital_Loop A Press the key until Loc Digital Loop appears Press any function key to start this test Pick Test Port gt A Porti Port2 A e 8 If the mux is enabled select the appropriate port by pressing the corresponding function key Press the key to scroll other ports into view 3 60 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Pattern This screen does not appear in Singleport mode Test P1 Dig Loop A Started A lt re 8 The message Started appears on the LCD and the Test LED lights The port field for example P1 for Port 1 displays the port that is currently selected You may see P1 P2 P3 or P4 If OtherTestActive appears on the LCD another test is in progress Select Abort to clear the current test and try again If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the display If it is disabled the test operates until aborted For more information on the Test Timeout configuration option refer to the Test section in Chapter 4 To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the Zx key Pattern can transmit and receive a 511 bit error rate test pattern It can also be used with a currently running local analog loopback or a
87. in an alarm condition Haba Tx Data Alarm The alarming DTE port s TXD signal is in an alarm condition Ports 4 DTR Alarm The alarming DTE port s DTR signal is in an alarm condition CTS Alarm The alarming DTE port s CTS signal is in an alarm condition RTS Alarm The alarming DTE port s RTS signal is in an alarm condition DSR Alarm The alarming DTE port s DSR signal is in an alarm condition LSD Alarm The alarming DTE port s LSD signal is in an alarm condition Auto Stream Dis The port is disabled due to an antistreaming condition Refer to the Streaming DTE message in the Major Alarm section of this table Disabled The modem s alarming DTE port has been disabled To exit DeviceHS and remain in the Status Branch press the key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key VF VF enables you to display the condition of the leased or dial connection VF also allows you to clear the VF counters To access VF from the Status branch make the following selection a DeviceHS Select VF The selections Display or Clear appear on the LCD s bottom line 3 20 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Displaying VF Conditions Status VF Display Clear 2 ESE To display VF conditions select Display from the Status VF screen CA Status VF gt SigQual Excelent A lt a 8 gt If the modem is receiving a signal the signa
88. is installed Press the Select key to place the SDCP in direct communication with the selected modem The LCD displays the Top Level menu for the selected modem In addition the Front Panel LED on the modem s faceplate and the OK LED on the SDCP light 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 2 9 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems 6 Once you have determined that the modem is installed properly and completed its power up self test rotate the circuit pack lock until it covers the faceplate latch Figure 2 4 and tighten the retention screw on the circuit pack lock This prevents the modem from accidently being removed once it is installed in a carrier 7 Configure the modem as described in the Selecting Factory Configuration Options section earlier in this chapter CIRCUIT PACK N K LOCK Q CLOSED RELEASE TAB 495 14425 02 Figure 2 4 Circuit Pack Lock 2 10 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Modem Installation Removing and Replacing the Model 3921 Pius Modem CAUTION When removing the Model 3921 Plus modem from the carrier always use a ground strap when handling the modem Always store the Model 3921 Plus modems in an antistatic bag when it is removed from the carrier It is not necessary to power down the carrier to remove and replace the Model 3921Plus modem Perform the following steps 1 Rotate the circuit pack lock until the
89. known as CH on the EIA 232 D interface Enable The DTEs CT111 signal may be used in conjunction with CT111 Rate Control refer to the Mux Sub Group section of this table to control modem rate Disable Disregards the DTEs CT111 signal Rcv Remote Loop Enable Nxt Enable Disable Receive Remote Loopback Response Determines if the modem responds to a request for a remote loopback issued from a remote modem DTE RL CT140 Disable Nxt Disable Enable DTE Remote Loopback Controls the use of Pin 21 of the EIA 232 D CCITT V 24 interface by the DTE to initiate a remote loopback An Abort command or test time out ends this test Enable The DTE forces the modem into remote loopback when the signal on Pin 21 CCITT 140 is turned ON Remote Loop ends when the signal is dropped Disable The DTE does not initiate remote loopback in response to the signal on Pin 21 DTE LL CT141 Disable Nxt Disable Enable DTE Local Loopback Controls the use of Pin 18 of the EIA 232 D CCITT V 24 interface by the DTE to initiate a local loopback An Abort command or test time out ends this test Enable The DTE forces the modem into local loopback when the signal on Pin 18 CCITT 141 is turned ON Local loopback ends when the signal is dropped Disable The DTE will not initiate local loopback in response to the signal on Pin 18 Port TXC Source Internal End Internal External Port Transmit Clock Source Determines
90. level either C26 dBm or 43 dBm LSD turns OFF When the carrier signal is greater than this level LSD turns ON Lease Lookback Disable Nxt Disable Enable Lease Lookback While operating on backup lines this configuration option allows the modem to test the primary 4 wire leased lines for connectivity by detecting line energy across the normal line bandwidth This test of the primary lines will not interrupt the data flow on the backup lines The configuration option settings must be the same at both ends Dual Leased Ln Disable End Disable Enable Dual Leased Line Allows the 2 wire backup facility to function as a 2 wire leased line facility When this configuration option is disabled the backup facility is a 2 wire dial line NOTE Plug the leased line into the jack labeled DIAL on the rear panel of the modem see Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 Except for dialing ring indication and call progression functions you control the backup function as if it were a normal dial backup NOTE When the Dual Leased Line configuration option is changed the modem will reset BackupLine Check Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option only appears when Dual Leased Line is enabled This configuration option does not appear when V 34 is enabled Backup Line Check Tests the backup circuit for availability while the modem is operating on the primary 4 wire leased lines The test involves detecting line energy across the normal
91. loading factory default configuration options 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 Sample Configurations OVERVIEW AE G 1 Tre rete oce E Ra dab aa Aic ROCA ARR G 2 Configutation OpHODS ecce oerte te el G 2 Cables eem e RR A Oy Rer er xo E EE G 3 Extended Polnt t0 POlB 1 2 iih gne metere t tremere de erbe G 4 Conufieutadod OPAOS e Pedes ots ee G 4 Cables RR a E REUS G 5 Extended eot pen eec G 6 CONT STATION OP OS Ere tori Rescue G 7 Cables i e Ree haee eSI EE ER 3 G 8 Point to Point with Automatic Dial Backup G 8 Couhiguration boe RE wad Dares Rede eas G 9 Cables pe G 9 Point to Point with Network G 10 Counfigutation oo ccs e s rsen mbar dake Bebe G 10 Cables wdc cients Re Rem e x RD re E XR RS G 11 Carrier with Network Management G 12 Confisurauon OPUONS iets Gtk Sided bloga oan we G 13 Cables senie ae G 13 Extended Diagnostics des ce Sek ate bees gale G 14 Coutigutaton OpHODS acce ecce dd E riot eb cba G 14 elg PT G 15 Adapter leen e Ree e HRS RR OR E EE ERA RS G 1
92. menu tree or move to the Top Level menu and follow the LCD messages to save the new modem settings V 25bis HDLC Selects V 25bis HDLC as the dialing method and protocol used by the modem This is also known as bit oriented protocol This framing protocol uses flag address and control characters before the text block and a frame sequence check and flag after the text block DTR Direct1 Allows the modem to automatically dial the number stored in directory location 1 whenever turns ON DTR dialing cannot be used if dial access security is enabled AT amp T Exclusive Enables a subset of the proprietary AT amp T command set which is required for some applications that use AT amp T equipment Currently the only application supported is AT amp T DATAKIT The AT commands for AT are amp MO amp M1 amp M3 or 8 0 amp Q1 amp Q3 The AT commands for DTR Direct1 dialing are amp M2 or amp Q2 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 41 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 8 2 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt AT Escape Char 043 ASCI Nxt 043 ASCI This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT AT Escape Character The escape sequence allows you to move from Data mode to Command mode Use the ATO command to return to Data mode The ASCII value of the escape character 43 ASCII can be set to any ASCII value from 0 ASCII to 255 ASCII Howev
93. modem This function is necessary for a remote tributary modem in a V 29 multipoint network and is recommended for a control modem as well The AT command is S Register S92 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable V29 Retrain Enable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option only appears when Leased Line Rate is configured for V29 V 29 Retrain When enabled the modem transmits a training sequence whenever it receives one This configuration option should normally be disabled for control modems The AT command is S Register S93 n where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable 4 56 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 11 5 of 5 Leased Line Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt V29 Link Config PointToPoint Nxt PointToPoint Multipoint This configuration option only appears when Leased Line Rate is configured for V29 V 29 Link Configuration Selects point to point or multipoint operation NOTE Remote mode and the Cloning function are not available when configured for V 29 multipoint The AT command is S Register S94 n where nis 0 for PointToPoint and 1 for Multipoint TMp Train Time 50 Nxt 50 10 20 100 200 300 This configuration option only appears when Leased Line Rate is configured for TMp Trellis Multipoint TMp Train Time Defines the length of time energy is sent from the tributary modem to the control modem More severe line conditions require longer time
94. nj Select the appropriate port by pressing the corresponding F key Press the gt key to scroll other ports into view The Pick Test Port screen does not appear in Singleport mode Test P1 Pattern lee CAS lt a fre gt The message Started appears on the LCD and the Test LED lights The port field for example P1 for Port 1 displays the port that is currently selected You may see P1 P2 P3 or P4 Test P1 Pattern A ee A nj gt BlksErrd xxxxxxx displays the number of blocks of data found in error block size is 1000 bits per block BIksRcevd xxxxxxx displays the total number of blocks of data received Select Clear to reset both block counters In Singleport mode the message NoSync can appear as a value for BlksErrd while the modem s receiver is synchronizing The message OvrF lw can appear as the value for BlksErrd if the counter overflows Press the gt key to display BlksRcvdzxxxxxxx number of blocks of data received Press the gt key to display Clear Select Clear to reset the block counters The Pattern test can be exited and reentered without restarting the test The BlksErrd and BlksRcvd continue counting If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the test If it is disabled the test operates until aborted For more information on the Test Timeout configuration option refer
95. not available Refer to the BackupLine Check configuration option in the Leased Line section of Chapter 4 Line Bkup 2w APL or Line Dial Backup Pri 4w APL XXXX or Pri 2w APL XXXX Good indicates the line condition is good Bad indicates the line condition is bad 2299 indicates the line condition is unknown Lease Lookback has not had enough time to make an initial appraisal of the line conditions since the last retrain blank indicates the Lease Lookback option is disabled Refer to the BackupLine Check configuration option in the Leased Line section of Chapter 4 Line Dial Only No second screen NOTE When the modem is configured for Dial Only there display is no backup NOTE The leased line interface is disabled when the factory default options are loaded from the Async Dial Sync Dial or UNIX Dial templates Line No Sync No second screen NOTE No Sync appears when the modem is not trained on display either the primary or backup line facility To exit this function and remain in the Status branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 27 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Options The Options Status function displays all optional firmware features currently installed in the modem If no firmware options are installed None_Installed appears on the LCD To access Options from the Status b
96. or enables the MSD function on a per port basis NOTE When the Modem MSD configuration option is enabled port rates default to the lowest port number For example if Modem MSD is enabled for Ports 2 3 and 4 only Port 2 rates are available NOTE When using TMp modulation on a tributary modem port rates are not available when the Modem MSD configuration option is disabled Rate at 33 6 K Nxt Disable 33600 28800 24000 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 Rate at 33 6K When the modem rate is 33 600 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option Disable or 33600 to 1200 The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 33 600 bps Rate at 28 8 K Nxt Disable 28800 24000 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 Rate at 28 8K When the modem rate is 28 800 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option Disable 28800 or 1200 The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 28 800 bps Rate at 24 0 K Nxt Disable 24000 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 Rate at 24 0K When the modem rate is 28 800 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option Disable 24000 or 1200 The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 24 000 bps Rate at 19 2 K Nxt Disable 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 Rate at 19 2K When the modem rate is 19 200 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option Dis
97. press the gt key to display the Reprogram Remote selection Warning Download A Reprogram_Remote A lt F1 F2 F3 gt Press any function key to begin the transfer RemClone Status A Remote L8 The local modem s LCD displays Establish Remote indicating the modem is attempting to establish a Remote Cloning Download session with the remote modem 3 48 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation If unsuccessful the modem remains in the Download Transfer mode The LCD s top line displays RemClone Failed and the bottom line displays one of the following messages Incompat Modulat The modems are connected but are using a modulation scheme other than V 34 family V 33 V 32 family V 29 or TMp No Response The remote modem is not a 3900 Series modem or the connection between the two modems is poor Access Disabled The remote modem s Access from Remote configuration is disabled Password Invalid The local and remote modems passwords do not match Correct the problem and attempt another download from the local modem If this fails contact your service representative No Circuit There is no connection between the local and remote modem After successful establishment of a Remote Cloning Download session the following screens appear RemClone Status A Initializing a 2 8 RemClone Status A
98. response format is DLCn Where n is the delay in minutes before the number can be called Call Answer Commands Call Answer commands disable or enable the modem s AutoAnswer function These commands are issued from the DTE Call Answer commands include Incoming Call INC Disregard Incoming Call DIC and Connect Incoming Call CIC Incoming Call INC The INC response informs the DTE that the modem has detected a ring tone At this point the DTE can issue the DIC command to disable the modem from answering the call INC is similar to the AT result code RING Disregard Incoming Call DIC The DIC command prevents the modem from answering an incoming call This command is only valid once the DTE receives an incoming call INC response from the modem A DIC must be issued within 5 seconds after receiving an INC The DIC command format is DIC If DIC is issued within 5 seconds the modem sends the VAL response to the DTE If DIC is issued after 5 seconds INV is returned 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 D 3 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Connect Incoming Call CIC The CIC command forces the modem to cancel any DIC commands and answer an incoming call This command is only valid when the DTE issues a DIC command CIC must be issued within 10 seconds after sending a DIC CIC is similar to the ATA command The CIC command format is CIC If CIC is issued within 10 seconds the modem sends the VAL response to the DTE If C
99. selections The AT command is S Register S95 n where nis 0 for 10 milliseconds 1 for 20 milliseconds 2 for 50 milliseconds 3 for 100 milliseconds 4 for 200 milliseconds and 5 for 300 milliseconds TMp TxPreemphasis Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option only appears if Leased Line Rate is configured for TMp Trellis Multipoint TMp Transmit Preemphasis Provides amplification for frequencies above the carrier frequency to compensate for high frequency line attenuation The AT command is S Register S96 n where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable Lease Lookback Disable Nxt Disable Enable Lease Lookback While operating on backup lines this configuration option allows the modem to test the primary 4 wire leased lines for connectivity by detecting line energy across the normal line bandwidth This test of the primary lines will not interrupt the data flow on the backup lines The configuration option settings must be the same at both ends Dual Leased Ln Disable End Disable Enable Dual Leased Line Allows the 2 wire backup facility to function as a 2 wire leased line facility When this option is disabled the backup facility is a 2 wire dial line NOTE Plug the leased line into the jack labeled DIAL on the rear panel of the modem see Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 Except for dialing ring indication and call progression functions you control the backup function as if it were a normal dial backup NOTE
100. test 3 55 ac power requirements 1 13 Active Operating configurations 4 1 Active Saved configurations 4 1 address network management 3 31 4 29 4 68 analog loopback test 3 57 3 58 answer access security 6 2 6 4 answering a call auto answer 3 74 4 19 4 46 manual answer 3 68 3 75 4 19 4 46 Applications 1 8 digital bridge 1 9 dual leased backup 1 9 MSD Modem Sharing Device 1 9 multipoint operation 1 8 multiport backup 1 10 V 34 modulation 1 9 approvals 1 13 ASCII characters table E 1 E 4 asynchronous character format 4 13 4 34 asynchronous operation 2 11 4 2 4 13 4 33 AT commands command list 5 5 5 14 configuration option 4 41 operating modes 5 1 result codes 5 3 5 4 using commands 5 1 5 2 automatic rate control 4 24 4 54 back panel connectors 2 4 backup dial 2 5 2 6 3 41 3 42 3 65 3 68 3 69 B 2 leased 1 9 1 10 2 5 2 6 3 65 status 3 26 Bell 103J 4 50 212A 4 50 Bisync 4 41 D 1 busy control 3 40 3 41 cables 2 4 2 5 2 6 connecting 2 3 Call Setup branch 3 10 3 65 3 73 Canadian government requirements 1 12 carrier mounted multiport modem 1 2 singleport modem 1 2 Clone Remote 3 42 3 49 compandor 3 22 compatibility 1 13 COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Model 3921Plus installation and removal 2 6 2 12 network interface module NIM 2 2 3 41 service line 3 41 3 42 COMSPHERE 6700 Series NMS 1 1 configuration options defaults
101. the amount of time the download will take However a DTE is not required The firmware download begins without any operator action When the firmware download begins the LCD displays download status messages with the data bank number current block being loaded and the total number of blocks Download Status ZN DE 8 If the modem connects at 14 400 bps the download takes about 10 minutes When the download completes the modem resets itself and displays a normal status message such as Idle 28 8 Reload your saved configuration options from the Customer or Customer 2 memory area Automatic Firmware Download Failure If the firmware download is interrupted the following screen appears DownldOnly Mode a Configure a re n gt This indicates that your modem is left in a state that can only be used to make or receive a call for download To continue the firmware download repeat the download process by directing the modem to dial the Automatic Firmware Download Center refer to the Call Setup Branch section in this chapter for information about dialing a number using the DCP If you are unable to complete the download contact your service representative for assistance 3 50 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation VF Thresholds Update The VF Thresholds Update function allows you to set the thresholds that dete
102. the appropriate digital interface appears Select the appropriate interface by pressing the corresponding function key After selecting the desired interface the message Command Complete appears on the bottom line of the LCD and the selected interface appears in the xxxxx field NOTE The Port 1 interface is the only display allowed on the 3921 Plus modem in Singleport mode therefore the entire EIA LEDs branch is masked Make Busy Remove Make Busy The Make Busy function forces the modem off hook so it cannot answer a call This is often used with PBX systems to permit the busy out of a PBX port for rotary or hunt groups WARNING To prevent violations of FCC and DOC regulations this function must only be used behind a user s PBX To access Make Busy from the Control branch make the following selections Control CA P 2x 8 L8 gt Press the key until Make Busy appears Select Make Busy Make Busy A D A L8 L8 The modem is now in a forced busy condition Command Complete appears on the LCD To remove the modem from Make Busy mode press the A key once and the gt key until RemoveMakeBusy appears 3 40 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Control xi A M A Press any function key to select RemoveMakeBusy The message Command Complete appears
103. the clock source used to clock transmit data into the port buffer from Pin 2 TXD of the EIA 232 D interface The port buffer is used to compensate for timing differences when a port is connected via a crossover cable to another modem s EIA 232 D interface Internal The data input to the port buffer from Pin 2 of the EIA 232 D interface is clocked into the buffer using the modem s transmit clock The modem s transmit clock is determined by the TX Clock Source configuration option Data is removed from the buffer using this same clock External The data input to the port buffer from Pin 2 of the EIA 232 D interface is clocked into the buffer using the clock source provided on Pin 24 XTXC of the EIA 232 D interface Data is removed from the buffer using the modem s transmit clock The modem s transmit clock is determined by the TX Clock Source configuration option NOTE The port buffer is re centered each time RTS is turned ON If there is a lack of clock synchronization frequent toggling of RTS will prevent the loss of data due to buffer overflow or underflow DTE Alarm Mask Disable Nxt Disable Enable DTE Alarm Mask Allows you to enable or disable the reporting of DTE alarms per port to the front panel and or NMS Enable No not report alarms Disable Report alarms 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 17 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 1 9 of 9 DTE Interface Configuration Options Multi
104. the dial string can be included to enhance readability Ignored by the dial string can be included to enhance readability Ignored by the dial string can be included to enhance readability Ignored by the dial string can be included to enhance readability End of Number Hides all characters appearing on the LCD entered to the right of this indicator Directory Status may not appear for certain countries Directory Status displays the status of each directory location To access Directory Status from the Call Setup branch make the following selections Press the gt key until Directory Status appears Press any function key to select Directory Status Call Setup lt A Directory Status A e 8 m Press the key until Directory Status appears Press any function key to select Directory Status 3 72 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Number Status A 01 Allowed CAD lt Em nj gt Select Nxt to display other directory locations The status of a directory location can be No Number The directory location is empty Allowed The number in this directory location may be dialed at this time Delayed The number in this directory location may be dialed later Forbidden The number in this directory location may not be dialed Delayed and Forbidden only appear in countries with specific dialing requirements When a number is delayed
105. the modem pauses when it encounters a comma in the dial command string NoAnswer Timout 45sec Nxt 45sec 30sec 60sec No Answer Abort Time out Determines the number of seconds an originating modem waits before abandoning a call attempt when no answer tone is received NOTE The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries Fast Disconnect Disable Nxt Disable Enable Fast Disconnect Allows the modem to disconnect immediately after receiving a disconnect command from a local DTE or its own diagnostic control panel Disable The modem follows its normal disconnect sequence by issuing a cleardown sequence or long space disconnect This is also known as a graceful disconnect since the other modem receives advance notice of a disconnection Enable Use this setting if the DTE requires that the modem be made available as soon as possible after receiving a disconnect command NOTE This abrupt method of disconnecting may cause problems with the remote modem which may interpret the disconnection as an error instead of a valid disconnect Line Crnt Disc Enab gt 8msec Nxt Enab gt 8msec Enab gt 90msec Disable This configuration option does not appear on Models 3920 A1 401 and 3921 B1 001 Line Current Disconnect Determines the modem s response to short interruptions of line current The loss of line current is one method of disconnecting a call Enable gt 8 millisecond Disconnects the mo
106. through B 6 to check out these problems If you are having data communication difficulties such as periodic character loss random errors or constant format errors use the loopback tests described in the Test section of Chapter 4 With these tests you can usually isolate the fault in your system by using the process of elimination If problems continue to occur contact your service representative Table B 1 Modem Health Symptom Action The modem did not pass the power up self test Contact your service representative The power LED does not light or the LCD does not display information Make sure the modem s ON OFF switch is in the ON position Make sure the power supply is connected to the dc power receptacle on the modem If the Power LED and or LCD do not operate contact your service representative A problem is suspected after the power up self test Perform a self test via the modem s DCP or type AT amp T9 if using AT commands Perform a local analog loopback with a Pattern test If the modem consistently registers errors contact your service representative If the modem passes the above tests and a problem still exists then the problem is probably not with your modem 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 B 1 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table B 2 Leased Line Operation Symptom Action The modems do not train up on leased lines Verify that the correct cablin
107. to the Test section in Chapter 4 To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the Zx key 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 63 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Sub Network Health and Status Branch The Sub Network Health and Status SubHS function is not available on multipoint tributary modems or with certain modulations V 29 V 33 V 22bis and V 27bis The SubHS branch of the Top Level menu allows you to display alarm conditions in downstream modems To access the SubHS branch from the Top Level menu make the following selections Leased 28 8 Test SubHS Press the gt key until SubHS appears Select SubHS NOTE If there are no modems in the poll list the message Poll List Empty appears on the second line of the LCD Sub network HS A Nxt XXX yyyyyy A lt fre gt 3 64 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation When you select SubHS XXX Displays the network management address of the downstream modem selected yyyyyy Displays the status of the downstream modem This message is updated every several seconds to display the latest status MAJOR MINOR and STATUS display Health and Status alarm conditions refer to Table 3 6 in the Device Health and Status DeviceHS section of this chapter for additional information UNKNWN appea
108. tone 4 4 ERROR Invalid command 5 5 CONNECT 1200 Connection at 1200 bps 6 6 NO DIALTONE No dial tone detected 7 7 BUSY Busy or trunk busy signal detected 8 8 NO ANSWER No quiet answer 10 10 CONNECT 2400 Connection at 2400 bps 11 11 CONNECT 4800 Connection at 4800 bps 12 12 CONNECT 9600 Connection at 9600 bps 13 16 CONNECT 12000 Connection at 12 000 bps 14 13 CONNECT 14400 Connection at 14 400 bps 15 14 CONNECT 19200 Connection at 19 200 bps 16 15 CONNECT 7200 Connection at 7200 bps 17 17 CONNECT 16800 Connection at 16 800 bps 19 19 CONNECT 300 Connection at 300 bps 20 10 CONNECT 2400 EC Connection at 2400 bps with error control 21 11 CONNECT 4800 EC Connection at 4800 bps with error control DTE data rate instead of the line rate Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is enabled Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Use DTE Rate This displays the Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Add EC If this configuration option is set for Add V42 MNP then either V42b V42 MNP5 MNP4 MNP3 MNP2 or NoEC appears Only appears when the modulation is V 34 and the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set to Add EC or Add V 42 Receive Rate RX and Transmit Rate TX appear in place of the single rate 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 5 3 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Mode
109. tributaries which are always set to address 01 Network Management Address Determines the address used when accessing a modem from the NMS or when using DCP functions that require network management addresses Within a network link a control modem can communicate with a tributary modem by using the tributary modem s network management address Each TMp tributary modem must have a different network management address Address values range from 001 to 256 NOTE Changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset Diag Connection Modem DC Nxt Modem DC NMS CC Disable This configuration option does not appear when the LeaseLine Rate is configured for TMp and the NetworkPosition is configured for Tributary Diagnostic Connection Allows the configuration of the serial diagnostic port of the modem to be either a diagnostic channel that is connected to another modem DC or a control channel that is connected to a network management device CC NOTE Changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset Modem DC Selects the Diagnostic Channel NMS CC Selects the Control Channel Disable Prevents messages being sent from the diagnostic port The AT command is S Register S90 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable Link Delay sec O 1 Nxt 01 2 5 10 20 50 Link Delay Seconds Controls the length of time in seconds a modem will wait for responses from the downstream devices This
110. you intend to access another 392xPlus modem via the Remote branch of the Top Level menu the Remote Access Password must be the same for both modems By following these procedures you learn how to load a factory preset configuration area in this case Sync Leased how to edit a configuration option Remote Access Password and how to save changes to a configuration area Active Saved The shaded key indicates what key to press Leased 28 8 A Status Configure A lt a e 8 gt Select Configure from the Top Level menu LdEditAreafrm gt A A L5 08 5 LdEditAreafrm A Factory A lt e 8 gt Scroll across the LCD and select the Factory configuration area 4 4 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Ld Fact Preset gt A Ene Select Sync Leased Choose Mode A Answer Originate Bl Select Answer Choose Function A Br Save e Select Edit Edit StrapGroup gt DTE_Interface 19 Edit StrapGroup A Es Misc 9 Eg Scroll across the LCD and select the Misc configuration options group 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 5 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems StrapsWhenDisc gt A w No_Change A 5
111. zero 0 if you do not want the modem to automatically answer any calls Otherwise enter a value from 1 255 for the number of rings to count before answering The factory setting is 1 S2 AT Escape Character Register determines ASCII value used for escape Configure WEdit sequence to enter Command mode from Data mode DTE Dialer Enter a value from 0 to 127 for the escape character Any value greater than 127 causes the modem to disable the escape sequence When the escape sequence is disabled the modem cannot return to Command mode until the call is disconnected The factory setting is 43 key S3 Carriage Return Character Register determines ASCII value used as the Configure WEdit carriage return Return key This character is used to end command lines and DTE Dialer result codes Enter a value from 0 to 127 for the command end character The factory setting is 13 carriage return key S4 Line Feed Character Register determines ASCII value used as the line feed Configure Edit character DTE Dialer Enter a value from 0 127 for the line feed character The factory setting is 10 ASCII carriage return or line feed S5 Backspace Character Register determines ASCII value used as the Configure WEdit backspace Backspace key This character moves the cursor to the left and DTE Dialer erases the previous character Enter a value from 0 127 The factory setting is 8 backspace key S6 Blind Dial Pause Register determines how long
112. 0 Glossary circuit pack lock command mode compandor configuration area configuration option connector constant carrier mode Control Channel CC control modem controlled carrier mode Customer 1 Customer 2 DAA data bank data carrier data compression data mode DB 25 connector A screw lock tab installed over a circuit card s latch release tab to prevent the unit from being removed without a tool It is used on SDUs modems and filler panels One of two modem operating modes When in Command mode the modem accepts commands instead of transmitting or receiving data A combination of a compressor at one point in a communication path for reducing the volume range of signals followed by an expandor at another point for restoring the original volume range Usually its purpose is to improve the ratio of the signal to the interference in the path between the compressor and expandor One of five areas within the Configure branch containing modem settings Configuration areas include Active Operating Active Saved Customer 1 Customer 2 and Factory Modem software that sets specific operating parameters for the modem Sometimes referred to as straps An outlet on equipment and cables that provides a connection The modem transmits a carrier signal constantly regardless of RTS The diagnostic interface between a network management system and a network device A control modem polls downstream tr
113. 0 3 61 Pattern 3 61 3 63 Remote Digital Loopback 3 58 3 59 Self 3 56 Test configuration options group 4 27 test configuration options group 4 64 time division multiplexer See multiplexer TMp default configurations See default configuration options top level menu messages 3 11 3 16 Trellis Multipoint TMp 3 45 Troubleshooting B 1 B 5 United States government requirements 1 11 1 12 UNIX dial 2 11 4 2 4 33 V 25bis dialing commands and response D 1 D 8 V 34 modulation 1 9 1 10 V 34 modulation 3 25 dial line 5 17 leased lines 1 10 5 17 quick display 3 15 V 42 error control 4 58 V 42 MNP Buffer configuration options group 4 58 V 42bis data compression 4 59 VF 5 3 5 9 connection 2 5 2 6 B 4 B 5 data rate 5 25 interface requirements 1 14 parameters 1 7 3 51 pin assignments C 3 rates 5 17 status 3 20 3 23 VF Thresholds update 3 51 3 54 weight 1 14 Index 4 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30
114. 0 DTE Cable1 _ Sync Cable1 Cable 1 4800 Cable 3 4800 4800 TX _ 1X Leased DTE 3910 A 3910 B Sync Addr 1 Cable 2 Cable 2 Cable 1 4800 TMp IX 3910 C 800 Cable 2 Figure G 3 Sample Configuration Extended Multipoint Cable 1 G 6 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Sample Configurations Configuration Options 3920Plus A 3920Plus B 3910 A 3910 B 3910 C Sample Port Rate Table Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following exception Rate Refer to Sample Port Rate Table in this section Use Sync Leased Originate default configuration options with the following exceptions TX Clock Source Set to RXC Loop Rate Refer to Sample Port Rate Table in this section Port TXC Source Set Port 4 to External Use TMp Control default configuration options with the following exceptions TX Clock Source Set to External LeasedLine Rate Set to 4800 TMp Autorate Leased Line Set to Disable Use TMp Trib default configuration options with the following exceptions TX Clock Source Setto RXC Loop LeasedLine Rate Set to 4800 TMp Use TMp Trib default configuration options with the following exceptions TX Clock Source Set to RXC Loop LeasedLine Rate Set to 4800 TMp Autorate Leased Line Set to Disable Port Rate Port 1 Port 2 Port3 Port 4 28 8K 9600 9600 4800
115. 0 seconds 51 DTE RL CT140 Register determines if the modem performs a remote digital Configure Edit loopback if it receives a CT140 signal from the DTE Tests Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable 5 20 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 5 3 6 of 12 392xPlus S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence 52 DTE LL CT141 Register determines if the modem performs a local analog Configure Edit loopback if it receives a CT141 signal from the DTE Tests Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable 53 V 54 Address Identifies the address of the modem to be placed in a loopback Configure Edit test Tests Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 34 Modem address The factory setting is Disable 54 V 54 Device Type Identifies where the modem is physically located in the Configure Edit network Tests Register has the following values 0 Peripheral 1 Intermediate The factory setting is Peripheral 55 Access From Remote Register determines if a modem s DCP can be Configure Edit accessed by a remote modem Misc Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable S56 Remote Access Password Register allows entry of the first pair leftmost of Configure Edit digits of a remote access
116. 0 seconds or 240 seconds The AT command is S Register S18 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 to 255 seconds Rcv Remote Loop Enable Nxt Enable Disable Receive Remote Loopback Response Determines if the modem responds to a request for a remote loopback issued from a remote modem The AT command for Enable is amp T4 The AT command for Disable is amp T5 4 64 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 13 2 of 2 Test Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt V54 Address Disable Nxt Disable Address Values V 54 Address Determines which remote 392xP lus modem is placed into a remote loopback test This test can be either a remote digital loopback or local analog loopback This type of addressing should be used for extended data circuits tail circuits Disable This is used for normal point to point leased line and dial networks Address Values 01 03 05 07 09 OB OD OF 11 13 15 17 19 1B 1D 1F 25 27 2B 2D 2F 33 35 37 3B 3D 55 57 5B 5F 6F 77 or 7F This configuration option selects the address of a modem that is to be placed into a loopback test This configuration option is used for more complex networks where multiple modems used in extended data circuits tail circuits can be commanded to loopback The AT command for Disable is S Register 853 0 The AT command for V 54 Address is S Register S53 n where n is a value from 1 to 34 V54
117. 00 V34 12000 V34 9600 V34 7200 V34 4800 V34 2400 V34 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b 19200 TMp 14400 TMp 9600 TMp 7200 TMp 4800 TMp 2400 TMp Leased Line Rate Determines the modem s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on leased lines These modulation schemes are available on 2 wire or 4 wire lease 33600 28800 V 34 24000 V34 19200 V34 16800 V34 14400 V34 12000 V34 9600 V34 7200 V34 4800 V34 2400 V34 The modem operates using V 34 modulation at the data rate selected 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b The modem operates using V 32bis or V 32 terbo modulation at the data rate selected 19200 TMp 14400 TMp 9600 TMp 7200 TMp 4800 TMp 2400 TMp The modem operates in Trellis Multipoint mode at the data rate selected These modulation schemes are available on 4 wire leased lines The 19200 TMp modulation does not appear on tributary modems Leased Mode 4WLL Ans Nxt 4WLL Ans 4WLL Orig 2WLL Orig 2WLL Ans Leased Mode Sets the modem for either 2 wire or 4 wire operation in Answer mode receiving a call or 2 wire or 4 wire operation in Originate initiating a call mode NOTE For proper operation of V 34 or V 32 modulations over leased lines one modem must be set to Originate mode and the other set to Answer mode For Sync Leased Originate Mode Async Leased Originate Mode and Trellis
118. 14 4 9600 Disable Disable 4800 12 0K Disable Disable Disable 4800 9 6K Disable Disable Disable 4800 7 2K Disable Disable Disable 4800 4 8K Disable Disable Disable 4800 2 4K Disable Disable Disable Disable Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTE1 2 3 or 4 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED Use part number 818 2759 0111 or an equivalent customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 crossover cable with DB 25 P plug connectors on both ends to attach to the modems See Appendix C for pin assignments 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 G 5 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Extended Multipoint Figure G 3 shows a sample configuration for extended multipoint applications 9600 9600 DTE Sync 4800 4800 Cable1 Cable 1 Cable 1 Cable 1 This FEP Port is Running the Multipoint Application 28800 V34 28800 V34 9600 Leased AG Sync 3920Plus A 3920Plus B 2 X 9600 DTE Sync Cable 2 Syno 480
119. 2 key Identity displays the modem s serial number model number firmware revision level hardware revision number and firmware part number Retrieval of this information is useful if you are purchasing additional or replacement modems and or making firmware upgrades To access Identity from the Status branch make the following selection Status ZN VF Identity A L Press the key until Identity appears Select Identity Ew gt A Ser 00000000 2 The modem s serial number appears on LCD s bottom line Press gt key to scroll and view the model number firmware revision level hardware part number and firmware part number Ser Serial number is an 8 digit number that identifies the modem Mod Model number is an alphanumeric number that identifies the modem as either a Model 3920Plus or Model 3921Plus modem FRev Firmware revision level is an alphanumeric number that identifies the level of firmware loaded in the modem HPt Hardware part number is an 11 digit number that identifies the circuit card in the modem FPt Firmware part number is an 11 digit number that identifies to service personnel the firmware release number Country Country code is a 7 text character that identifies the current country code To exit the Identity function and remain in the Status branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top
120. 2 11 2 12 4 2 F 2 F 7 quick display 3 15 samples G 1 tables Security 6 13 6 14 Configuration Tables 4 8 multiport mode 4 8 singleport mode 4 8 Configure branch 3 10 4 1 4 3 4 7 editing and saving 4 4 Control branch 3 10 3 35 3 54 country code 3 23 Customer 1 configurations 4 1 Customer 2 configurations 4 1 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 Index 1 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems data access arrangement 1 2 faceplate 1 5 1 6 3 3 data compression 4 59 factory default configurations 2 11 4 2 F 2 F 7 data rates See rates features 1 7 1 8 DATAKIT 4 16 4 38 4 41 firmware part number 3 23 DataStream 3 37 firmware revision level FRev 3 23 default configuration options 2 11 2 12 4 2 F 2 F 7 firmware upgrades download 3 42 3 49 diagnostic control panel DCP flow control 4 60 4 61 configurations See configuration options front panel See diagnostic control panel description 1 5 1 6 3 2 3 3 function keys 3 7 3 9 4 7 menu tree 3 9 3 10 A 1 A 3 messages 3 11 3 16 3 18 3 19 3 27 3 28 operation 2 12 3 7 3 9 4 4 4 7 6 7 status indicators LEDs 3 3 3 6 G diagnostic tests See Test branch dial government requirements Canada 1 12 access security See Security United States 1 11 1 12 nited States 1 11 1 answering a call auto answer 3 74 4 19 4 46 manual answer 3 68 3 75 4 19 4 46 backup 2 5 2 6 3 41 3 42 3 65 3 68 3 69 B 2
121. 20 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Leased Line Singleport Mode lt The Leased Line configuration options only appear when the Sync Leased factory preset template is selected They are used to configure the modem for operation over leased lines Table 4 11 shows each Leased Line configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Table 4 11 1 of 5 Leased Line Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt LeaseModulation V34 Nxt V34 V32 Family TMp V33 V29 V27b V22b Lease Modulation Modulation reduces the amount of scrolling necessary to select Leased Line rates by limiting the number of Leased Line Rate configuration options Only one group of Leased Line rates is displayed depending on the setting of the Lease Modulation configuration option V 34 V 32bis V 32terbo TMp V 33 V 29 V 27bis V 22bis LeasedLine Rate 28800 V34 Nxt 33600 31200 28800 V34 26400 V34 24000 V34 21600 V34 19200 V34 16800 V34 14400 V34 12000 V34 9600 V34 7200 V34 4800 V34 2400 V34 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b 19200 TMp 14400 TMp 9600 TMp 7200 TMp 4800 TMp 2400 T
122. 21Plus carrier mounted singleport modem model no 3921 B1 01x e Model 3921Plus carrier mounted multiport modem model no 3921 B1 00x The last digit in the model number x varies depending on whether the modem is equipped with fixed Data Access Arrangement DAA or configurable DAA NOTE Throughout this manual reference to the 392xPlus modem represents all four models Model 3920Plus Standalone Singleport Modem The Model 3920Plus singleport is a standalone modem Figure 1 1 capable of either 4 wire 2 wire leased line or dial operation This modem is controlled using either AT commands or the DCP The DCP consists of a liquid crystal display LCD three function keys four directional keys and a row of 13 LED status indicators For a better understanding of DCP operation refer to Chapter 3 DCP Operation Model 3920Plus Standalone Multiport Modem The Model 3920Plus multiport is a standalone modem Figure 1 1 with an integral time division multiplexer TDM and a modem sharing device MSD as standard equipment The TDM provides time division multiplexing of up to four independent ports over point to point lines using the V 34 family or V 32 family modulation The MSD allows multiple physical ports on a tributary modem to share a single communication channel using the V 34 family V 32 family or TMp modulation The TDM MSD multiplexer commonly referred to as mux can be enabled or disabled to allow a greater d
123. 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Dial Transmit Level Selects the modem s transmit power level over dial lines The transmit output level can be selected in 1 dBm decrements from 9 dBm to 32 dBm NOTE In North America the range of allowable values is 10 to 32 dBm plus Permissive 9 dBm This configuration option is locked in other some countries the user cannot change the level NOTE The factory default setting is country dependent Default is Permissv 9 in North America The AT command is amp In where n is from 10 to 32 corresponding to 10 dBm to 32 dBm 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 51 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 10 3 of 3 Dial Line Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt V22b Guard Tone Disable Nxt Disable 550Hz 1800Hz This configuration option only appears when Dial Line Rate is configured for V 22bis or V 22 data rate or when Automode is configured for Enable V 22bis Guard Tone Determines whether the V 22bis guard tone is disabled set to 550 Hz or set to 1800 Hz Disable No guard tone 550 Hz or 1800 Hz When the modem is in Answer mode it transmits the guard tone at this frequency NOTE The V 22bis Guard Tone cannot be disabled in some countries The AT command for Disable is amp GO The AT command for 550 Hz is amp G1 The AT command for 1800 Hz is amp G2 Train Time Long End Long Short This configuration option only appears when Dial L
124. 2xPlus Modems The menu tree contains the following branches Status Configure PList Control Test SubHS Call Setup Talk Data Security Remote Used to monitor the current status of the VF line and DTE interface as well as view the identity of the modem Used to change and save the modem s configuration options Poll List Used to identify downstream modems in order to support multipoint health and status polling and multipoint link download broadcasting Used to control the modem s hardware and software functions Used to begin and end various modem tests Sub Network Health and Status Used to display alarm conditions in downstream modems Used to dial disconnect and answer telephone calls as well as store up to 24 telephone numbers in directory locations Used to switch the modem between Talk mode the modem is disconnected from the VF line and Data mode the modem is connected to the VF line when dialing via either the DCP or a telephone Used to control the modem s dial access security The Security branch only appears in Singleport mode Used to access and control a remote 392xPlus modem All menu tree branches are discussed later in Chapter 3 except for Configure which is discussed in Chapter 4 and Security which is discussed in Chapter 6 Functions that appear on the LCD vary depending upon the type of model installed its operating mode and software configuration 3 10 Novem
125. 34 052 4 35 053 5 36 054 6 37 055 7 38 056 8 39 057 9 3A 058 3B 059 3C 060 3D 061 E 2 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 ASCII Character Table Table E 1 3 of 4 ASCII Characters Hexadecimal Decimal Control Key ASCII Value ASCII Value Character 3E 062 gt 3F 063 40 064 41 065 A 42 066 B 43 067 C 44 068 D 45 069 E 46 070 F 47 071 G 48 072 H 49 073 4 074 J 4B 075 K 4C 076 L 4D 077 M 4E 078 N 4F 079 O 50 080 P 51 081 Q 52 082 R 53 083 S 54 084 T 55 085 U 56 086 V 57 087 58 088 X 59 089 Y 5A 090 Z 5B 091 5C 092 5D 093 5E 094 5F 095 60 096 61 097 a 62 098 b 63 099 C 64 100 d 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 E 3 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table E 1 4 of 4 ASCII Characters Hexadecimal Decimal Control Key ASCII Value ASCII Value Character 65 101 e 66 102 f 67 103 g 68 104 h 69 105 i 6A 106 j 6B 107 k 6C 108 6D 109 m 6E 110 n 6F 111 70 112 71 113 q 72 114 73 115 S 74 116 t 75 117 76 118 V 77 119 Ww 78 120 79 121 7 122 2 7B 123 7 124 7D 125 7E 126 7F 127 delete E 4 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Default Configuration Options Overview
126. 392xPlus modems The first column lists the S Register The second column lists all possible values for that register The third column lists the key sequence used to enter the equivalent from the DCP Use this column to reference commands in Chapter 4 if further description is necessary NOTE In some countries the range of allowable values of some S Registers are restricted If the DTE attempts to enter an illegal value the modem will answer OK but it will set the register to the closest legal value The DTE can check the actual value of the register with Sn command S Register Format S Registers can be displayed and or modified when the modem is in Command mode To display the value of an S Register issue the following command TYPE ATSn Where n is the register number PRESS Enter To modify the value of an S Register issue the following command TYPE ATSn r Where n is the register number and r is the new value PRESS Enter In Table 5 3 the value for is listed in the S Register column and the value for r is listed in the Description column 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 5 15 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 5 3 1 of 12 392xPlus S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence S0 Auto Answer Ring Number Register determines number of rings the modem Configure WEdit will count before automatically answering a call Line Dialer Enter
127. 4 4 7200 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 4800 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 2400 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 14400 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 12000 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 9600 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 7200 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 4800 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 2400 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 14400 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 12000 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 9600 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 7200 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4800 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 2400 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 Port Async Sub group Async Sync Mode Sync Async Sync Async 4 Async 4 Sync Async DTE Rate Sync ft Sync Sync tt Sync Sync 4 Sync tt Asyn Data Bits 8tt 8 8 tt 8 lt 84 8tt Asyn Stop Bits 111 1 1tt 14 14 Async Overspeed 1 tt 1 1 tt 1 4 1 4 1 Port EIA Sub group DTR Action Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore lt Ignore lt Standard RS232 DSR Control Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Forced On lt q Forced On lt q Standard RS232 RTS Action Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Standard Ignore lt q Ignore lt q Standard RS232 RS232 trib Ignore control RTS Antistream 6 Disable Disable Disable Disable lt q Disable lt q Disable tt Not applicable when Async Sync mode is set to Sync Refer to Chapter 4 DC
128. 5 Backup n Remo ore DRE odes Ree SWEETS Saree 3 26 ODUDIIS deside qoae centro ac pe tee gebe Ere tdeo te ibas 3 28 MP 3 28 DERVICE Log cs eS ERR PERE eU Late 3 29 COMM CUTS recu dac e pee nace P acaba 3 30 Poll Est BEBO oce oae aes teneas tote xn 3 30 Display cec RR RR RR ORDER Qu DEST DROS KORE KEF RET Y 3 31 SI e M 3 32 RVG EE 3 32 Do 3 33 nun PT 3 34 Cnm LBE csse reg tod baee EI OR Rd t ee Y etian die Ie cerea 3 35 Speaker i 2 en m Re ehem ek har rx REED E Ga Fre 3 36 Reset tiiti r eR ERE ERA GG RE eC HERE UG EE E CDI 3 37 Date SMCA dioeceses ee ed adobe certa pc erectus 3 37 Selecting sose pea eror RR ESI 3 38 BIA LEDS UR eee CEDERE RUE 3 39 Make Busy Remove Make Busy 3 40 Service Line Disconnect Service Line 3 41 Download ster v REDE II oars ead OP 3 42 Selecting Clone Remote siss tiasa aiaa 3 42 Clone Remote in Point to Point Configurations 3 43 Clone Remote in Broadcast Configurations 3 43 Clone Remote in Multipoint Configurations 3 45 Implementing a Clone Remote Operation 3 48 Automatic Firmware Download
129. 5 Digtal 2 Eb eet eter eer pee Roe sos G 16 M G 17 Point to Point MSD come ek Kas noe EP wea eae eS CFR G 18 AOS Rm G 18 G 20 Cables ien has a TREN ERG TA CREE HREOC G 21 Overview This appendix provides diagrams of sample configurations for the 392xPlus modems Following each diagram the appropriate configuration options cables and sample line rates are listed 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 G 1 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Point to Point Figure G 1 shows a sample configuration for point to point applications 28800 V34 28800 V34 9600 TX TX 9600 DTE Sync 9600 DTE 1 Sync 4800 k 3920Plus A 3920Plus B 5 A R ru 9600 4800 Cable 2 Cable 2 4800 Cable1 Cable1 Sync Cable 1 Cable1 Cable1 Cable 1 4800 DTE Sync Cable1 Cable 1 Figure G 1 Sample Configuration Point to Point Configuration Options 3920Plus A Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following exception Rate Refer to Sample Port Rate Table in this section 3920Plus Sync Leased Originate default configuration options with the followi
130. 8 DELAYED amp Delayed number data rate instead of the line rate Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is enabled Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Use DTE Rate This displays the Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Add EC If this configuration option is set for Add V42 MNP then either V42b V42 MNP5 MNP4 MNP3 MNP2 or NoEC appears Only appears when the modulation is V 34 and the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set to Add EC or Add V 42 Receive Rate RX and Transmit Rate TX appear in place of the single rate amp Only appears in countries with specific dialing requirements 5 4 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 AT Command Set and S Registers AT Command List AT commands are issued from an asynchronous DTE such as a PC and control the modem s operation and software configuration AT commands are only applicable when the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set for AT Refer to the amp Mn and amp Qn commands Table 5 2 lists all AT commands supported by the 392xPlus modems The first column lists the AT command The second column defines and lists all possible values for that command The Async Dial factory default is listed in bold The third column lists the key sequence used to enter the equivalent DCP command Use this to reference commands in
131. 9 GROUNDING 90 S SS FUTURE USE S 9S gt losis esje lt o9 ooje 8 OSHS 9o 496 14178a 04 Figure 1 2 Model 3921 Plus Singleport Modem 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 1 5 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems FACEPLATE Status Pwr Alrm 142 Q Test ODial 125 ORI Q Busy Qsev Osa EDGE CARD CONNECTORS BACK CONNECTOR PLATES 109 ULSD Front Panel Q Spkr 3921 Plus 49614423a 03 Figure 1 3 Model 3921 Plus Multiport Modem 1 6 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Introduction 392x Plus Operational Modes The 392xPlus operational modes determine how your modem performs in various applications These operational modes are determined by your modem model and the selected configuration options There are two operational modes e Singleport mode Operates on both the singleport and multiport modems Singleport mode is the only operational mode for the singleport modem For the multiport modem it is in effect when the MUX mode configuration option is set to Disable The Singleport mode only supports one port DTE 1 e Miultip
132. 9 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 5 3 5 of 12 392xPlus S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence S46 Auto Dial Backup Register determines if the modem performs an automatic Configure Edit dial backup if the leased lines fail Leased Line Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable 547 Auto Dial Standby Register determines if the modem performs an automatic Configure Edit dial standby if in Dial Backup mode Leased Line Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 15 minutes 2 1 hour 3 4 hours 4 Test 2min 5 Adv 15min 6 Adv 30min 7 1 8 Adv2minTest The factory setting is Disable S48 Leased Line Carrier On Level Register determines if the modem disconnects Configure WEdit if the carrier signal on leased lines falls below 26 dBm or 43 dBm Leased Line Register has the following values 0 43 dBm 26 dBm 33 dBm The factory setting is country dependent usually 43 dBm In France the factory setting is 26 dBm in 4 wire operation and 33 dBm in 2 wire operation S49 Buffer Disconnect Delay Register determines how long the modem continues Configure Edit to transmit data stored in its buffers when the modem is commanded to V42 MNP Buffer disconnect by a locally attached DTE Enter a value from 0 255 seconds A value of 0 disables this register The factory setting is 1
133. ARMFUL INTERFERENCE WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS OPERATED IN A COMMERCIAL ENVIRONMENT THIS EQUIPMENT GENERATES USES AND CAN RADIATE RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY AND IF NOT INSTALLED AND USED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL MAY CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE TO RADIO COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT IN A RESIDENTIAL AREA IS LIKELY TO CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE IN WHICH CASE THE USER WILL BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT THE INTERFERENCE AT HIS OWN EXPENSE THE AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THIS EQUIPMENT IS CONDITIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS THAT NO MODIFICATIONS WILL BE MADE TO THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THE CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS ARE EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY PARADYNE WARNING TO USERS OF DIGITAL APPARATUS IN CANADA THIS CLASS A DIGITAL APPARATUS MEETS ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE CANADIAN INTERFACE CAUSING EQUIPMENT REGULATIONS CET APPAREIL NUMERIQUE DE LA CLASSE A RESPECTE TOUTES LES EXIGENCES DU REGLEMENT SUR LE MATERIEL BROUILLEUR DU CANADA November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Table of Contents Objectives and Reader Assumptions Vii How to Use This Manual Re ees Vii Related Documents EE EROR Ra hoard Vili 1 Introduction OVERVIEW e eR ERR 1 1 COMSPHERE 392xP lus Models 1 1 tee 1 2 392xPius Operational Modes over epo SR Y 1 7 302 X PI Features Lus exu snp Sos a t aee edo e 1 7 392xPlus Singleport Features vesce soc c Reb UR UR 1
134. COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems dBm DCE DCP demodulation DevHS Diagnostic Channel DC dial command modifiers dial line dial network Dial Standby dial string digital bridging directory location DOC download downstream modem DTE edit area A decibel referenced to one milliwatt This unit measures relative signal power The equipment Data Communications Equipment or Data Circuit Terminating Equipment that provides the functions required to establish maintain and end a connection This equipment also provides the signal conversion required for communication between the DTE and the telephone line Diagnostic Control Panel The face of the modem that continuously provides status information about the modem s operation and allows an operator to manage its operation This is a generic term used for both the standalone and carrier mounted models See SDCP The process of recovering data from a modulated carrier wave Device Health and Status A detailed account of device alarms The diagnostic interface between two network devices used to extend the NMS diagnostics to downstream devices A modifier used in the dial string that instructs the modem how to process a dialed telephone number A communications circuit that is established by a switched circuit connection in the dial network See PSTN A function available when the modem is operating in Dial Backup mode allowing the modem to switch b
135. CTS delay common for V 32bis modulation or when dial access security is enabled and requires a DTE side password entry Often the DTE cannot accept the long delay between DSR and CTS turning ON due to the remote user entering the DTE side password 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 35 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 7 4 of 8 DTE Interface Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt DSR Control Stndrd_RS232 Cont The AT command for Forced On is 850 The AT command for Standard RS232 is amp S1 The AT command for Wink When Disconnect is amp S2 The AT command for Follows DTR is amp S3 The AT command for On Early is amp S4 The AT command for Delay to Data is amp S5 RTS Action Stndrd RS232 Nxt Stndrd RS232 Ignore Sim Cntl Car Cntl Car Request to Send Action RTS is a signal from the DTE indicating the DTE has data to send Standard RS232 Allows the DTE to control RTS to the modem in normal EIA 232 D operation RTS must be ON for the DTE to transmit to the modem Ignore Modem assumes RTS is always ON Use this selection when the DTE does not provide RTS to the modem Simulated Control Carrier RTS input controls the remote modem s LSD signal This is used for DTEs that require Line Signal Detect LSD to toggle ON and OFF to simulate half duplex operation If RTS Action is set to simulated control carrier then the remote modem s LSD Control configuration option must be set to Simulate
136. CTS turns OFF Follows RTS The state of CTS follows the state of RTS When RTS turns ON CTS turns ON When RTS turns OFF CTS turns OFF NOTE When CTS flow control or CTS RTS flow control is enabled CTS will turn ON and OFF regardless of the setting of CTS Control The AT command for Forced On is DO The AT command for Standard RS232 is D1 The AT command for Wink When Disconnect is D2 The AT command for Follows DTR is D3 The AT command for Follows RTS is D4 RTS CTS Delay Omsec Nxt Omsec 10msec 50msec 150msec 600msec Request to Send Clear to Send Delay RTS CTS Delay sets the delay time between the modem receiving RTS from the DTE and the modem sending CTS to the DTE NOTE This delay is only valid in Async Direct mode and synchronous applications when it is necessary to have a short delay between the time the DTE raises RTS and the time the modem presents CTS to allow the DTE to send data NOTE For this configuration option to be valid both the RTS Action and the CTS Control configuration options must be set to Stndrd RS232 If RTS Action is set to Ignore RTS is always ON and this configuration option has no effect The AT command is S Register S26 n where n is a value from 0 to 255 in 10 millisecond increments 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 37 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 7 6 of 8 DTE Interface Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt LSD Control Stndrd_RS232 Nxt Stndrd
137. Chapter 3 or Chapter 4 if further description is necessary AT Command Format AT commands are entered in Command mode using the following format TYPE ATXn Where X is the AT command and n is the specific value for that command PRESS Enter In Table 5 2 the value for X is listed in the AT Command column and the value for n is listed in the Description column 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 5 5 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems number is entered after the D command Any digit 0 9 or may be dialed as a DTMF tone Only the digits 0 9 can be dialed in Pulse Dial mode The following example shows how to dial through a PBX The dial string consists of the command string and the telephone number ATD9W5551234 Modifiers include the following parameters T Tone DTMF dial Any digit 0 9 or can be dialed as tone P Pulse dial Only digits 0 9 can be dialed in Pulse Dial mode NOTE Once a dialing method tone or pulse has been specified it will only remain active until the end of that dial string The modem defaults to the value set by the Dialer Type configuration option Pause Causes the modem to pause before processing the next character in the dial string The length of this pause is determined by the setting of the Pause Time configuration option refer to the Line Dialer configuration option group or by value held in S Register S8 Wait for dial tone The modem w
138. Data When enabled the modem receiver can train based upon the incoming data or a training sequence from the distant modem This function is necessary for a remote tributary modem in a V 29 multipoint network and is recommended for a control modem as well Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable Configure Edit Leased 93 V 29 Retrain When enabled the modem transmits a training sequence whenever it receives one This configuration option should normally be disabled for control modems Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable Configure Edit Leased S94 V29 Link Configuration Selects point to point or multipoint operation Register has the following values 0 PointToPoint 1 Multipoint The factory setting is PointToPoint Configure Edit Leased S95 Trellis Multipoint TMp Train Time Defines the length of time energy is sent from the tributary modem to the control modem More severe line conditions require longer time selections Register has the following values 0 10milliseconds 1 20milliseconds 2 50 milliseconds 3 100 milliseconds 4 200 milliseconds 5 300 milliseconds The factory setting is 0 10 milliseconds Configure Edit Leased 5 26 November 1996 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 5 3 12 of 12 392x
139. Device Type Peripheral End Peripheral Intermediate This configuration option only appears when V54 Address is enabled V 54 Device Type Identifies where the modem is physically located in the network Peripheral The modem is located at the endpoint of the network and is not connected back to back with another modem Intermediate The modem is either of the two modems connected back to back The AT command for Peripheral is S Register S54 0 The AT command for Intermediate is S Register S54 1 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 65 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Misc Singleport Mode lt The Miscellaneous configuration options determine specifics for various functions including network management parameters and remote modem access Table 4 14 shows each Misc Miscellaneous configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Table 4 14 1 of 3 Miscellaneous Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt StrapsWhenDisc No Change Nxt No Change Reload Straps When Disconnected Determines whether or not configuration options in the Active Saved configuration area are reloaded to Active Opera
140. Disable 4800 14 4K 9600 Disable Disable 4800 12 0K Disable Disable Disable 4800 9 6K Disable Disable Disable 4800 7 2K Disable Disable Disable 4800 4 8K Disable Disable Disable 4800 2 4K Disable Disable Disable Disable Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTEI 2 3 or 4 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED Use part number 835 1224 1011 10 feet part number 125 0040 0031 12 feet part number 835 1224 2511 25 feet part number 835 1224 5011 50 feet or an equivalent pin to pin 6 position 6 wire modular cord The maximum cable length is 50 feet 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 G 13 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Extended Diagnostics Figure G 7 shows a sample configuration for extended diagnostics Cable 3 Cable 6 Cable 1 DC Out B DC In Cable 2 Cable 2 Leased 3920Plus A mi Cable 1 Cable2 Cable2 DC Out Cable 1 DTE Sync Cable 1 DTE Syne Cable 1 Cable 2 Cable 2 494 14593 Figure G 7 Sample Configuration Extended Diagnostics Configuration Options 3920Plus A Use Sync Leased Answer default con
141. Disable Enable This configuration option is only available if Automatic Dial Standby is configured for 15min 1hr 4hr or Test 2min and Leased mode is configured for Originate mode or if Automatic Dial Standby is configured for Adv15min Adv30min Advthr or TestAdv 2min Special Standby Used to support Automatic Dial Standby configurations when a third modem is used for the dial backup When the leased line is restored the Special Standby configuration allows the leased line modems to return service to the original point to point modems NOTE When the modems are set for normal dial standby 15min 1hr 4hr or Test 2min the Special Standby configuration option allows the originate modem to test the lease connection in one direction before interrupting primary data on the dial lines NOTE When the modems are set for advanced dial standby Adv15min Adv 30min Adv1hr or Adv Test 2min the Special Standby configuration option allows a non interruptive algorithm to test the original point to point lease connection in both directions before interrupting primary data on the dial lines DialStandbyTime 10min Nxt 10min 5min 1min Dial Standby Time Selects the amount of time that a dial circuit is held after returning to the leased lines CarrierOn Level 43dbm Nxt 43dbm 26dbm Carrier On Level Controls the carrier detection threshold for leased lines When the power level of the receive carrier signal drops 2 dBm below this
142. Dumb mode amp M2 amp Q2 amp M231 amp M232 amp M233 amp M234 amp M235 amp M236 NOTE The only way to gain control of the modem is via the DCP amp Rn RTS Action Configure Edit amp RO Standard RS232 amp R1 Ignores RTS amp R2 Simulated Control Carrier amp R3 Control Carrier amp Sn DSR Control Configure Edit 850 Forced On DTE Interface amp S1 Standard RS232 amp S2 Wink When Disconnect amp 53 Follows DTR amp 54 On Early amp S5 Delay to Data 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 5 11 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems receive signal for synchronous data Pin 17 Table 5 2 7 of 9 392xPlus AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence amp Tests Test amp TO Abort Stops any test in progress amp T4 and amp T5 amp T1 Local Analog Loop Configure WEdit amp T2 Pattern Transmits and receives a 511 Bit Error Rate Test BERT Tests amp T3 Local Digital Loopback test amp T4 Enables Receive Remote Loopback Response configuration option amp T5 Disables Receive Remote Loopback Response configuration option amp T6 Remote Digital Loopback test amp T7 Remote Digital Loopback with Pattern amp T8 Local Loopback with Pattern amp T9 Self Test amp Vn View Configuration Options Displays each configuration group within the Active None Operating Active Saved Customer 1 and Customer 2 configuration areas as well as the telephone
143. ERE 3000 Series Carrier s shared diagnostic control panel SDCP Chapter 4 provides the information required to set configuration options in the 392xPlus modems using the modem s diagnostic control panel Chapter 5 provides instructions for using AT commands and S Registers Chapter 6 provides instructions for using the Dial Access Security feature Appendix A provides a menu tree for the 392xPlus modems Appendix B provides instructions for performing diagnostic tests when data communication problems occur Appendix C provides EIA 232 D and VF TELCO pin assignments Appendix D provides V 25bis dialing information Appendix E provides an ASCII translation chart Appendix F provides a list of all default configuration options available for the factory preset configurations Appendix G provides diagrams of sample configurations for the 392xPlus modems Appendix H provides an equipment list for the 392xPlus modems The Glossary provides a description of terms used throughout this manual 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 vii COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Related Documents 3000 A2 GA3 1 3610 A2 GZ45 3920 A2 GK41 3920 A2 GK40 COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual 3600 Hubbing Device Feature Number 3600 F 3 300 Installation Instructions COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Models 3920Plus and 3921 Plus Installation Instructions COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Model 3921Plus Ferrite Choke Installation Instructions
144. Entering Telephone Numbers and Dial Command Modifiers into Directory Locations The following example uses an empty directory location for describing how to enter a telephone number If you want to change an existing telephone number in any of the 24 directory locations follow the same procedures To add a telephone number to a directory location make the following selections Select Nxt until a blank directory appears on the LCD The cursor _ always appears in the first character position Select F2 f or F3 until the desired character is selected This can be an alpha or numeric character Press the gt key to move the cursor to the next character position Continue this key sequence until the dial command modifiers and telephone number are entered Refer to Table 3 9 for a list of valid dial command modifiers 01 9W5556789 t GS L8 85 To save the number just entered scroll to the next directory location by selecting Nxt The number is now stored in nonvolatile memory Table 3 9 describes what can be entered in directory locations 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 71 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 3 9 Valid Dial Command Modifiers T P NOTE Dial command modifiers are parameters entered in the dial command string which specify how when and what number to dial The following is a list of parameters the 392xPlus modems recog
145. Front Panel Om O SDU 3921 Plus 3921 Plus CARRIER SLOTS 1 16 E ie 496 14676 01 ten wb COMSPHERE 3000 o oo SY T STATUS KEYPAD LCD INDICATORS OK Alarm BckUp Test EC CGD PS P d ERROR NETWORK CORRECTION DEVICE ALARM TEST DIAL BACKUP MODE Figure 3 2 Optional SDCP and Model 3921 Plus Faceplates 3 4 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Table 3 1 1 of 2 392xPlus DCP LEDs Label Color Indicates Pwr green Power has been applied to the modem Alrm red Flashing A major alarm has been detected in a remote 392xP lus modem ON A major alarm has been detected in the local modem For Health and Status alarm conditions refer to Table 3 6 in the Device Health and Status section of this chapter Diag green The modem is receiving diagnostic communications either a command or a status poll 3920Plus only Test 142 yellow Flashing The modem is involved in a firmware upgrade Normal operation is not possible ON The modem is involved in a test Normal operation is not possible OFF The modem is not involved in a test or firmware upgrade Dial yellow Flashing The modem is attempting to establish a call over the dial network or the modem is in Dial Standby mode ON The modem has established a dial connection OFF A dial connection does not exist RI 125 green A ringing sign
146. IC is issued after 10 seconds INV is returned Program Normal PRN The Program Normal PRN command allows the DTE to enter and store a telephone number to a specific directory location PRN is similar to the AT amp Z command The PRN command format is PRNx n Where x is the directory location 1 24 n is the telephone number Request List of Delayed Numbers RLD The Request List of Delayed Numbers RLD command displays telephone numbers that are currently delayed as a result of failed call attempts All the numbers currently delayed are displayed irrespective of whether they belong to a directory location The RLD command format is RLD Request List of Forbidden Numbers RLF The Request List of Forbidden Numbers RLF command displays telephone numbers that are forbidden as a result of failed call attempts All the numbers forbidden are displayed irrespective of whether they belong to a directory location The RLF command format is RLF D 4 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 CCITT V 25bis Dialing Request List of Stored Numbers RLN The Request List of Stored Numbers RLN command displays telephone numbers stored in the modem s directory location If the RLN command is entered without specifying a directory location then all directory locations and telephone numbers appear If a directory location is entered then only that telephone number appears The RLN command format is RLN which displays all di
147. INAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION SUB MINIATURE 4 POSITION 4 CONDUCTOR PLUG FOR NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM OPERATION NOTE THE DIAL JACK IS ALSO USED FOR 2 WIRE LEASED BACKUP POWER SUPPLY T POWER CORD Figure 2 1 Model 3920P us Multiport Back Panel and Power Supply DTE Connection Use the following steps to connect an EIA 232 D cable from the modem to a DTE 1 Make sure the modem is powered OFF 2 Connect the DB 25 P plug connector on the cable to a DB 25 S socket connector Figure 2 1 on the modem s back panel labeled DTE 1 DTE 4 Use a small screwdriver to secure the cable to the modem 3 For each port connect the DB 25 P connector on the cable to the DB 25 S connector on the DTE Use a small screwdriver to secure the cable to the DTE s 2 4 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Modem Installation Power Supply Connection Use the following steps to connect the modem to an ac power outlet 1 Make sure the modem is powered OFF 2 Insert the power supply s 8 pin DIN connector into the modem s back panel dc power receptacle labeled PWR Figure 2 1 3 Connect the power cord to the power supply 4 Connect the power cord to a grounded ac power outlet Leased Line Connection Use the following steps to connect the leased line network interface 1 Insert the 8 position 8 conductor modular plug into the jack labe
148. ITION PLUG PIN NO ae eee a a MODEM waa LLL ELLE a LL EE LL EELS EEL Ba a 6 POSITION PLUG PIN NO uut TELEPHONE Qaa a ar ur ar gru a aan ar a a ur a E EE EE EEE tutt utut TTT 6 POSITION PLUG PIN NO annm nana m nut n nut un PHONE LINE al a a a UI at a a a ar al a an m ut ur n um at a uar am gar n a at n an LLL EL ELL ELE a at 493 14173 Figure C 2 Wiring Diagram Y Cable for External Telephone C4 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Pin Assignments Dak Cc For 2 wire leased line connections to a JM8 network interface use an 8 position to 6 position crossover cable Figure C 3 according to the following FCC requirements The RJ series of jacks should not be used for connecting data equipment to nonswitched private line networks specifically the service equivalents of the pre divestiture Series 3002 Category II Tariff 260 service There is a substantial difference in transmit levels permitted in the private line service and those permitted in the public switched network The industry standard is now an 8 keyed modular jack known as USOC 8 Bellcore Technical Reference TR EOP 000242 Issue 1 released May 1985 When ordering the installation of the USOC JMS specify the appropriate wiring options 2 wire o
149. Level menu press the 2 key This function allows the front panel EIA LEDs to display and change the activity of a selected digital interface Use the EIA LEDs function to change the port that controls the front panel LED Based on the modem s configuration the following conditions exist The CC or DC selection is not available if the Diagnostic Connector configuration option is disabled Refer to the Diag Connection configuration option in the Misc section of Chapter 4 e The CC or DC interface is not available on the 3921Plus modem The CC or DC activity is monitored on the SDU in the 3000 Series carrier e Ports 3 or 4 are not available in the DTE Bridge mode Ports 2 3 and 4 are available in TDM MSD mode To access LEDs from the Control branch make the following selections Control m aN EIA_LEDs 2 tm 2 gt Press the key until EIA LEDs appears Select LEDs EIA LEDs xxxxx gt A Ea Port2 A E The port field xxxxx displays the currently selected interface Valid interface selections are Port2 Port3 Port4 and depending on the set value of the Diagnostic Connection configuration option CC NMS Control Channel or DC Diagnostic Channel Refer to Diag Connection configuration option in the Misc section of Chapter 4 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 39 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Press the F1 key until
150. Modem A lt r nj gt The LCD displays the first sequence fault field Sequence fault fields range from 1 to 8 and are identified by a number in the upper right corner Press the gt key to view the remaining fields The message Modem O K appears if no sequence faults have occurred To remove sequence fault records from both the LCD and nonvolatile memory select Clear The message Modem O K appears To exit this function and remain in the Status branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the Zx key Service Log Service Log is a troubleshooting tool used in conjunction with support personnel Use this function to retrieve and report Service Log data to support personnel To access Service Log from the Status branch make the following selections Status A Borm lt a mJ Press the key until Service appears Select Service Log Service Log xx mm dd yy 22 Zx Em e 8 gt Support personnel will request the applicable information from this screen XX displays the Service Log number mm dd yy displays the date month day year 77 displays the Customer Support code number 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 3 29 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Select Nxt to scroll through the entries in the Service Log To exit this function and remain in the Status branch pre
151. Mp 2400 V22bis 14400 V33 12000 V33 9600 V29 7200 V29 4800 V29 4800 V27bis 2400 V27bis Leased Line Rate Determines the modem s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on leased lines NOTE Certain changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset 33600 31200 28800 V34 26400 V34 24000 V34 21600 V34 19200 V34 16800 V34 14400 V34 12000 V34 9600 V34 7200 V34 4800 V34 2400 V34 The modem operates using V 34 modulation at the data rate selected 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b The modem operates using V 32bis or V 32 terbo modulation at the data rate selected These modulation schemes are available on 2 wire or 4 wire leased lines 19200 TMp 14400 TMp 9600 TMp 7200 TMp 4800 TMp 2400 TMp The modem operates in Trellis Multipoint mode at the data rate selected These modulation schemes are available on 4 wire leased lines The 19200 TMp modulation does not appear on tributary modems NOTE TMp control modems can accept mixed inbound rates from tributary modems For example one inbound link may be configured for 14 4 kbps while another link experiencing line impairments may be configured for 9 6 kbps The following control tributary rate combinations are allowed control at 19 2 kbps tributaries at 14 4 or 9 6 kbps control at 14 4 kbps tributaries at 14 4 or 9 6 kbps control at 9 6 kbps tributaries at 9 6 or 7 2 kbps co
152. Mp Control Template default configuration options with the following B C D exception MSD Control Set Ports 1 2 3 and 4 to Enable G 20 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Sample Configurations Cables Cable 1 Cable 2 Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTF1 2 3 or 4 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 G 21 Equipment List H Feature Equipment Part Number Model 3920 Plus 3920 A1 XXX Model 3921 Plus 3921 B1 XXX 6 position 4 wire modular cord 7 foot length 125 0067 0031 8 position 8 wire modular cord 14 foot length 125 0053 1431 Universal Power Supply 327 0074 XXXX 3600 Hubbing Device 3600 F 3 300 EIA 323 D V 24 Crossover Cable 818 2759 0111 6 position 6 wire modular cord 125 0040 0031 8 position 8 wire modular cord 125 0053 1431 871A Adapter 002 0026 0031 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 Active Operating Active Saved ADp analog loop analog signal Answer mode ASCII asynchronous transmission AT command set AT prefix autobaud automatic answer automatic dial backup Glossary A configuration area containing configurati
153. Multipoint Control Mode 4 wire Originate is the factory default Autorate Enable Nxt Enable Disable Autorate Once connected the modem automatically lowers the line rate if line conditions become impaired When line conditions improve the modem automatically shifts up to the highest data rate the line can support This autorating only occurs between 19 200 bps and 4800 bps during V 32 V 32bis V 32 terbo connections and 33 6 to 2400 for V 34 4 24 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 4 2 of 3 Leased Line Configuration Options Multiport Mode x V32bis Override Disable Nxt Disable 2400 This configuration option is ignored unless Leased Line Rate is 4800 V32b V 32bis Override Activates the Paradyne Point to Point Diagnostic 2400 bps modulation Allows the modem to use a non standard point to point modulation capable of secondary channel diagnostics while running at 2400 bps NOTE This configuration option must be the same in both the local and remote modems Leased Tx Level 0 Nxt 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Leased Transmit Level Selects the modem s transmit power level over leased lines The transmit output level can be selected in 1 dBm decrements from 0 dBm to 15 dBm NOTE The leased TX level is limited to 1 dBm in all countries except North America NOTE The factory default setting is country dependent Default is 0 in North America
154. N31 30 DCP Operation DialDirectory 01 A Hook A mj The Call Setup status Off Hook appears during the connection process If the connection is successful the modem is online and one of the Normal Operation status messages Table 3 3 appears on the LCD If the connection is not successful the LCD displays one of the Call Failure status messages Table 3 3 Disconnect For dial backup applications use this function when you want to disconnect an established call on a dial line For leased backup applications use this function to switch between the primary leased line and the backup leased line To access Disconnect from the Call Setup branch make the following selection Call Setup gt ZN Dial Disconnect A o jJ Select Disconnect Disconnect CA comes A e 05 For dial backup applications the modem goes on hook hangs up and the call is disconnected The Command Complete status message appears To exit this function and remain in the Call Setup branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press 2 key 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 67 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Answer For dial backup applications Answer allows the modem to go off hook generate an answer tone and begin the handshaking process with the calling modem Use the Answer function when the Auto An
155. OTE If LSD Control is set to DTR DiscOff then the Action configuration option must be set to Stndrd RS232 The AT command for Forced On is amp CO The AT command for Standard RS232 is amp C1 The AT command for Wink When Disconnect is amp C2 The AT command for Follows DTR is amp C3 The AT command for Simulated Control Carrier is amp C4 The AT command for DTR Disconnect OFF is amp C5 Tx Clock Source Internal Nxt Internal External RXC Loop This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Sync Transmit Clock Source Determines the source of timing for synchronous data transmitted from the modem to the analog channel Internal The transmit data s clock source is derived from the modem s internal clock This clock is available as an output on Pin 15 TXC of the EIA 232 D interface External The transmit data s clock source is provided by the DTE on Pin 24 XTXC on the EIA 232 D interface Receive Clock Loop The modem s transmit clock is derived from its received analog signal The derived clock is available as an output on Pin 15 TXC of the EIA 232 D interface The AT command for Internal is amp XO The AT command for External is amp X1 The AT command for RXC Loop is amp X2 4 38 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 7 7 of 8 DTE Interface Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt Bakup Src Internal N
156. OTE This configuration option should only be used when the modem is located behind a user s Private Branch Exchange PBX For 3921 Plus modems the Make Busy Network Interface Modules NIMs must be installed on the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual The AT command is S Register S69 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 49 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Dial Line Singleport Mode lt The Dial Line configuration options are used to configure the modem for operation over dial lines Table 4 10 shows each Dial Line configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Table 4 10 1 of 3 Dial Line Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt Dial Modulation V34 Nxt V34 V32 Family V21 V22 Bell V23 Dial Modulation Modulation reduces the amount of scrolling necessary to select Dial Line rates by limiting the number of Dial Line Rate configuration options Only one group of Dial Line rates is displayed depending on the setting of the Dial Modulation configuration option V 34 V 32bis V 32 terbo V 21 V 22 V 23
157. P Configuration for additional information lt q Not applicable when MUX Mode is disabled 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 F 3 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table F 1 3 0f 10 _ Factory Default Configuration Options Confi ti Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial Default Default Default Default Default Default P Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Port EIA Sub group Cont d CTS Control Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Forced On lt q Wink When Standard RS232 Disc lt q RTS CTS Delay 0 0 0 0 4 0 4 0 LSD Control Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Standard Wink When Standard RS232 RS232 4 Disc lt q XTXC Clamps Enable Enable Enable Enable lt q Enable lt q Enable TXC e CT111 Control Disable Disable Disable Disable lt q Disable lt q Disable Rcv Remote Loop Enable Enable Enable Enable lt q Enable lt q Enable DTE RL CT140 Disable Disable Disable Disable lt q Disable lt q Disable DTE LL CT141 Disable Disable Disable Disable lt q Disable lt Disable Port Tx Clock Internal Internal Internal Internal lt q Internal lt q Internal Extend Main Ch Disable Disable Disable Disable lt q Disable lt q Disable Upstream Port 1 1 1 144 144 1 DTE Interface Singleport mode Async Sync Mode Sync Async Sync Async Async Sync Async DTE Rate 19200 tt 19200 19200 tt 19200 19200 19200 tt Asyn Data Bits 8tt 8
158. Plus S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence S96 Trellis Multipoint TMp Tx Preemphasis Provides amplification for Configure Edit frequencies above the carrier frequency to compensate for high frequency line Leased attenuation Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable S97 Reduced Asynchronous Buffer Size Register limits the modem s buffer size to Configure Edit a maximum of 20 characters V42 MNP Buffer Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable S98 Special Standby Supports automatic dial standby when a third modem is used Configure Edit for dial backup Leased Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 5 27 Dial Access Security Chapter 6 Dial Access Security is not available for viewing online because it contains security sensitive information Dial Access Security information is available in the COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Models 3920Plus and 3921Plus Installation and Operation Manual Document No 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 To order product documentation contact your sales representative 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 6 1 Overview Menu Tree d TORT A reset aie Bieta aes ag ig Gee eae I ha Ae eh os 1 Pages 2 3 provide a menu tree for the 392xPlus modems 3920 A2 GN31 30
159. Point amp TMp Train Time 50e 50e 50 50e 50e 50e TMp Tx Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Preemphasis LeaseLookback Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Dual Lease Line Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Backup Line Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Check Refer to Chapter 4 DCP Configuration for additional information Not applicable when MUX Mode is enabled F 8 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Default Configuration Options Table F 1 8 of 10 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial 9 DINH 9 Default Default Default Default Default Default Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings V 42 MNP Buffer X tt Error Control Mode Direct Direct Direct V 42 MNP Buffer V 42 MNP Buffer Direct V 42bis Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Compression MNP5 Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Compression EC Negotiate Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Buffer EC Fallback 013 013 013 013 013 013 Character Flow Control of CTS to DTE CTS to DTE CTS to DTE CTS to DTE CTS to DTE CTS to DTE DTE Flow Control of Modem XON XOFF Passthrough Modem to Modem Flow Control Break Buffer Control Send Break Control Buffer Disconnect Delay Maximum Frame Size Cellular Enhancement Reduced Async Buffe
160. Register S44 n where nis 1 14 400 V 32bis 14 7200 V 29 23 7200 TMp 32 19 200 V 34 2 12 000 V 32bis 15 4800 V 29 24 4800 TMp 33 16 800 V 34 3 9600 V 32bis 16 4800 V 27bis 25 2400 TMp 34 14 400 V 34 4 7200 V 32bis 17 2400 V 27bis 26 33 600 35 12 000 V 34 5 4800 V 32bis 18 19 200 V 32 terbo 27 31 200 36 9600 V 34 6 2400 V 22bis 19 16 800 V 32 terbo 28 28 800 V 34 37 7200 V 34 11 14 400 V 33 20 19 200 TMp 29 26 400 V 34 38 4800 V 34 12 12 000 V 33 21 14 400 TMp 30 24 000 V 34 39 2400 V 34 13 9600 V 29 22 9600 TMp 31 21 600 V 34 Leased Mode 4WLL Ans Nxt 4WLL Ans 4WLL Orig 2WLL Orig 2WLL Ans Leased Mode Sets the modem for either 2 wire or 4 wire operation in Answer mode receiving a call or 2 wire or 4 wire operation in Originate initiating a call mode NOTE For proper operation of V 32 modulations over leased lines one modem must be set to Originate mode and the other set to Answer mode For Sync Leased Answer Mode Async Leased Answer Mode and Trellis Multipoint Tributary Mode 4 wire Answer is the factory default For Sync Leased Originate Mode Async Leased Originate Mode and Trellis Multipoint Control Mode 4 wire Originate is the factory default The AT command for Disable is amp LO The AT command for 2 wire Originate is amp L1 The AT command for 4 wire Originate is amp L2 The AT comm
161. Sync 9600 DTE Sync 28800 V34 28800 V34 TX _ 1X Cable 2 Cable 2 Sync Cable 1 Syne Figure G 4 Sample Configuration Point to Point with Automatic Dial Backup November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Sample Configurations Configuration Options 3920Plus A 3920Plus B Sample Port Rate Table Cables Cable 1 Cable 2 Cable 4 Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following exception Auto Dial Back Set to Enable Rate Refer to Sample Port Rate Table in this section Use Sync Leased Originate default configuration options with the following exception Auto Dial Back Set to Enable Rate Refer to Sample Port Rate Table in this section Port Rate Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4 28 8K 9600 9600 4800 4800 24 0K 9600 Disable 4800 4800 19 2K 9600 Disable 4800 4800 16 8K 9600 Disable Disable 4800 14 4 9600 Disable Disable 4800 12 0K Disable Disable Disable 4800 9 6K Disable Disable Disable 4800 7 2K Disable Disable Disable 4800 4 8K Disable Disable Disable 4800 2 4K Disable Disable Disable Disable Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTEI Use part numb
162. T Command Mode Register determines how the modem responds to valid Configure WEdit and invalid AT commands DTE Dialer Register has the following values 0 Normal 1 No ERROR 2 No Strap or ERROR The factory setting is Normal 5 24 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 5 3 10 of 12 392xPlus S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence S85 Fast Disconnect Register allows the modem to disconnect immediately after Configure Edit receiving a disconnect command from a local DTE or its own diagnostic Line Dialer control panel Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable S88 Straps When Disconnected Register determines whether or not configuration Configure Edit options in the Active Saved configuration area are reloaded to Active Misc Operating when a disconnect occurs Register has the following values 0 or 231 No Change 1 or 232 Reload The factory setting is No Change S89 V 42 Automatic Request for Retransmission ARQ Window Size Increase Register allows the ARQ window size to be set to a value from six frames to fifteen frames For best performance this register should remain at its default setting of six frames ATS89 0 The only reason to change it is for satellite delays Register has the following values 0 six frames 1 seven frames 2 eight frames 3 nine frames 4 ten frames
163. The following sections discuss those V 25bis commands supported by the 392xPlus modems and the response to those commands Tables D 1 and D 2 list the V 25bis commands and response messages NOTE The 392xPlus modem must be configured for V 25bis dialing Refer to DTE Dialer Type configuration option in Chapter 4 DCP Configuration 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 D 1 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Call Request Commands Call Request commands are issued from the DTE to the modem and are responsible for initiating dial calls Call Request commands include Call Request with Number Provided CRN and Call Request with Stored Memory Address Provided CRS Call Request with Number Provided CRN The CRN command dials the telephone number entered from the DTE CRN is similar to the ATD command The CRN command format is CRNn Where n is the telephone number to be dialed Call Request with Stored Memory Address Provided CRS The CRS command dials the telephone number stored in the request directory location CRS is similar to the ATDS command The CRS command format is CRSx Where x is directory location 1 24 The modem responds to the command with either a VAL valid or INV invalid response followed by a call progress report such as connect CNX or failure CFI Call Response A Call Response indicates if the command was accepted by the modem Call Response includes Call Failure Indication CFI and Cal
164. The guard DTE Dialer time prevents the modem from interpreting data as the escape sequence characters Enter a value from 0 255 in 20 millisecond increments The factory setting of 50 equals 1000 milliseconds or one second S14 Asymmetric Rate Mode Register determines whether VF rates for transmitting Configure XEditDi and receiving are identical when using V 34 modulation on a dial line The al Line factory setting is Enable 15 Asymmetric Rate Mode Register determines whether VF rates for transmitting Configure VEditV and receiving are identical when using V 34 modulation on a leased line The Leased Line factory setting is Enable 518 Test Time out Register sets the duration in seconds for the modem tests Configure Edit This automatically cancels any test in progress after the time of this register Tests expires Any test can be manually canceled by issuing the escape sequence followed by the amp TO command Enter a value from 0 255 seconds A value of 0 disables this register The factory setting is Disable 0 S26 RTS to CTS Delay Register sets the length of time in 10 millisecond Configure WEdit increments the modem waits after receiving RTS before issuing CTS to the DTE Interface DTE Enter a value from 0 255 The factory setting is O S40 Auto Make Busy Register determines if the modem goes off hook under Configure WEdit certain conditions This register should only be enabled when the modem is Line Dialer lo
165. This type of addressing should be used for extended data circuits tail circuits Disable This is used for normal point to point leased line and dial networks Address Values 01 03 05 07 09 OB OD OF 11 13 15 17 19 1B 1D 1F 25 27 2B 2D 2F 33 35 37 3B 3D 55 57 5B 5F 6F 77 or 7F This configuration option selects the address of a modem that is to be placed into a loopback test This configuration option is used for more complex networks where multiple modems used in extended data circuits tail circuits can be commanded to loopback The AT command for Disable is S Register 5320 The AT command for V 54 Address is S Register S53 n where n is a value from 1 to 34 V54 Device Type Peripheral End Peripheral Intermediate This configuration option only appears when V54 Address is enabled V 54 Device Type Identifies where the modem is physically located in the network Peripheral The modem is located at the endpoint of the network and is not connected back to back with another modem Intermediate The modem is either of the two modems connected back to back The AT command for Peripheral is S Register S54 0 The AT command for Intermediate is S Register S54 1 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 27 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Misc Multiport x The Miscellaneous configuration options determine specifics for various functions including network management paramete
166. Timeout configuration option A ringback signal was detected Trunk Busy The modem is receiving a fast trunk busy Wrong Call The call was answered but not by a modem No answer tone T The Delayed Number and Forbidden Number messages appear only in countries where the number of repeat call attempts are restricted The regulations vary in each country If the number is delayed the value of the delay in minutes can be displayed by entering Directory Status see Call Setup Branch Tt The Line Occupied message appears only in countries where the Offhook Detector is enabled The purpose of the Offhook Detector is to detect whether the telephone associated with the modem is off hook It is enabled on a per country basis and this setting can not be changed by a command The Offhook Detector is enabled in Austria Germany and Switzerland 3 12 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Table 3 3 3 of 3 Top Level Menu Status Status Message Indicates Call Disconnect ATH Disconnect The modem has disconnected due to an ATH command Bad Lines Disc The modem has disconnected because the lines do not support the modulation and or data rate selected No Carrier Disc The modem disconnects due to the loss of carrier signal from the remote modem DTR Disconnect The modem has disconnected due to the loss of DTR from the DTE EC Disconnect The modem has disconnected due to f
167. abeled on the equipment The Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all devices does not exceed 100 If your equipment is in need of repair refer to the procedure in the Government Requirements and Equipment Return section 1 12 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Introduction Technical Specifications Table 1 2 shows the technical specifications for the 392xPlus modems Table 1 2 1 of 2 Technical Specifications for 392x Pius Modems Specifications Description APPROVALS Model 3920Plus 3921 Plus and COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Refer to the product labeling or contact your service representative COMPATIBILITY Leased Line Modulations Paradyne V 34 33 600 31 200 bps CCITT V 34 28 800 26 400 24 000 21 600 19 200 16 800 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps Paradyne V 32 terbo 19 200 16 800 bps CCITT V 32bis 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 4800 bps CCITT V 32 9600 4800 bps Paradyne Trellis Multipoint 19 200 14 400 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps CCITT V 22bis 2400 bps CCITT V 27bis 4800 2400 bps CCITT V 33 14 400 12 000 bps CCITT V 29 9600 7200 4800 bps Paradyne Point to Point Diagnostic
168. able or 19200 to 1200 The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 19 200 bps Rate at 16 8 K Nxt Disable 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 Rate at 16 8K When the modem rate is 16 800 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option Disable or 16800 to 1200 The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 16 800 bps Rate at 14 4 K Nxt Disable 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 Rate at 14 4K When the modem rate is 14 400 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option Disable or 14400 to 1200 The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 14 400 bps Rate at 12 0 K Nxt Disable 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 Rate at 12 0K When the modem rate is 12 000 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option Disable or 12000 to 1200 The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 12 000 bps Rate at 9600 Nxt Disable 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 Rate at 9600 When the modem rate is 9600 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option Disable or 9600 to 1200 The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 9600 bps 4 12 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 1 4 of 9 DTE Interface Configuration Options Multiport Mode x Rate at 7200 Nxt Disable 7200 4800 2400 1200 Rate at 7200 When the modem rate is 7200 bps the port rate will be as
169. able for the secondary channel NOTE When initiating a Remote function from a TMp tributary modem primary channel operation is not available Also if the tributary modem is not on the control modem s poll list the error message No Trib Session appears when the function is executed To access the Remote branch make the following selections Leased 28 8 lt A Security Remote A a e an gt Press the key until Remote appears Select Remote NOTE If a connection is not established between a local 3900 Series modem and a remote 3900 Series modem the LCD displays Remote Mode Fail No Circuit Return to the Top Level menu For Trellis Multipoint TMp control modems you must specify the network management address of a tributary modem The following display does not appear in point to point or Trellis Multipoint tributary modems Choose Address A TXXx ES rs gt The address field xxx displays the network management address of the modem to be accessed by the Remote function The valid address field range is from 001 to 256 To increment digits within the address field xxx use the lt 1 gt keys to position the cursor _ under the digit to be incremented Press the F2 1 key to increment the digit Press Enter Ent to select the modem that will be accessed by the Remote function 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 Novemb
170. access the Test branch from the Top Level menu make the following selections Leased 28 8 A Control Test It Gy Press the key until Test appears Select Test Abort ends any test that is in progress and brings the modem back to the normal mode of operation Confirmation is provided by the Command Complete message To access Abort from the Test branch make the following selection Test CA mi A Ee gt Select Abort Test Abort A Command Complete A lt The modem stops all tests currently in progress and displays the Command Complete status message on the LCD To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 3 55 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Self Self performs an internal self test of the modem which takes less than a minute to complete The modem must be offline otherwise Invalid Command appears WARNING When this test is run in Remote mode it causes the Remote mode session to be lost The Remote mode session will reestablish after the self test completes usually one or two minutes If the remote self test fails a Device Failure alarm message appears when the remote modem s Device Health and Status DeviceHS branch is accessed To access Self from the Test branch ma
171. ack to lease line operation while still maintaining the dial line connection A series of characters that consists of numbers and modifiers used to dial a telephone number Provides the capability of dial backup in a multipoint configuration by bridging the signal on the digital side of the front end panel Nonvolatile memory that stores up to ten telephone numbers Each directory location can have up to 40 characters entered Canadian Department of Communication A process that transfers modem firmware from a locally attached PC to a modem or allows the cloning of firmware from a local modem to a remote modem A device connected farther from the host computer The equipment Data Terminal Equipment such as a computer or terminal that provides data in the form of digital signals A temporary work area used to view and change configuration options from the DCP The edit area can be loaded from one of five configuration option areas Active Operating Active Saved Customer 1 Customer 2 or Factory Glossary 4 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Glossary EIA EIA 232 D EIA RS 366 A error control escape sequence extended circuit extended network extended result codes fallback FCC FEC FEP full duplex function key half duplex handshaking HDLC host Hz Electronic Industries Association This organization provides standards for the data communications industry An Elect
172. ad Figure 3 3 LCD TOP LINE HIDDEN CHOICE INDICATOR UP ONE RETURNS LEVEL FROM z CURRENT Leased 28 8 DEUM DISPLAY Status Configure MENU LEFT RIGHT SCROLL KEY SCROLL FUNCTION KEYS LCD BOTTOM LINE Figure 3 3 392xPlus LCD and Keypad LCD Display The LCD consists of a top line and bottom line with each displaying a maximum of 16 characters at a time If more information is available on the LCD than what is currently displayed a hidden choice indicator lt or gt appears in the upper right hand corner of the LCD Use the or key to scroll in the indicated direction to display more selections onto the LCD Hidden Choice Indicators The Hidden Choice Indicators serve as an alert that other selections are available besides what is currently displayed on the LCD These indicators appear as one of the following symbols Right Scroll Indicator gt The right scroll indicator appears when more choices are available to the right of what is currently displayed on the LCD Left Right Scroll Indicator The left right scroll indicator appears when more choices are available to the left and right of what is currently displayed on the LCD Left Scroll Indicator The left scroll indicator appears when more choices are available to the left of what is currently displayed on the LCD 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 7 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Other Indicators Keypad Other indica
173. ailure to negotiate Error Control mode Inv Rate Disc When using V 32bis modulation the remote modem does not support the data rate used by the local modem LnCurrnt Disc The modem has disconnected due to the loss of line current LongSpace Disc The modem has disconnected due to the detection of a long space NoData Disc The modem has disconnected due to a lack of transmitted and received data Disconnecting The modem has begun the disconnect sequence RmtCmnded Disc The modem has disconnected due to a V 32 Cleardown received from the remote modem Talk Mode The modem is in Talk mode Firmware DownldOnly A local download of firmware or a remote cloning of firmware has failed Download Result Mode The modem is currently in a Download Only mode in which only another download attempt is possible Frmware A local download of firmware or a remote cloning of firmware was Upgrade successful RemClone Failed A remote cloning of firmware has failed This message appears on the local modem s LCD Remote Clone OK A remote cloning of firmware was successful This message appears on the local modem s LCD Bcast Clone A broadcast cloning of firmware is complete Look under the Control branch Done for multipoint cloning results This message appears on the local modem s LCD AT Command Reset by AT The modem has performed a reset in response to an ATZ command Reset command
174. aits for a second dial tone before processing the dial string This can be the initial dial tone or can be used when dialing through a tandem PBX For example QW 555 6789 R Reverse Dial mode Causes the originating modem to send out an answertone once it no longer detects ringback Ringback is the ring you hear at the originating site when making a call The R parameter must be the last character in the dial string For correct operation at least one ringback must be detected therefore the remote modem should be configured to answer on the second ring or subsequent rings Quiet answer Wait for five seconds of silence after dialing the number If the silence is not detected the modem sends either a NO ANSWER result to the DTE Hook flash This causes the modem to go on hook for 0 5 seconds then return to off hook Return to Command mode Modem returns to Command mode after dialing a number without disconnecting the call Space Ignored by the dial string can be included to enhance readability Ignored by the dial string can be included to enhance readability Ignored by the dial string can be included to enhance readability Ignored by the dial string can be included to enhance readability Table 5 2 1 of 9 392xPlus AT Commands AT DCP LCD Commarid Description Command Sequence A Repeat Last Command Reexecutes last command string Not to be preceded Call Setup with AT or fol
175. ake effect after a disconnect Table 4 12 shows each V 42 MNP Buffer configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Async Dial factory default setting shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix Table 4 12 1 of 6 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt Err Contr Mode V42 MNPorBfr Nxt V42 MNPorBfr V42 MNPorDsc MNP or Buffr MNP or Disc BufferMode DirectMode or Disc LAPM or Bufr This configuration option only appears if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Error Control Mode Determines the type of error control used by the modem In most cases V42 MNPorBfr is the best choice If V 42bis and MNP are enabled then the modem uses the following priority for error control negotiation V 42bis V 42 MNP 5 and below Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs V 42 MNP or Buffer Modem attempts to connect in V 42 Error Control mode using V 42 Link Access Procedure for Modems protocol If this fails the modem attempts to connect in MNP mode If this fails the modem connects in Buffer mode and continues operation This is also known as V42 MNP Autoreliable Mode V 42 MNP or Disconnect Modem attempts to connect in V 42 Error Control mode using V 42 LAPM protocol If this fails the modem at
176. al is being received 3921Plus only Busy yellow The modem is placed in a forced busy condition and is off hook 3921Plus only Serv yellow The modem s dial line is connected to the carrier service line rather than the normally 3921Plus assigned dial network only SQ yellow The receive telephone line signal is degraded or the modem s data path has been blocked SQ flashes Rate yellow ON The modem is connected at a data rate lower than the data rate it is configured for OFF The modem is connected at its configured data rate only Front Panel yellow The modem is connected to the carrier s SDCP 3921Plus only 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 5 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 3 1 2 of 2 392xPlus DCP LEDs Label Color Indicates Port 1 2 3 4 green ON The selected port is one of the mux ports either 1 2 3 or 4 3921Plus OFF The port is not selected multiport only TXD 103 green The modem is receiving data from the selected port to transmit ON equals space RXD 104 green Data is being transferred to the selected port ON equals space RTS 105 green RTS signal is ON for the selected port CTS 106 green CTS signal is ON for the selected port DSR 107 green DSR signal is ON for the selected port 3921Plus only DTR 108 green The selected port has turned ON DTR LSD 109 green The modem has detected a valid carrier signal and is capab
177. alling the modem 2 Atthe front of the carrier hold the modem vertically with the latch on its faceplate in the open position and insert it into the top and bottom card guides of one of the slots numbered 1 15 Figure 2 3 Slide the modem into the slot aligning the modem with the connector plates until the backplane connector and DTE connector seat firmly into the back of the carrier The faceplate latch automatically closes as you push the modem into the carrier To lock the modem into the carrier press the faceplate latch until a click is heard 3 If the carrier is ON the Power LED on the faceplate of the Model 3921Plus lights After several seconds the modem completes its power up self test in which all faceplate LEDs light Return to the back of the carrier and tighten the connector plate s MULTIPORT SINGLEPORT BACK BACK CONNECTOR PLATES CONNECTOR PLATE EIA232N 24 CONNECTOR OOOO0O000000000 EIA232 V 24 3800 FUTURE USE I o D e o iD e gt RS366A V 25 69 69 69 o9 69 69 69 o9 495 14696 Figure 2 2 Modem s Back Connector Plates 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 2 7 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems
178. an be performed automatically upon loss of the primary leased line and automatic dial standby also can be used to automatically return the modems to the primary leased line when restored When you use backup functions while in Multiport mode the modem s automode feature is forced to Disable This ensures that the mux is not accidentally disabled by answering a call which is using modulation where Multiport mode is not supported It is important that both modems participating in the backup are in Multiport mode with the same dial line modulation 1 10 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Introduction Government Requirements and Equipment Return Certain governments require that instructions pertaining to modem connection to the public switched telephone network be included in the installation and operation manual Specific instructions are listed in the following sections United States NOTICE TO USERS OF THE PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK 1 This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment The label is located on the bottom of the Model 3920Plus modem and on the modem s circuit card assembly on the Model 3921Plus If requested this information must be provided to the telephone company 2 Page A of this manual contains the Universal Service Order Codes USOC associated with
179. an equivalent customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 crossover cable with DB 25 P plug connectors on both ends to attach to the modems See Appendix C for pin assignments Use part number 125 0040 0031 a 6 position 6 wire modular cord Attach this to the CCIN DCOUT port of the 3600 Hubbing device Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord Attach this to the CCIN DCOUT port of one 3600 Hubbing device and to the CCOUT DCIN port of the second device Use part number 002 0026 0031 Feature number 4400 F1 590 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 G 15 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Digital Bridging 19200 TMp Figure G 8 shows a sample for Digital Bridging Cable 1 Addr 1 Addr 2 Addr 3 Addr 4 Addr 5 Could be 3920Plus or 3910 495 1 4612a Cable 1 Figure G 8 Sample Configuration Digital Bridge 3920Plus Use TMp Control Template default configuration options with the following exception MUX Mode Set to DTE Bridge 3920Plus Use Sync Dial template default configuration options with the following B C exceptions MUX Mode Set to DTE Bridge NetworkPosition Set to Control Diag Connection Set to NMS CC Tx Clock Source Set to Port 1 LSD Control Set to Sim Cntl Car DTR Action Set to Ignore 3910Plus D Use Sync Dial template default configuration options with the following exceptions NetworkPosition Set to Control Diag Connection Set to NMS CC Tx Clo
180. and a Remote Digital Loop DSR is ON Forced On Forces DSR output ON constantly This is usually used for leased line applications and when the DTE requires DSR to always be ON Wink When Disconnect DSR is normally forced ON but is turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect Follows DTR When the modem receives DTR from the DTE it sends DSR to the DTE On Early DSR is low when the modem is in the idle state DSR goes high immediately upon a command to enter Data mode This setting is required for some modem pooling applications Delay to Data Operation is similar to the Standard RS232 except that DSR does not turn ON until the modem enters Data mode Normally the modem raises DSR when it begins the handshaking process Use this setting when the DTE cannot operate with a long DSR to CTS delay common for V 32bis modulation 4 14 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 1 6 of 9 DTE Interface Configuration Options Multiport Mode x RTS Action Stndrd RS232 Nxt Stndrd RS232 Ignore Sim Cntl Car Request to Send Action RTS is a signal from the DTE indicating the DTE has data to send Standard RS232 Allows the DTE to control RTS to the modem in normal EIA 232 D operation RTS must be ON for the DTE to transmit to the modem Ignore Modem assumes RTS is always ON Use this selection when the DTE does not provide RTS to the modem Simulated Control Carrier RTS inp
181. and dialing when used in an asynchronous application This is the only valid setting for leased line applications The modem will not respond to AT commands if DTE Dialer Type is not set to AT V 25bis Async Selects V 25bis Async as the dialing method and protocol used by the modem The character length must be 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit V 25bis Bisync Selects V 25bis Bisync as the dialing method and protocol used by the modem This is also known as character oriented protocol This framing protocol uses two synchronous control characters and a start of text control character before the text block and an end of text control character after the text block The correct character structure for V 25bis Bisync dialing is 7 data bits Odd parity and 1 stop bit If the modem is in Asynchronous mode enter the following command string to configure it for V 25bis Bisync dialing AT amp F amp D1 amp S1 amp M233 amp W If the modem is already configured for synchronous operation perform the following to set the character format 1 use the modems front panel to access the Async Sync Mode configuration option and set it to Async 2 scroll down until the Asyn Data Bits configuration option appears and set it to 7 data bits 3 scroll down and set the Asyn Parity Bit configuration option to Odd 4 scroll through the DTE Interface group until the Async Sync Mode configuration option appears and set it to Sync 5 move up one level in the
182. and for 2 wire Answer is amp L3 The AT command for 4 wire Answer is amp L4 Autorate Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option only appears when Leased Line Rate is configured for V 34 and V 32 families data rate Autorate Once connected the modem automatically lowers the line rate if line conditions become impaired When line conditions improve the modem automatically shifts up to the highest data rate the line can support This autorating only occurs between 19 200 bps and 4800 bps during V 32 V 32bis and V 32 terbo connections and 33 6 and 2400 for V 34 The AT command is S Register S82 n where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable V32bis Override Disable Nxt Disable 2400 This configuration option is ignored unless Leased Line Rate is 4800 V32b V 32bis 4800 Override Activates the Paradyne Point to Point Diagnostic 2400 bps modulation Allows the modem to use a non standard point to point modulation capable of secondary channel diagnostics while running at 2400 bps 4 54 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 11 3 of 5 Leased Line Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt Leased Tx Level 0 Nxt 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Leased Transmit Level Selects the modem s transmit power level over leased lines The transmit output level can be selected in 1 dBm decrements from 0 dBm to 15 dBm NOTE The leased TX level is limited to 1
183. and remove the 392xPlus modems and how to select a factory preset configuration using the DCP 392xPlus Modem Package After opening the modem s package check for damage and verify that the following items are present For the standalone models e Installation instructions e Model 3920Plus modem e Power supply with power cord e One 6 position 4 wire modular cord e One 8 position 8 wire modular cord 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems For the carrier mounted models e Installation instructions e Model 3921Plus modem e One singleport or two multiport connector plates with two DB 25 S edge card connectors on each plate If any hardware components are damaged notify your service representative Return equipment using the procedures described in the Government Requirements and Equipment Return section of Chapter 1 Customer Supplied Equipment The following customer supplied equipment is required to complete a data communications system using the Model 3920Plus modem e One singleport or four multiport DTEs with available EIA 232 D serial port s e Standard EJA 232 D cables with one singleport or four multiport DB 25 P connectors at one end to attach to the modem e One or more of the following modular leased or dial network interfaces 8 for leased line configurations RJ11C for dial permissive configurations One 8 position 8 wire modular cord for leased backup pu
184. anel SDCP The shared diagnostic control panel SDCP Figure 3 2 is used to manage carrier mounted Model 3921Plus modems The faceplate of the Model 3921Plus contains LED status indicators that monitor the operation of the modem After the SDCP is connected to the modem the Front Panel indicator of the selected modem lights to show that the modem is connected Status Indicators The 392xPlus modem status indicators continuously provide information on the modem s operating condition All of the status indicators on the Model 3920Plus appear on the DCP Figure 3 1 whereas the status indicators for the carrier mounted Model 3921Plus are located on the Model 3921Plus modem s faceplate and the SDCP faceplate Figure 3 2 The standalone Model 3920Plus modem s DCP has 13 light emitting diodes LEDs and the carrier mounted Model 3921Plus has 20 LEDs These LEDs are listed and described in Table 3 1 LEDs specific to one model type have the appropriate model number shown in the table 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 3 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems SINGLEPORT MULTIPORT Status Status Status OK Pwr Pwr Alrm Alrm Alrm Diag Q In 142 Q Test 142 Q Test Diag Out Dial Dial 125 125 Q RI Busy Busy Serv Serv Osa Osa 1 00 3 Port 20 103 103 104 RXD 104 LIRXD 105 EJ RTS 105 EJ RTS 106 LICTS 106 LICTS 107 DSR 107 DSR 108 LIDTR 108 LIDTR 109 ULSD 109 ULSD Front Panel
185. approximately 1 watt at high volume DIMENSIONS Weight Height Width Depth 2 5 pounds 1 14 kg Model 3920Plus without power supply 1 0 pounds 0 45 kg Model 3921 Plus 2 1 inches 5 4 cm Model 3920Plus 7 1 inches 18 1 cm Model 3921 Plus Singleport 7 6 inches 19 4 cm Model 3920Plus 0 9 inches 2 3 cm Model 3921 Plus Multiport 7 6 inches 19 4 cm Model 3920Plus 1 8 inches 4 6 cm Model 3921 Plus 12 1 inches 30 8 cm Model 3920Plus 13 4 inches 34 0 cm Model 3921 Plus TRANSMIT LEVEL Leased Line North America Leased Line All Other Countries Dial Line North America Dial Line All Other Countries 0 through 15 dBm in 1 dBm decrements Factory default is 0 dBm 1 through 15 dBm in 1 dBm decrements Factory default is country dependent 10 through 32 dBm in 1 dBm decrements Factory default is Permissive 9 dBm Level setting is not accessible to the user Factory default is country dependent TELEPHONE INTERFACE Leased Line Connectivity Dial Line Connectivity JM8 Model 3920Plus 50 pin mass termination Model 3921 Plus RJ11C Permissive RJ21X Permissive 50 pin connector Model 3921 Plus DATA RATES Leased Line 33 600 31 200 28 800 26 400 24 000 21 600 19 200 16 800 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps Dial Line 33 600 31 200 28 800 26 400 24 000 21 600 19 200 16 800 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 600 300 b
186. apter 4 must be set to Disable This configuration option does not appear on Models 3920 1 401 411 and 3921 B1 001 011 If you are originating a call using a telephone and the remote modem is configured for Auto Answer perform the following procedure Idle 28 8 A Tlk Data r nj gt Press key until Tlk Data appears Lift the attached handset and dial the telephone number of the remote modem When the remote modem answers it transmits an answer tone Idle 28 8 ra A TIk Data A When you hear this tone immediately select Tlk Data and hang up the handset This starts the handshaking sequence between your modem and the remote modem Online 28 8 gt A Call_Setup 2 lt nj If this is successful the modems are in Data mode and OnLine appears on the LCD 3 74 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Manual Dialing When the Remote Modem is Configured for Manual Answer NOTE On both modems the Line Current Disconnect configuration option refer to the Line Dialer section in Chapter 4 must be set to Disable If you are originating a call using a telephone and the remote modem is configured for Manual Answer perform the following procedure Once the remote telephone is answered by the remote user you must both decide when to place the modems into Data mode You must both select Tlk Data at approximat
187. ary TDM TMp Top Level menu training trellis coded modulation tributary modem UL UNIX Dial upstream modem USOC V 22 V 22bis V 27bis V 29 V 32 V 32bis V 32 terbo V 34 V 42 V 42bis V 54 Time Division Multiplexer A device that enables the simultaneous transmission of multiple independent data streams into a single high speed data stream by simultaneously sampling the independent data streams and combining these samples to form the high speed stream Trellis Multipoint Paradyne s proprietary high speed fast poll multipoint modulation scheme The very top of the menu tree that displays modem status and all Top Level menu branches A process where two modems try to establish a connection over the VF line A modulation scheme developed by Paradyne which uses Forward Error Correction for multipoint and high speed point to point applications Tributary modems in a network receive data from the control modem as well as from the network management system in the network Underwriter s Laboratories Inc A factory preset configuration area containing the configuration options most often used in a UNIX dial network A device connected closer to the host computer Universal Service Ordering Codes A CCITT standard for modems operating full duplex over dial networks at 1200 bps A CCITT standard for modems operating full duplex over leased lines or dial networks at 2400 bps A CCITT
188. ased Answer Leased Originate or Dial and the modulation scheme used by the modem 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 Glossary 7 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems register Remote remote loopback result code Return to Dial RJ11 RJ21 SDCP SDU secondary channel Select key serial transmission Singleport mode S Registers SubHS synchronous transmission A part of the modem s memory that contains values that determine the modem s operating characteristics A branch of the Top Level menu that permits access to the DCP of another modem A test that sends a signal to the remote modem to test the local modem the remote modem and the circuit between them An asynchronous message in either numbers or words that the modem sends to the DTE after executing or trying to execute a command A function available when in Dial Backup mode that allows the modem to switch to dial line operation when currently on leased lines A type of 6 position jack normally used with permissive dial networks and telephone sets A type of 50 position jack normally used with permissive dial networks providing the appropriate conductors for up to eight telephone lines Shared Diagnostic Control Panel An optional user interface that attaches to the front of a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Its functionality is very similar to that of the DCP Installed in one COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier it controls and monitors modems in
189. ates the basic operational characteristics of the modem Leased 28 8 Ft A A ED a re 8 gt The modem s Quick Configuration information appears on the LCD s bottom line To access the Quick Configuration display from the Top Level display press the lt 1 key Based on the configuration of the modem one of two screens appear If the modem is not operating with V 34 modulation the following screen appears Leased 19 2 gt A E A ey e po 2 If the modem is operating with V 34 modulation the following screen appears XXXX yyyyy ZZ gt A o cdd ee ffff 2 L8 L8 The V 34 modulation Quick Configuration information appears on the LCD s top line NOTE In Dial mode where Automode automatically adapts to the modulation scheme of the remote modem the V 34 Quick Configuration display may not necessarily indicate the actual V 34 online modulation For more information on V 34 refer to the V 34 section in this chapter 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 15 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems The following provides information about the Quick Configuration LCD display a Displays the network position of the modem The letter C indicates this is a control modem and T indicates this is a tributary modem bbb Displays the network management address of the modem The valid address field range is from 001 to 256 c D
190. ations in order to maintain uninterrupted service 7 The user is not authorized to repair or modify the equipment 8 This equipment cannot be used on public coin service provided by the telephone company Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 1 11 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Canada 9 If you experience trouble with this equipment please contact your sales or service representative as appropriate for repair or warranty information If the product needs to be returned to the company service center for repair contact them directly for return instructions using one of the following methods e Via the Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at http www paradyne com Via Telephone Call our automated call system to receive current information via fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 International call 727 530 2340 If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved NOTICE TO THE USERS OF THE CANADIAN PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecom
191. ber 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Top Level Menu Status and Operational Messages Access to all menu tree branches from the DCP begins at the Top Level menu the head of the menu hierarchy The LCD s top line identifies the modem status as listed in Table 3 3 while the bottom line displays the main menu tree branches as well as operational and security messages as listed in Table 3 4 and Table 3 5 Table 3 3 1 of 3 Top Level Menu Status Status Message Indicates Normal Operation Leased MR The modem is operating on leased lines and receiving at the displayed data rate Idle MR The modem is configured for dial network operation and is on hook OnLine MR EC The modem is online in Data mode and operating at the displayed data rate EC error control appears if error control is operational Ring Indicate The local modem is receiving an incoming ring Test MR The modem is in test mode operating at the displayed data rate Alarm Make Busy The modem is in a Make Busy condition Power On Fail The modem has failed its Power On Self test SelfHealth Fail A failure has occurred in the modem s hardware components Call Setup Off Hook The modem is off hook and waiting to dial a telephone number Dialing The originating modem is dialing a telephone number Remote Ring The remote modem is ringing Training The modem is training or retraining EC Negotiating The local an
192. ble Enable Enable Enable Enable Autorate Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable V32bis Override Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Dial Tx Level Permissive Permissive Permissive Permissive Permissive Permissive 9 dBm 9 dBm 9 dBm 9 dBm 9 dBm 9 dBm V 22bis Guard Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Tone x Train Time Long Long Long Long Long Long Asymmetric Disable Disable Disable Enable Enable Disable Rate Lease Line Lease Modulation V 34 V 34 TMp V 34 V 34 V 34 28800 V34 Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable 10 e 43 dBm Refer to Chapter 4 DCP Configuration for additional information Not applicable when MUX Mode is enabled 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table F 1 70f10 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial Gallon 9 Default Default Default Default Default Default Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Lease Line Cont d V 27bis Train x Short Short Short Short Short Short V 29 Train On Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Data V 29 Retrain 6 Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable V 29 Link Point To Point Point To Point Point To Point Point To Point To Point To Configuration gt lt Point Point
193. c Control Panel Access This chapter describes how to use the diagnostic control panel DCP of the 392xPlus modem It also describes how to select and use each branch of the Top Level menu tree Diagnostic Control Panels There are two types of diagnostic control panels DCP the DCP on the standalone Model 3920Plus modems and the shared diagnostic control panel SDCP an optional feature used with the Model 3921Plus installed into COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Both DCPs have a two line 32 character liquid crystal display LCD and keypad through which Top Level menu branches are accessed to perform the following Check modem status Set up configuration options Initiate diagnostic tests Initiate and disconnect dial operations Access remote modems through the local modem s DCP The LCD displays the result of any command initiated using the DCP 3 2 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Model 3920Plus Diagnostic Control Panel The diagnostic control panel DCP of the Model 3920Plus modem Figure 3 1 contains status indicators pushbutton type keys an LCD and speaker grill ci Ja EB ES EB a PWR ALRM DIAG DTR RTS CTS TXD LSD SQ TEST RATE DIAL COMSPHERE 3920Plus 0 108 105 1066 103 109 104 142 496 14412 02 Figure 3 1 Model 3920Plus DCP Model 3921 Plus Faceplate and Shared Diagnostic Control P
194. call In a dial network it is the modem that makes the call In a leased line network it is one of two sides of the network that is selected to be the originating modem A way of checking data accuracy by counting the number of bits that have a value of one Telephone switching equipment Private Branch Exchange dedicated to one customer A PBX connects private telephones to each other and to the public dial network A dial modem operating mode characterized by a fixed output power level of 9 dBm A rapid or repeated shifting of the relative phase of a signal resulting in unwanted distortion The diagnostic address of a control modem derived from its location in the carrier its carrier and slot number A line or circuit connecting two stations A list containing the network management addresses of downstream modems A test that checks most hardware components when the modem is powered on A three digit code indicating the modem s highest VF data rate The rules for timing format error control and flow control during data transmission Public Switched Telephone Network A network shared among many users who can use telephones to establish connections between two points Also known as dial network An informative display screen available from the modem s Top Level display It provides such information as network position control or tributary network management address DTE mode Asynchronous or Synchronous Line mode Le
195. cated behind a user s Private Branch Exchange PBX This register is only valid for Model 3921 Plus modems Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 5 17 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 5 3 3 of 12 392x Plus S Registers S Register Description DCP LCD Command Sequence 541 Dial Line Rate Register determines the modem s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on dial lines Register has the following values 1 14 400 V 32bis 2 12 000 V 32bis 3 9600 V 32bis 4 7200 V 32bis V 32bis 2400 V 22bis 1200 V 22 ic 1200 212A 10 0 300 V 21 11 0 300 103J 12 1200 75 V 23 13 75 1200 V 23 18 600 75 V 23 19 75 600 V 23 20 19 200 V 32 terbo 21 16 800 V 32 terbo 22 33 600 23 31 200 24 28 800 V 34 25 26 400 V 34 26 24 000 V 34 27 21 600 V 34 28 19 200 V 34 29 16 800 V 34 30 14 400 V 34 31 12 000 V 34 32 9600 V 34 33 7200 V 34 34 4800 V 34 35 2400 V 34 The factory setting is 28 800 V 34 Configure Edit Dial Line S43 V 32bis Train Register controls the modem s train time for V 32bis V 32 mode Register has the following values 0 Long 1 Short The factory setting is Long Configure Edit Dial Line 5 18 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 AT Command Set an
196. ceive signal carrier The jitter is typically introduced by analog power supplies and is predominantly sign waves with a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz This parameter appears for V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations in 4 wire only NonLinear Non Linear Distortion displays distortion which is usually associated with pulse code modulation PCM compandor noise on the phone line This parameter appears for V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 and Trellis Multipoint modulations in 4 wire only FreqOffset Frequency Offset reports the variation in all frequencies in the voice band This parameter appears for V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations in 4 wire only Gain Hts Gain Hit reports the total number of rapid changes in the receiver power level for the past 15 minutes This parameter appears for V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations in 4 wire only Clearing VF Counters The Clear command resets the retrain impulse hits gain hits phase hits and drop outs Status VF A Display Clear A To clear the VF counters select Clear 3 22 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Identity VF Counter Clear A eae A L8 le L8 The message Command Complete appears on the LCD s bottom line indicating the VF Counters are cleared To exit VF and remain in the Status Branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the
197. cessive retransmissions occur Perform an End to End test Refer to Pattern located in the Test Branch section of Chapter 3 The modem establishes and then disconnects the call You may have a poor VF connection Try dialing again The remote modem may have encountered an error control EC disconnect If the modems cannot negotiate EC then a disconnect occurs The remote modem may be in a forced Error Control mode disconnect if there is no error control Reconfigure your modem to V 42 MNP or Buffer and try again Check the LCD to determine the reason for the disconnect Perform a Local Analog Loopback test High error rates occur when running a local loopback or self test Incoming rings can cause data errors during a loopback test Abort the test disconnect the modular VF cord and restart the test Table B 6 Online Operation Symptom Action The data is scrambled Verify that the character format data bits parity and stop bits is set to the same value in both modems Data is missing during a transfer Verify that you are using the same method of flow control for both the modem and the DTE If using XON XOFF flow control verify that the modem s parity matches the DTE s parity Table B 7 Mux Operation Symptom Action The MUX configuration option does not appear under DTE Interface The Dial Access Security feature is enabled Verify that both the
198. ck Source Set to External LSD Control Set to Sim Cntl Car November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Sample Configurations Cables 3920Plus E G 3920Plus F Cable 1 Cable 2 Cable 3 Cable 4 Use TMp Tributary template default configuration options with the following exceptions Port2 MSD Set to Enable RTS Action Set to Sim_Cntl_Car Auto Dial Back Set to Enable Auto Dial Standby Set to Adv 15min Dial Line Rate Set to 14400 V32 Use TMp Tributary template default configuration options with the following exceptions RTS Action Set to Sim Cntl Car Auto Dial Back Set to Enable Auto Dial Standby Set to Adv 15min Dial Line Rate Set to 14400 V32 Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTF1 2 3 or 4 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED Use part number 818 2759 0111 or an equivalent customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 crossover cable with DB 25 P plug connectors on both ends to attach to the modems See Appendix C for pin assignments Use part number 125 0067 0031 a 6 position 4 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DIAL 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 G 17 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Point to Point MSD Figure G 9 s
199. command modifiers 3 72 5 6 H DCP controlled 3 65 3 73 handshaking sequence 3 74 3 75 manual dial See Talk Data hang up 3 67 network connection B 4 B 5 hardware part number HPt 3 23 stored telephone number 3 70 3 73 5 13 HDLC 4 41 D 1 Dial Line configuration options group 4 22 4 50 Health and Status definitions 3 18 3 19 3 27 3 28 digital bridge 1 9 1 10 sample configuration G 16 digital loopback 3 58 3 59 3 60 3 61 dimensions 1 14 directory telephone number 3 70 3 73 disconnecting a call 3 67 Identity 3 23 Download Software 3 42 3 49 indicators status LEDs 3 3 3 6 DTE installation connection 2 4 2 6 B 3 Model 3920Plus 2 3 2 12 status 3 3 3 6 3 24 Model 3921Plus 2 6 2 10 DTE Bridge See digital bridging DTE Dialer configuration options group 4 41 DTE Interface configuration options group 4 10 4 33 dual leased line operation See backup leased K keypad 3 8 3 9 EIA 232 D L cable connection 2 4 2 6 B 3 LCD liquid crystal display pin assignments C 2 description 3 2 3 7 3 8 status 3 3 3 6 3 24 menu structure 3 10 end to end pattern test 5 62 messages 3 11 3 16 3 18 3 19 3 27 3 28 environment 1 13 leased backup operation See backup leased equipment ied Leased Line configuration options group 4 24 4 53 ecd Da lied 2 2 leased line connection 2 5 2 6 ist 2 1 2 leased line operation 4 24 4 26 4 53 4 57 B 2 error control 4 58 LEDs status indicators
200. configuration option is used to calculate protocol timers for polling and normal selection NOTE The estimated roundtrip delay in the diagnostic link is entered Security Singleport Mode lt The Security configuration options allow you to set the parameters that control how a dial access security password is entered For security configuration options refer to Chapter 6 Dial Access Security 4 68 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Overview CONGIVIEW AC n 5 1 Operans Modes nirera e entr Set aet E 5 1 Switching Between Data Mode and Online Command Mode 5 1 Escape Sequence and Escape Guard Time 5 2 Command Guidelines sis oaa beoe parcet drm e derer ede Roe e 5 2 E 5 3 AT Command List mnc pret peony aM eee haces e RR 5 5 AT Command Pormat Jean ptm ene totas 5 5 seu PM MICE 5 15 S Register Format Rh eas eases 5 15 In Singleport mode the AT command set provides an alternative method to the modem s DCP for entering commands that control the operation and configuration of the 392xPlus modems This chapter discusses guidelines necessary to operate AT commands as well as listing the modifiers for all AT commands supported by the 392xPlus modems AT commands are issued from asynchronous DTEs Operating Modes The 392xPlus modems have
201. cquir A E XXX 2 Gm 5 The address field xxx is incremented sequentially from 001 256 as polls are transmitted from the modem to the downstream modem s To be added to the modem s poll list the device must respond to a poll after receiving its address The Acquire function can be canceled by selecting Abort The number field yyy indicates the total number of devices that responded to the modem s polls thus far These devices have been acquired for the poll list Select Abort or allow the function to complete 3 34 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Poll List Acquir A Num Acquired yyy A L5 The number field yyy indicates the total number of devices acquired for the poll list To exit this function and remain in the PList branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press Zx key Control Branch The Control branch of the Top Level menu allows you to manage hardware and software functions such as speaker volume reset busy out and firmware download 3921 Plus only Speaker Reset Data Stream EIA_LEDs Make Busy Service Line Download Code VF Thresh Update or or DownLoadSoftware RemoveMakeBusy DiscServiceLine To access Control from the Top Level menu make the following selections Leased 28 8 ZN Control Test Em m Press the
202. creen does not appear in Singleport mode Test P1 Rem Loop A Eos A L5 The message Started appears on the LCD and the Test LED lights If OtherTestA ctive appears on the LCD another test is in progress Select Abort to clear the current test and try again If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the test If it is disabled the test operates until aborted For more information on the Test Timeout configuration option refer to the Test section in Chapter 4 To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 59 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Loc Digital Loop Loc Digital Loop is issued by a local modem and forces it to loopback any data received from the remote modem Figure 3 6 This test operates the same as a CCITT V 54 Loop 2 except it is issued at your modem This is useful if a remote modem is incapable of initiating a remote digital loopback from its location For this test to operate properly the modems must be operating at the same rate and in Synchronous or Asynchronous Direct mode NOTE A TMp tributary cannot perform a local digital loopback test TRANSMITTER DTE NETWORK INTERFACE INTERFACE RECEIVER LOCAL MODEM 491 13078 Figure 3 6 Local Digital Loopback To access Loc_Digital_Loop
203. cs are serren meme eb 1 7 Technical Specifications for 392xPlus Modems 1 13 IVRP DEP PES ntis p e tae otek deter i o ep WES putes 3 5 PC ERG na Guyton Gatun tuus ee LEER Ld ewes 3 6 Top Level Menu Status 1 PROP edt eek TS eae 3 11 Common Operational Messages 3 14 Dial Access Security Messages ieee kd aoe tas sea MEE 3 14 Health and Status Messages edo Rh RE E REG ERRARE 3 18 Backup Status Screens ns oe nk ck LER RED ERA ERE RGSS Ra EET EE he 3 27 Valid Ranges for VF Thresholds 1 ck ttes 3 53 Valid Dial Command Modifiers Rew Rt het 3 72 DTE Interface Configuration Options Multiport Mode 4 10 Line Dialer Configuration Options Multiport Mode 4 19 Dial Line Configuration Options Multiport Mode 4 22 Leased Line Configuration Options Multiport Mode 4 24 Test Configuration Options Multiport Mode 4 27 Miscellaneous Configuration Options Multiport Mode 4 28 DTE Interface Configuration Options Singleport Mode 4 33 DTE Dialer Configuration Options Singleport 4 41 Line Dialer Configuration Options Singleport Mode
204. d ready for operation NOTE Only the Stndrd_RS232 setting is allowed in Austria Ignore Modem assumes DTR is always ON This is used when the DTE does not provide DTR Standard RS232 Allows the DTE to control DTR to the modem as specified in EIA 232 D and CCITT V 24 specifications If this signal is not present on at least one port the modem will not answer or dial Controls On Hook Required for applications in which the host processor must reset itself for the next session before the current session is terminated When selected the modem does not disconnect from the VF line during an active call until DTR is lowered by all DTE ports This setting is ignored if the modem is commanded to disconnect from its own front panel or by the COMSPHERE 6700 Series Network Management System DSR Control Stndrd_RS232 Nxt Stndrd_RS232 Forced On WinkWhenDisc Follows On Early Delay_ToData Data Set Ready Control DSR is a signal from the modem to the DTE indicating the modem is connected and ready for operation Standard RS232 Allows the modem to control DSR to the DTE The modem raises DSR when it begins the handshake process DSR lowers upon disconnect The modem is not ready to receive data until DSR CTS and LSD are active An ON state indicates to the DTE that the modem is ready to receive data An OFF state indicates that the modem is not ready to receive data and the DTE will not send data to the modem During a Local Analog Loop
205. d Control Carrier Simulated Control Carrier conforms to V 13 specifications This setting is ignored when the modem is configured for Asynchronous mode and RTS CTS flow control is selected Control Carrier Allows the DTE s RTS signal to control the modem s carrier signal When RTS is ON carrier is present on the VF line When RTS turns OFF carrier is not present This is only valid for V 29 and V 27bis leased line modulations Auto Dial Backup is always disabled for this setting The AT command for Standard RS232 is amp RO The AT command for Ignore is amp R1 The AT command for Simulated Control Carrier is amp R2 The AT command for Control Carrier is amp R3 RTS Antistream 10sec Nxt 10sec Disable 30sec 1 2min 3min 5min This configuration option only appears in TMp Tributary mode or when RTS Action is configured for Cntl Car V 29 and V 27bis Request to Send Antistreaming If enabled the operation of the antistreaming function is as follows If RTS is ON for a period exceeding the selected time the modem will take over control of the carrier and will force the carrier OFF The modem will also force CTS OFF during this time This condition will stay in effect until the DTE turns RTS OFF After this the next time the DTE turns RTS ON carrier will be turned ON and the RTS timer will start again Disable The antistreaming function is not in effect 10 sec 30 sec 1 min 2 min 3 min 5 min Enables the antist
206. d RS232 LSD is ON when the remote modem s carrier signal is detected LSD is OFF when carrier signal is not detected amp C2 Wink When Disconnect LSD normally forced ON turns OFF for approximately one second upon disconnecting amp C3 Follows DTR State of LSD follows state of DTR amp C4 Simulated Control Carrier State of LSD follows state of remote modem s RTS amp C5 DTR Disconnect Off State of LSD follows state of DTR except upon a disconnect where DTR remains ON and LSD turns OFF DTR must then toggle OFF and ON to turn LSD ON Use this setting for AT amp T DATAKIT applications Note that to use this option the DTR Action configuration option must be set to Stndrd_RS232 amp D1 amp D2 or amp D3 amp Dn DTR Action Configure Edit amp DO Ignore Modem ignores the true status of DTR and treats it as DTE Interface always ON amp D1 amp D2 amp D3 Standard RS232 DTR Signal is controlled by the DTE amp D4 Controls On Hook Modem does not disconnect from the VF line until DTR turns OFF amp D5 Controls Transmitter Mute Mutes the transmitter whenever DTR drops on the DTE interface This can be used on the answer side modem to force the originate modem to initiate a dial backup NOTE Only the Standard RS232 setting is allowed in Austria amp Fn Select Factory Default Configuration Options Loads factory configuration options Configure Factory into Active Operating area amp FO Async Dial amp F1 Sync Dial amp F2
207. d S Registers Table 5 3 4 of 12 392x Plus S Registers S Register Description DCP LCD Command Sequence 544 Leased Line Rate Register determines the modem s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on either 2 wire or 4 wire leased lines in either Answer or Originate mode Register has the following values 1 14 400 V 32bis 2 12 000 V 32bis 3 9600 V 32 4 7200 V 32bis 5 4800 V 32 6 2400 V 22bis 11 14 400 V 33 12 12 000 V 33 13 9600 V 29 14 7200 V 29 15 4800 V 29 16 4800 V 27bis 17 2400 V 27bis 18 19 200 V 32 terbo 19 16 800 V 32 terbo 20 19 200 TMp 21 14 400 TMp 22 9600 TMp 23 7200 TMp 24 4800 TMp 25 2400 TMp 26 33 600 27 31 200 V 34 29 26 400 V 34 30 24 000 V 34 31 21 600 V 34 32 19 200 V 34 33 16 800 V 34 34 14 400 V 34 35 12 000 V 34 36 9600 V 34 37 7200 V 34 38 4800 V 34 39 2400 V 34 The factory setting is 28 800 V 34 Configure Edit Leased Line S45 Leased TX Level Register determines the modem s transmit power output level over leased lines Enter a value from 0 to 15 dBm The factory setting is 0 dBm Configure WEdit Leased Line 2 The range of allowable values is 0 through 15 in North America and 1 through 15 in other countries The default is country dependent 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 5 1
208. d remote modems are negotiating the highest possible level of error control compatible between both modems Once a level is selected this LCD message disappears Dial Backup or Leased Backup Stndby MR The modem is operating in Dial Standby mode DialBckUp MR The modem is operating in a Dial Backup mode at the displayed data rate and is configured for Direct mode Backup MR EC The modem is operating in Dial Backup mode and is configured for error control and data compression on leased lines Stndby MR The modem is operating in Dial Standby mode and is configured for error control and data compression on leased lines MR Modem Rate indicates the data rate the modem is using One of the following values appears 300 1200 2400 4800 7200 9600 12 0 12 000 14 4 14 400 16 8 16 800 19 2 19 200 21 6 21 600 24 0 24 000 26 4 26 400 28 8 28 800 31 2 31 200 or 33 6 33 600 bps EC Error Control indicates the modem is online and using V 42 or MNP error control One of the following values appears after the modem rates listed above MNP2 MNP3 MNP4 MNP5 V42 V42b or NoEC NoEC indicates the modem is connected in Buffer mode rather than error control If an EC value does not appear then the modem is in Direct mode The Alarm Status Messages only appear when the Normal Operation Status Messages appear the LCD alternates between the two message sets
209. d services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners ED Printed on recycled paper COPYRIGHT 1996 Paradyne Corporation All rights reserved This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Avenue North P O Box 2826 Largo Florida 33779 2826 Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Further Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revision or changes A November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Safety Instructions Important Safety Instructions 1 Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the product or included in the manual This product is intended to be used with a three wire grounding type plug a plug which has a grounding pin This is a safety feature
210. dc power supply e An 8 pin modular keyed jack LEASED for 4 wire 2 wire leased lines e An 8 pin modular keyed jack DIAL for backup lines 2 wire dial or 2 wire leased e A 4 pin modular jack NMS for the Network Management System connection e One singleport or four multiport 25 pin DB 25 S receptacles for the DTE interfaces Connecting Cables to the Model 3920 Modem Instructions for connecting cables to the TELCO jack types using the appropriate cables apply to both singleport and multiport Model 3920Plus modems Figure 2 1 illustrates the Model 3920Plus multiport modem For pin assignments refer to Appendix C 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 2 3 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems DB 25 S CONNECTORS 0000000000000 0400000000000 c00000000000 0000000000000 2 ee DTE 4 0000000000000 OO LEASED L 2 DTE 1 NMS PWR ON OFF f 8 POSITION 8 CONDUCTOR PLUG FOR LEASED LINE NETWORK OPERATION 6 POSITION 4 CONDUCTOR PLUG FOR PERMISSIVE DIAL NETWORK N OPERATION DB 25 P CONNECTOR FOR DATA TERM
211. de is configured for Async Asynchronous Number of Data Bits Determines if the asynchronous data length is composed of 6 7 8 or 9 data bits This data length excludes start parity and stop bits 8 Sets data length to 8 data bits 7 Sets data length to 7 data bits 9 Sets data length to 9 data bits 6 Sets data length to 6 data bits Asyn Stop Bits 1 Nxt 1 2 This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Asynchronous Number of Stop Bits Selects 1 or 2 bits to signal the end of an asynchronous character 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 13 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 1 5 of 9 DTE Interface Configuration Options Multiport Mode x Async OverSpeed 1 0 End 10 2 3 This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Asynchronous Overspeed Provides rate compensation for asynchronous DTEs that may be operating at a slightly higher rate than the asynchronous interface of the port It accomplishes this by shortening the duration of the stop bit 1 0 Causes the stop bit to be shortened to 87 5 of its original duration 2 3 Causes the stop bit to be shortened to 75 of its original duration Port EIA Sub Group One for Each Port DTR Action Ignore Nxt Ignore Stndrd_RS232 CntrisOnHook Data Terminal Ready Action DTR is a signal from the DTE to the modem indicating that the DTE is connected an
212. dem cannot control the flow of data from the DTE XON XOFF Method of flow control in which the modem sends XOFF characters to the DTE to start and stop the flow of data The AT commands for Disable are Q0 Q5 and Q6 The AT commands for XON XOFF are Q1 and Q4 The AT commands for CTS to DTE are Q2 and Q3 Cntl of Mdm to Nxt RTS to Mdm Disable XON XOFF This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is not configured for DirectMode Flow Control of Modem Determines how the DTE controls the flow of data from the modem RTS to Modem Method of flow control in which the modem respectively starts and stops data transmission based upon the ON and OFF state of the DTE s RTS signal Disable The DTE cannot control the flow of data from the modem XON XOFF Method of flow control in which the modem starts and stops data flow based upon and XOFF characters received from the DTE The AT commands for Disable are Q0 Q2 and Q4 The AT commands for XON XOFF are Q1 and Q5 The AT commands for RTS to Modem are Q3 and Q6 4 60 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 12 4 of 6 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt XON XOFF Psthru Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Flow Control of
213. dems if line current is disrupted for more than 8 milliseconds Enable gt 90 millisecond Disconnects the modems if line current is disrupted for more than 90 milliseconds Use this setting if the modem constantly disconnects when set to Enab gt 8msec Disable Ignores any disruptions in line current such as call waiting Long Space Disc Enable Nxt Enable Disable Long Space Disconnect Determines the modem s response to a continuous spacing condition sent from the remote modem before it goes on hook Issuing a long space is one method of disconnecting a call Enable Modem disconnects if it receives a continuous space from the DTE For modulations lower than 4800 bps the modem s transmitter will transmit 4 seconds of long space upon a disconnect Disable Modem does not disconnect if it receives a continuous space from the DTE Modem will not transmit a long space disconnect NOTE In MUX Mode all enabled DTE ports on the remote modem must be in a continuous spacing condition 4 20 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 2 3 of 3 Line Dialer Configuration Options Multiport Mode No Carrier Disc 2sec Nxt 2sec Disable 5sec 10sec 20sec No Carrier Disconnect If the modem no longer receives carrier from the remote modem it disconnects the call This configuration option determines how long carrier is OFF before the modem disconnects Loss of carrier is one method of di
214. drive one RS 232 load 11 Unassigned 12 CT112 CI 112 DCE Data Signal Rate Select 13 Es Reserved for future function 14 Reserved for future function 15 TXC DB 114 DCE Transmit Clock 16 E m Reserved for future function 17 RXC DD 115 DCE Receive Clock 18 CT141 LL 141 DTE Local Loopback 20 DTR CD 108 DTE Data Terminal Ready 21 CT140 RL 140 DTE Remote Loopback 22 RI CE 125 DCE Ring Indicator 23 CT111 CH 111 DTE Data Rate Selector 24 XTXC DA 113 DTE External Clock 25 TEST TM 142 DCE Test Mode C 2 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Pin Assignments VF Connector Pin Assignments Table C 2 lists the connector pin assignments for Model 3920Plus modular jacks as well as the pin assignments for the TELCO jacks See Figure C 1 Table C 2 VF Connector Pin Assignments Type of Telco Jack Pin Leased Dial Pi RJ11 JM8 en 1 4 Wire TX Ring 1 2 Wire TX RX 2 4 Wire TX Tip 1 2 Wire TX RX 3 4 Ring Ring Ring 5 Tip Tip Tip 6 7 4 Wire RX Tip 8 4 Wire RX Ring 490 8769a PIN 8 Figure C 1 VF Pin Orientation 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 C 3 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Auxiliary Cables Not Supplied To add an external telephone to your modem use an external Y cable to connect the phone line to both the modem and the telephone Figure C 2 6 POS
215. e Pee ES ERES B 3 Modem ConnecHoll uon e bind B 4 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Table of Contents Table Page B 6 Online Operation ered eae Pret B 5 Be Die Operation aes PER TRO o near ees B 5 Cal BLIA 232 D Pin Assisnments EUR SPONSOR YE wee C 2 C 2 VE Connector Pin Assignmienis epi PPS bbe P ES C 3 Del N2sbis Commands Lo ois pis POE bts RIT en Ea pU PT D 6 D 2 X2sbis Response Messages DET e EET RES PS D 7 E l 5 Characters oh cae alas bh Bie Red RE E REGERE RE RUE E 1 F 1 Factory Default Configuration Options 00 0 00 eee F 2 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 v Preface Objectives and Reader Assumptions This manual describes how to install and operate the COMSPHERE Model 3920Plus standalone and Model 3921 Plus carrier mounted modems Users of this manual must have a basic understanding of modems and their operation How to Use This Manual Chapter 1 provides technical specifications information about the four 392xPlus models the modem features and the government requirements for using these modems Chapter 2 provides instructions for installing the 392xPlus modems Chapter 3 provides the information required to operate the Model 3920Plus using the diagnostic control panel and the Model 3921Plus using the COMSPH
216. e modems using V 34 modulation is not possible since the line condition may not be capable of supporting the selected rate Thus using CT111 and CT112 for rate control of extended data circuits cannot be used When operating in V 34 modulation you can use the top line of the Quick Configuration screen to view the current modem transmit rate the symbol or baud rate and the transmit level The 392xPlus modems offer separate options for leased and dial lines to override the asymmetric rate function since this can cause problems for certain DTE equipment Also each symbol rate supports a subset of data rates which make up the whole of the V 34 standard Symbol Rate Supported Data Rates 3429 4800 33 6K 3200 4800 31 2K 3000 4800 28 8 2800 4800 31 2K 2743 4800 31 2K 2400 2400 24 0 When using the V 34 modulation on leased lines with a 2 wire leased backup facility the backup line check feature which tests the backup leased lines for connectivity cannot be used NOTE When a 2400 V 34 modulation connection occurs on one end of a modem pair with configuration options set for Asymmetric rates the other modem is 24K due to the 2400 symbol rate it uses When the 392xPlus multiport modem has the MUX mode configuration option set to either TDM MSD or Digital Bridge it is in Multiport mode and either dial lines or a 2 wire leased line can be used to back up the primary 4 wire leased line Backup c
217. e used to configure the modem for operation over dial lines Table 4 3 shows each Dial Line configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Table 4 3 1 of 2 Dial Line Configuration Options Multiport Mode x Dial Modulation V34 Nxt V34 V32_Family Dial Modulation Modulation reduces the amount of scrolling necessary to select Dial Line rates by limiting the number of Dial Line Rate configuration options Only one group of Dial Line rates is displayed depending on the setting of the Dial Modulation configuration option V 34 V 32bis and V 32 terbo Dial Line Rate 28800 V34 Nxt 33600 28800 V34 24000 V34 19200 V34 16800 V34 14400 V34 12000 V34 9600 V34 7200 V34 4800 V34 2400 V34 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b Dial Line Rate This configuration option determines the modem s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on dial lines Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs 33600 28800 V34 24000 V34 19200 V34 16800 V34 14400 V34 12000 V34 9600 V34 7200 V34 4800 V34 2400 V34 The modem operates using V 34 modula
218. ed Originate default configuration options with the following exception Rate Refer to the Sample Port Rate Table in this section G 10 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Sample Configurations Sample Port Rate Table Cables Cable 1 Cable 2 Cable 5 Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4 28 8K 9600 9600 4800 4800 24 0K 9600 Disable 4800 4800 19 2K 9600 Disable 4800 4800 16 8K 9600 Disable Disable 4800 14 4K 9600 Disable Disable 4800 12 0K Disable Disable Disable 4800 9 6K Disable Disable Disable 4800 7 2K Disable Disable Disable 4800 4 8K Disable Disable Disable 4800 2 4K Disable Disable Disable Disable Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTF1 2 3 or 4 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED Use part number 835 1224 1011 10 feet part number 125 0040 0031 12 feet part number 835 1224 2511 25 feet part number 835 1224 5011 50 feet or an equivalent pin to pin 6 position 6 wire modular cord The maximum cable length is 50 feet 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Carrier with Network Management Figure G 6 shows a sample configuration
219. ee lt i and gt Keys Use the lt 1 and gt keys to move the viewing window left or right and to scroll the remaining branches and selections into view A maximum of three selections can be displayed at one time These keys also allow you to move the cursor one character to the left or right on data entry displays for example to allow entry of one digit at a time 3 8 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation F1 2 F3 Keys Function keys F1 F2 and select the LCD choice that appears above the function key Refer to the Summary section in Chapter 4 for the exception If the displayed LCD choice spans more than one function key then any of the function keys select that choice NOTE In the screen examples the F1 key is highlighted where multiple function keys select the choice Select Key Model 3921Plus only The Select key appears on the optional SDCP of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier It is used to connect the SDCP to a modem in a specific slot in the carrier Menu Structure The menu tree is a hierarchical structure used to display functions that configure and control local and remote 392xPlus modems It is accessed via the DCP and is shown in Appendix A Status Displays the current status of the modem along with the data rate and the error control mode EI 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 9 COMSPHERE 39
220. egree of application flexibility The 3920Plus multiport modem also operates over a 4 wire 2 wire leased or dial network and is controlled using the same DCP employed on the Model 3920Plus singleport standalone modem 1 2 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Introduction Model 3920Plus Singleport and Multiport Housing x zm E A B LCD AND og LA SPEAKER POWER SUPPLY STATUS INDICATORS POER Singleport Modem Multiport Modem Back Panel Back Panel POWER ON OFF DIAGNOSTIC CONTROL PANEL POWER ON OFF POWER IN POWER IN NMS DIAL LEASED 496 14684 01 LEASED Figure 1 1 Model 3920P us Standalone Singleport and Multiport Modems 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 1 3 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Model 3921 Plus Carrier Mounted Singleport Modem The Model 3921 Plus is a carrier mounted singleport modem Figure 1 2 capable of either 4 wire 2 wire leased line or dial operation The modem installs into a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier occupying a single slot The modem s faceplate has sixteen 16 LED status indicators for displaying modem activity and an audio speaker jack for the carrier s optional speaker The modem s back panel has two edge card connectors that mount into a connector plate This connector plate has two DB 25 S connectors one providing an EIA 232 D DTE interface and one for future functionality Model 3921 Plus Carrier Mounted Multiport Modem The Model 3921 Plu
221. el DCP This chapter describes how to access and use the Configure branch of the Top Level menu via the DCP The Configure branch accesses the Edit Area which is a work space where you view and change the configuration options These configuration options are loaded to the Edit Area from one of five configuration option areas Active Operating Active Saved Customer 1 Customer 2 or Factory e Active Operating is a configuration area containing configuration options currently used by the modem When the modem is powered on or when a save is performed the contents of Active Saved are loaded into Active Operating Any changes made using AT commands directly affect this configuration area e Active Saved is a read from and write to configuration option area containing the most recently saved changes made to any configuration options In the event of a power cycle or reset the modem retrieves these settings from nonvolatile memory e Customer 1 and Customer 2 are two additional read and write changeable configuration areas where you can create and store additional configurations for specific applications 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 1 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems e Factory is a read only unchangeable configuration area containing six sets of predefined configuration options labeled Syne Leased Async Leased TMp Trellis Multipoint Async Dial Sync Dial and UNIX Dial If Sync Leased or Async Leased is selected you
222. ely the same time and hang up the handset to begin the handshaking sequence If the handshake is successful the modems are in Data mode and OnLine appears on the LCD NOTE If the remote modem is not a 3900 Series modem then the remote user must consult that modem s operator s manual to perform a similar operation Once the modems are online the status messages listed in Table 3 3 appear on the Top Level display It is not necessary to specify an originating or answering modem when dialing via the DCP because the answering modem detects that it is receiving a ringing voltage and automatically defaults to Answer mode Security Branch The Security branch is only available in Singleport mode The Security branch allows you to create edit and save parameters that determine how the modem s security is executed For security procedures and configuration options refer to Chapter 6 Dial Access Security 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 75 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Remote Branch The Remote branch of the Top Level menu allows you to control the remote modem s DCP using the local modem s DCP This function allows you to change configuration options and control test functions in a remote modem Any changes made to configuration options while using the Remote branch are not saved until you exit the Remote branch This function is only available when using either V 34 V 33 V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 TMp or
223. em returns to its previous data rate Note Fallback2 is not available for TMp tributaries NOTE For proper CT111 operation disable the Autorate configuration option MSD Port Control Host Nxt Host Modem This configuration option does not appear when MSD is disabled Modem Sharing Device Port Control Host The host computer determines the polling sequence that controls which port transmits at any given time When the DTE DCE equipment attached to a port raises RTS Request to Send it gets to use the channel If more than one port raises RTS at the same time the transmission on the channel is garbled The system protocol ensures that only one port transmits data at a time Modem The modem determines the polling sequence that controls which port transmits at a given time The first port to raise RTS will receive CTS Clear to Send authorization to transmit data When the current transmitting port lowers its RTS the modem randomly polls another port with RTS raised 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 11 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 1 3 of 9 DTE Interface Configuration Options Multiport Mode x Port Rate Sub Group One for Each Port NOTE The Port Rate Sub Group configuration options are not available in Digital Bridge mode Modem MSD Disable Nxt End Disable Enable This configuration option only appears when NetworkPosition is configured for Tributary Modem Modem Sharing Device Disables
224. ement system NMS interface 1 Insert the sub miniature 4 conductor modular plug of the 3600 Hubbing Device into the jack labeled NMS Figure 2 1 Refer to Document Number 3610 A2 GZ45 3600 Hubbing Device Feature Number 3600 F3 300 Installation Instructions for a description of the 3600 Hubbing Device Installation for the 3920Plus is the same as for the 3610 DSU Connect the 3600 Hubbing Device to the network management system Figure G 4 in Appendix G Removing and Replacing the Model 3920 Modem To remove and replace the Model 3920Plus modem perform the following steps 1 2 Make sure the modem is offline Press the modem s back panel power switch to OFF Disconnect the power cord from the ac power outlet Disconnect the dc power cable from the connector on the back of the modem Disconnect the leased line and dial modular cord s from the modem s back panel Disconnect the DTE interface cable s from the modem s back panel If the modem is to be removed for service return it to the company using the procedures described in Government Requirements and Equipment Return in Chapter 1 Install the replacement modem as described in the Model 3920Plus Modem Installation section of this chapter and configure it the same way as the modem being replaced Model 3921 Plus Modem Installation CAUTION When removing the Model 3921 Plus from the carrier always use a ground strap when handling
225. er the escape character is disabled if a value greater than 127 ASCIl is entered When disabled the call must be disconnected to return to Command mode The AT command is S Register S2 n where nis a value from 0 to 127 The AT command to disable is S Register S2 n where nis a value from 128 to 255 When disabled the modem cannot return to Command mode unless disconnected Escape GuardTim 1sec Nxt 1 200msec 400msec 600msec 800msec 2sec This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Escape Guard Time Determines the length of the required pause before and after the escape sequence is issued The guard time prevents the modem from interpreting data as the escape sequence characters The AT command is S Register S12 n where n is a value from 0 to 255 in 20 millisecond increments BreakForceEscap Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Break Forces Escape Determines whether or not the modem should enter Command mode when it receives a break character from the DTE Disable A break character is sent to the remote end Enable Modem escapes into AT Command mode and a break character is not sent to the remote end The AT commands for Enable are KO K2 or K4 The AT commands for Disable are K1 K3 or K5 CommandCharEcho Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Ty
226. er 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED Use part number 125 0067 0031 a 6 position 4 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DIAL 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 G 9 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Point to Point with Network Management Figure G 5 shows a sample configuration for point to point applications with network management 28800 V34 28800 V34 9600 TX gt 9600 prp 19800 i 1 Leased Sync Sync 4800 a 2 3920Plus A 3920Plus B 2 1X fee nms i LY 9600 DTE Cable 2 Syne 3600 Cable 2 300 DTE Hubbing 4800 ns Cable1 IN Device Cable1 Sync Cable 1 Cable 1 Cable 1 Cable 1 4800 DTE Sync Cable 1 Cable 1 Cable 5 or 6800 002 0025 0031 Figure G 5 Sample Configuration Point to Point with Network Management Configuration Options 3920Plus A Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following exception Rate Refer to the Sample Port Rate Table in this section Diag Connection Set to NMS CC NetworkPosition Set to Control NetMngmtAddress Set to 1 3920Plus Sync Leas
227. er 1996 3 77 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems For Trellis Multipoint TMp modems control or tributary you must specify the remote access password of the modem that will be accessed by the Remote function The following display does not appear in point to point modems Choose Password AJ EE tyyyyyyyy A ES fe a The password field yyyyyyyy displays the remote access password of the modem to be accessed by the Remote function To increment digits within the password field yyyyyyyy use the lt and gt keys to position the cursor _ under the digit to be incremented Press the F2 f key to increment the digit Press Enter Ent to select the modem that will be accessed by the Remote function Select Channel gt A Secondary a mj gt Select Channel lt 2 Prim data A 88 If operation over the secondary channel is desired press any function key to select the secondary channel Secondary channel only appears if using V 34 V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 or TMp modulation If operation over the primary channel is desired press the gt key until primary displays and press any function key Primary channel operation is not available when initiating a Remote function from a TMp tributary modem 3 78 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Leased 28 8 r Control ExitRem A
228. eshold press the A key to return to the VF Threshold Edit Save Reset screen VF Thresholds TaN Ee Save Select Reset to restore the original default values into memory Repeat the Edit and Save procedure until the VF threshold s is valid and the Save completes successfully Save Completed To exit this function and remain in the Control branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key Health and Status VF alarms are reported to the front panel LED and the Network Management System NMS based on the parameters in Table 3 8 Refer to Table 3 6 in the Device Health and Status section of this chapter for Health and Status VF message alarm information Table 3 8 1 of 2 Valid Ranges for VF Thresholds VF Thresholds Valid Ranges Default Values Receive Signal Level High 0 dBm to 15 dBm Above 9 dBm Receive Signal Level Low 16 dBm to 50 dBm Below 23 dBm Signal to Noise Ratio 5 dB to 40 dB Below 23 dB Non Linear Distortion 15 dB to 50 dB Below 30 dB Retrains per 15 minutes 1 to 255 trains 15 trains Signal Quality Excellent lowest Good Good Fair Poor No Signal highest Near Echo 0 38 dBm Above 20 dBm 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 53 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 3 8 2 of 2 Valid Ranges for VF Thresholds VF Thresholds Valid Ranges Default Values
229. ess the key until Service Line appears Control CA Eum A L8 8 8 gt Press F1 Service_Line to switch the modem from its normal dial line to the service line Service_Line A Command Complete A lt a re 8 gt The message Command Complete appears Now when the modem places a call instead of using the dial the call is placed on the service line 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 41 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems To disconnect the modem from the service line and resume normal operation press the A key returning to Control branch From the Control branch press the key until DiscServiceLine appears Control A DiscServiceLine dl Press 1 DiscServiceLine The call and service line disconnect and the message Command Complete appears Download Software The Download Software function sets parameters within the modem when transferring firmware to one or more modems or when receiving firmware upgrades from a locally attached PC based controller The latter is only performed by service representatives There are two selections under Download Software Clone Remote and To Local via DTE Clone Remote is used to transfer an exact copy of the firmware currently stored in a 392xPlus modem to either one or more remote 392xPlus modems one more DC attached 392xPlus modems When implementing a Clone Remote ope
230. ets data length to 9 data bits Only valid when Error Control configuration option is set to Direct Mode 6 DirectMode Sets data length to 6 data bits Only valid when Error Control configuration option is set to Direct Mode NOTE If the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to AT or V 25bis Async then the total character size must equal 10 bits Total character size consists of start data parity and stop bits V 25bis Async must use 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit The total character size for Error Control mode Direct mode or Buffer mode must be 11 bits or less The AT prefix determines the async character length Asyn Parity Bit None Nxt None Even Odd Mark Space This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Asynchronous Parity Bit Determines the type of asynchronous parity bit The parity of the DTE must match the parity of the modem Parity options include None Even Odd Mark or Space None No parity bit is used Even Parity bit is set so that total number of 1 s in data bits plus parity bit is even Odd Parity bit is set so that total number of 1 s in data bits plus parity bit is odd Mark Parity bit is always set to 1 Only valid if Async Data Bits configuration option is set to 7 Space Parity bit is always set to 0 Only valid if Async Data Bits configuration option is set to 7 NOTE If the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set
231. figuration options with the following exception NetworkPosition Set to Control Diag Connection Set to NMS CC NetMngmtAddress Set to 1 3920Plus Sync Leased Originate default configuration options with the following exception Tx Clock Source Set to RXC Diag Connection Set to Modem DC Port Tx Source Set Port 1 to External G 14 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Sample Configurations 3920Plus C 3920Plus D F 3910 H 3920Plus E 3910 G Cables Cable 1 Cable 2 Cable 3 Cable 6 Cable 7 Adapter 871A Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following exceptions Tx Clock Source Set to External Extended Channel Set Port 1 to Enable Upstream Port Set to Port 1 Diag Connection Set to Modem DC NetworkPosition Set to Control Use Sync Leased Originate default configuration options with the following exceptions Tx Clock Source Set to RXC Loop Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following exceptions Diagnostic Connection Set to Modem DC NetworkPosition Set to Control Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTE1 2 3 or 4 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED Use part number 818 2759 0111 or
232. g is used for your application Refer to Chapter 2 Modem Installation Verify that one modem is configured for Answer mode and the other is configured for Originate mode For TMp operation one modem must be configured as a control modem and the other as a tributary modem Verify that both modems are using the same modulation scheme Verify that both modems are configured for the appropriate leased line mode For example if you have a 4 wire leased line then the modems must be configured for 4 wire operation Table B 3 Dial Backup Operation Symptom Action The dial backup line is present but the modems cannot connect Verify that the correct telephone number for the remote modem is stored in directory location 1 Verify that both modems have the Auto Dial Backup configuration option set to Enable Refer to Leased Line in Chapter 4 Call the answering modem with a handset and verify that the modem s answer tone is transmitted The modem does not switch back to leased line operation Verify that the Auto Dial Standby configuration option is enabled Refer to Leased Line in Chapter 4 B 2 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Troubleshooting Table B 4 Modem DTE Connection Symptom Action The modem does not accept or echo back AT commands Verify that the cable between the Async port of the DTE and the modem is a standard RS 232 cable Null modem cables also
233. guration option controls whether or not the modem s single number callback function is used Disable Modem does not use the single number callback function Enable Modem answers a call disconnects and dials the number stored in directory location 1 NMS Call Msgs CallCnct amp Prg Nxt CallCnct amp Prg Disable CallCnctOnly CallProgOnly NMS Call Messages Determines if the modem status and or call summary information is sent to the NMS The modem can itemize status such as CallProgress messages or it can report a summary of activity such as Call Connect messages to the NMS Call Connect amp Progress Enables both Call Connect and Call Progress information to be transmitted to the NMS Disable Modem status and call summary information is not sent to the NMS Call Connect Only The modem accumulates call statistics over a period of time and then transmits a summary of these statistics to the NMS The NMS uses this data to produce utilization reports Call Progress Only The modem transmits detailed modem status information to the NMS These messages include any events that can display on the LCD NOTE For 6800 Series NMS applications Disable must be selected NetworkPosition Tributary End Tributary Control Network Position Identification Each modem must be identified either as a control modem or a tributary modem NOTE Changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset NOTE This config
234. h modems Disable The modem operates in symmetric rate mode the transmit and receive rates are identical when running V 34 modulation Either modem can force symmetric mode by disabling the Asymmetric Rate configuration option 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 23 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Leased Line Multiport Mode x The Leased Line configuration options only appear when the Sync Leased factory preset template is selected They are used to configure the modem for operation over leased lines Table 4 4 shows each Leased Line configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Table 4 4 1 of 3 Leased Line Configuration Options Multiport Mode LeaseModulation V34 Nxt V34 V32 Family TMp Lease Modulation Modulation reduces the amount of scrolling necessary to select Leased Line rates by limiting the number of Leased Line Rate configuration options Only one group of Leased Line rates is displayed depending on the setting of the Lease Modulation configuration option V 34 V 32bis V 32 terbo and TMp LeasedLine Rate 28800 V34 Nxt 33600 28800 V34 24000 V34 19200 V34 16800 V34 144
235. hange this value refer to S Register S2 discussed later in Table 5 3 in the S Register Format section To prevent the modem from interpreting an embedded in data as an escape sequence the Escape Guard Time value determines the length of the pause before and after the escape sequence is issued The 392xPlus modems use a one second pause as the Escape Guard Time To change this value refer to S Register 5 12 discussed later in Table 5 3 in the S Register Format section To enter online Command mode while in Data mode enter the following sequence TYPE Use command to return to Data mode from online Command mode Enter the following command TYPE ATO PRESS Enter Command Guidelines Review the following guidelines before using any AT Commands e The escape sequence is used to enter online Command mode from Data mode e The asynchronous character format for the AT command set must be one of the following 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit 7 data bits no parity 2 stop bits 7 data bits parity 1 stop bit parity can be odd even mark or space e All commands except A and must begin with the characters AT and end by pressing the Enter key The AT or at prefix clears the command buffer and matches the modem speed and parity to that of the DTE Commands can be upper or lowercase but the modem will not recognize mixed case prefixes At or aT e Commands can be entered one a
236. he DTE while in V 25bis mode Register has the following values 0 ASCII 1 EBCDIC The factory setting is ASCII Configure Edit DTE Dialer 63 V 25bis Idle Character Register identifies to the modem the type of idle fill used by the DTE while in V 25bis mode Register has the following values 0 Mark 1 Flag The factory setting is Mark Configure Edit DTE Dialer S64 V 25bis New Line Character Register identifies to the modem the type of line terminator used by the DTE while in V 25bis mode Register has the following values 0 Carriage Return and Line Feed 1 Carriage Return 2 Line Feed The factory setting is carriage return and line feed CR LF Configure WEdit DTE Dialer S65 Line Current Disconnect Register determines if the modem disconnects if an 8 millisecond or 90 millisecond interruption in loop current occurs Register has the following values 0 Enable 8msec 1 Enable 90msec 2 Disable The factory setting is Enable 8msec Configure Edit Line Dialer 5 22 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 5 3 8 of 12 392x Plus S Registers S Register Description DCP LCD Command Sequence S66 NMS Call Messages Register determines if the modem sends information regarding status Call Progress and or sends summarized call statistics Call Connect to the 6700 Series Network Management
237. hows a sample configuration for point to point MSD Cable 1 Logical Addr 1 Gabler Channel Ports 1 3 MSD dodo ac ea ED Addr 2 e Addr 3 Port 4 TDM Adar 4 Cable 1 Cable 2 Cable 2 495 1 4613a Figure G 9 Sample Configuration Point to Point MSD 3920Plus A Use Sync Lease Answer Template default configuration options with the following exception Rate Refer to the Sample Port Rate Table in this section 3920Plus Sync Lease Originate Template default configuration options with the following exception MSD Control Set Ports 1 2 and 3 to Enable Rate Refer to the Sample Port Rate Table in this section Cables Cable 1 Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTF1 2 3 or 4 Cable 2 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED Cable 3 Use part number 818 2759 0111 or an equivalent customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 crossover cable with DB 25 P plug connectors on both ends to attach to the modems See Appendix C for pin assignments G 18 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Sample Configurations Sample Port Rate Table Point to Point MSD 3920Plus A Sample Port Rate Table Point to Point MSD 3920Plus B
238. ibutary modems across the analog channel The modem s transmitter turns on and off in response to RTS This mode is used by multipoint tributary modems A user defined configuration area containing customized configuration options for a specific application A user defined configuration area containing customized configuration options for a specific application Data Access Arrangement Hardware that acts as a protective interface between the telephone circuit and the modem It performs such functions as ring detection DC isolation and surge protection to protect the circuit from being disturbed by a modem malfunction The 392xPlus modems contain three dip switches that allow the DAA hardware to be configured for use in different countries An area within the modem used to store the modem s firmware There are two data banks in the 392xPlus modem A continuous frequency signal that can be modulated by another signal that contains information to be transmitted The elimination of empty fields redundancies and gaps in order to reduce storage capacity needs and the amount of data to be transmitted Anything that is eliminated is restored after the data is received One of two modem operating modes When in Data mode the modem transmits and receives data instead of accepting commands A 25 pin connector that is used to connect a cable which enables communication between two devices 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 Glossary 3
239. icate during this test can cause errors To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the Zx key This test is not available when e Using TMp modulation e Using Remote mode V 54 configuration option is enabled Using V 34 modulation with the Aysmmetric Rate configuration option enabled Rem Digital Loop performs a remote digital loopback CCITT V 54 Loop 2 Figure 3 5 This test can verify the integrity of the local modem the communication link and the remote modem Any data or pattern entered at the local DTE is sent to and returned from the remote modem For this test to operate properly the modems must be operating at the same rate and in Synchronous or Asynchronous Direct mode SENDS TEST MESSAGE TRANSMITTER RECEIVER DTE INTERFACE TRANSMITTER VERIFIES TEST MESSAGE pr LOCAL MODEM REMOTE MODEM diam Figure 3 5 Remote Digital Loopback 3 58 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation To access Rem_Digital_Loop from the Test branch make the following selections Test A A lt e 8 Press the key until Rem Digital Loop appears Press any function key to start this test Pick Test Port gt Port1 Port2 A Select the appropriate port by pressing the corresponding function key Press the gt key to scroll other ports into view This s
240. iginating modem will attempt the dial backup for a maximum of 10 call attempts with a 2 minute delay between calls This function can only be reset with a completed manual dial backup a power cycle or using NMS Fast Backup Only used in special applications requiring a shortened delay time from the failure of the leased lines to the initiation of the automatic dial backup AutoDialStandby Disable Nxt Disable 15min ihr 4hr Test 2min Adv 15min Adv 30min Adv 1 TestAdv2min Automatic Dial Standby Permits a modem operating on dial lines regardless of the method of dialing origination to check the quality of the leased lines periodically and if they are good to disconnect from the dial lines and resume operations on the leased lines The time interval that the modem uses to check the quality of the leased lines is determined by the configuration option These intervals are 15 minutes 1 hour and 4 hours The Test 2min and TestAdv2min selections are for testing purposes only The Adv 15min Adv 30min and Adv 1 hr selections cause the modem to evaluate the leased lines continuously in a manner which is non disruptive to the dial line communication NOTE For Automatic Dial Standby to operate properly it must be enabled prior to a backup occurring 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 25 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 4 3 of 3 Leased Line Configuration Options Multiport Mode x SpecialStandby Disable Nxt
241. iguration option will cause the modem to reset Modem DC Selects the Diagnostic Channel NMS CC Selects the Control Channel Disable Prevents messages being sent from the diagnostic port Link Delay sec 0 1 Nxt 01 2 5 10 20 50 Link Delay Seconds Controls the length of time in seconds a modem will wait for responses from the downstream devices This configuration option is used to calculate protocol timers for polling and normal selection NOTE The estimated roundtrip delay in the diagnostic link is entered 4 30 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Singleport Mode lt In Singleport mode the modem s configuration options are arranged into nine groups based on functionality e DTE Interface Table 4 7 e DTE Dialer Table 4 8 e Line Dialer Table 4 9 e Dial Line Table 4 10 Leased Line Table 4 11 V42 MNP Buffer Table 4 12 e Test Table 4 13 Misc Table 4 14 e Security Chapter 6 The following graphic represents the structure of the configuration options in Singleport mode 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 4 31 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems MUX Singleport Mode DTE Line Leased Line Test Security Interface Dialer AutoAnswerRing LeaseModulation DTE RL CT140 Dialer Type LeasedLine Rate DTE LL CT141 Port 1 DialTone Detect Leased Mode Test Timeout MUX Mode Mode Blind Dial Paus Autorate Rev Remote Lo
242. ime the DTE raises RTS and the time the modem presents CTS to allow the DTE to send data NOTE For this configuration option to be valid both the RTS Action and the CTS Control configuration options must be set to Stndrd RS232 If RTS Action is set to Ignore RTS is always ON and this configuration option has no effect LSD Control Stndrd RS232 Nxt Stndrd RS232 Forced On WinkWhenDisc Follows Sim Cntl Car DTR DiscOFF Line Signal Detect Control LSD is a signal indicating that the carrier signal is being received from the remote modem It is normally turned OFF to the DTE when the power level of the received carrier signal drops below the carrier detect threshold Standard RS232 LSD is ON when the modem detects the remote modem s carrier signal LSD turns OFF when the carrier signal strength drops below carrier detect threshold Forced On Forces LSD to be ON at all times Wink When Disconnect LSD is normally forced ON but can be turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect Follows DTR The state of LSD follows the state of DTR When DTR turns ON LSD turns ON When DTR turns OFF LSD turns OFF Simulated Control Carrier LSD follows the state of RTS of the remote DTE via the V 13 simulated control carrier signaling This is required for hosts that cannot support full duplex operation If LSD Control is set to simulated control carrier then the RTS Action configuration option on the remote modem must be set to S
243. imulated Control Carrier zDTR Disconnect OFF The state of LSD follows the state of DTR except when disconnecting once a connection is established In this instance DTR remains ON and LSD turns OFF DTR must then toggle OFF and then ON again for LSD to turn ON This setting is required for AT amp T DATAKIT dial out applications NOTE If LSD Control is set to DTR DiscOff then the DTR Action configuration option must be set to Stndrd RS232 XTXC Clamps TXC Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option only appears when TX Clock Source is configured for Port 1 2 3 or 4 External Transmit Clock Clamps Transmit Clock Allows the port s TXC output Pin 15 on the EIA 232 D interface to be clamped OFF when TX Clock Source is configured for Port 1 2 3 or 4 Enable TXC is clamped off when TX Clock Source is configured for Port 1 2 3 or 4 Disable TXC continues to be provided when TX Clock Source is configured for Port 1 2 3 or 4 4 16 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 1 8 of 9 DTE Interface Configuration Options Multiport Mode x CT111 Control Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option does not appear when V 34 is enabled for a leased or dial line CT111 Control Used in conjunction with CT111 Rate Control Refer to the Mux Sub Group section of this table Allows the DTE to control modem rate via Pin 23 of the EIA 232 D interface CT111 is also
244. in seconds the modem Configure WEdit waits after going off hook before dialing a telephone number if using result Line Dialer code XO0 X1 or X3 Enter a value from 2 255 seconds The factory setting is 2 S7 No Answer Time out Register determines how long in seconds an Configure Edit originating modem waits before abandoning a call when no answer tone is Line Dialer received Enter a value from 1 255 seconds The factory setting is 45 S8 Pause Time for the Dial Modifier Register determines how long in Configure Edit seconds the modem pauses when it encounters a comma in the Dial Line Dialer command string Enter a value from 0 255 seconds The factory setting is 2 510 No Carrier Disconnect Register determines how long in tenths of seconds Configure Edit the modem allows the carrier signal to be OFF before disconnecting the call Line Dialer Enter a value from 0 254 in 0 1 second increments A value of 255 disables this register The factory setting is 20 2 seconds 1 The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries 5 16 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 5 3 2 of 12 392x Plus S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence 12 Escape Guard Time Register sets the value in 20 millisecond increments for Configure Edit the required pause before and after the escape sequence is issued
245. ine Dialer X7 Use DTE Rate Enable Enable Extended Result Code Enable Displays all result codes listed in Table 5 1 except for error control suffix Disable Only displays OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER ERROR Add EC Displays result codes with EC suffix Add V42 MNP Displays result codes with V 42 or MNP suffix Use DTE Rate Displays DTE data rate instead of line rate Dial Tone Detect Enable Sets the modem for dial tone detect Disable Sets the modem for blind dialing NOTE It may not be possible to disable Dial Tone Detect in some countries Busy Tone Detect Enable Modem monitors for busy tone Disable Modem ignores busy tone Yn Long Space Disconnect Configure Edit Line Dial YO Disable Ignores long space MARS Y1 Enable Disconnects if long space is detected Enables transmission of a long space Zn Reset and Load Active Control Reset ZO Loads configuration options from Active Saved to Active Operating Z1 Loads configuration options from Customer 1 to Active Operating Z2 Loads configuration from Customer 2 to Active Operating Z3 Loads configuration options from Active Saved to Active Operating and performs a reset 5 8 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 5 2 4 of 9 392xPlus AT Commands DCP LCD NUM d Description Command Sequence amp Cn LSD Control Configure Edit amp CO Forced On LSD ON at all times amp C1 Standar
246. ine Rate is configured for V 34 and V 32 families Train Time Controls V 34 and V 32 families train time Determines whether minimum or maximum time durations are used during the V 34 and V 32 families handshaking sequence for both dial and 4 wire 2 wire leased line applications Long Selects long train Use this setting whenever far end frequency offset phase roll may be encountered This is usually only required when transmitting over satellite links Short Allows the modem to train up faster when using the V 34 and V 32 families modulation The AT command is S Register S43 n where n is 0 for Long and 1 for Short Asymmetric Rate Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option does not appear unless V 34 modulation is selected Asymmetric Rate Controls rate symmetry when running V 34 modulation by enabling or disabling the V 34 modulation from using equal transmit and receive rates Enable The modem operates in asymmetric rate mode the transmit and receive rates can be different when running V 34 modulation The Asymmetric Rate configuration option must be enabled in both modems Disable The modem operates in symmetric rate mode the transmit and receive rates are identical when running V 34 modulation Either modem can force symmetric mode by disabling the Asymmetric Rate configuration option The AT command is S Register 514 where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable 4 52 November 1996 39
247. ion option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is not configured for DirectMode Send Break Control Determines what is sent from the modem first data or break if a break sequence is sent from the DTE Data First Nonexpedited A break is treated as a data character and is sent in the order it was received This is also known as Nonexpedited mode Break First Expedited A break is sent before the data currently in the buffer This is also known as Expedited mode NOTE This configuration option is ignored if the Break Forces Escape configuration option refer to the DTE Dialer configuration options group is enabled The AT commands for Break First are WO K1 and The AT commands for Data First are V4 and BuffrDiscDelay 10sec Nxt 10sec Disable 60sec This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is not configured for DirectMode Buffer Disconnect Delay Determines how long the modem continues to transmit data stored in its buffers when the modem is commanded to disconnect by a locally attached DTE This also applies to the modem s receiving buffers when it is commanded to disconnect from a remote modem or DTE Disable Modem disconnects immediately without attempting to send data stored in its buffers 10 60 sec Maximum amount of time the modem tries to empty its buffers before disconnec
248. ions The star symbol indicates configuration option groups which are valid in Multiport mode lt q The solid arrow indicates configuration option groups which are valid in Singleport mode Throughout these tables two selections frequently appear on the LCD Enable and Disable Unless otherwise stated Enable selects a configuration option and makes it available for use Disable makes a configuration option unavailable for use NOTE In some countries the range of allowable values for some configuration options is restricted The modem accepts any selection but sets the configuration option to the closest legal value The actual value accepted by the modem appears when the F2 key is pressed to enter a selection The remainder of this chapter discusses each Multiport and Singleport mode configuration option group in detail Multiport Mode The Multiport mode s configuration options are arranged by functionality into the following e DTE Interface Table 4 1 Line Dialer Table 4 2 e Dial Line Table 4 3 Leased Line Table 4 4 e Test Table 4 5 Misc Table 4 6 The following graphic represents the structure of the configuration options in Multiport mode 4 8 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Multiport Mode DTE Line Dial Leased Line Test Interface Dialer Line AutoAnswerRing Dial Modulation LeaseModulation Test Timeout Dialer Type Dial Line
249. isplays the DTE mode The letter A indicates the currently selected port is in Asynchronous mode and indicates the currently selected port is in Synchronous mode If the NMS channel is selected the letter in this location A or S will indicate the status of Port 1 The NMS channel is always in Asynchronous mode dd Displays the line mode The letters LA indicate Leased Answer mode LO indicate Leased Originate mode and D indicates Dial mode ee Displays the modem DTE port that currently appears by the EIA status indicators on the DCP CC indicates Control Channel DC indicates Diagnostic Channel P1 indicates Port 1 in Singleport mode The following only appear on the 392x multiport modem M1 indicates Port 1 when TDM MSD is enabled M2 indicates Port 2 when TDM MSD is enabled M3 indicates Port 3 when TDM MSD is enabled M4 indicates Port 4 when TDM MSD is enabled B1 indicates Port 1 when DTE Bridge is enabled B2 indicates Port 2 when DTE Bridge is enabled ffff Displays the modem s modulation scheme as shown below V34 indicates V 34 family modulation V32t indicates V 32 terbo modulation V32b indicates V 32bis modulation V32 indicates V 32 modulation TMp indicates Trellis Multipoint modulation V22b indicates V 22bis modulation V27b indicates V 27bis modulation V33 indicates V 33 modulation V29 indicates V 29 modulation V22 indicates V 22 modulation V23 indicates V 23 modulation V21 indicates V 21 modulation
250. ists To exit this function and remain in the PList Display branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the key The Clear function does not appear in Remote mode Clear deletes the modem s poll list To access Clear from the PList branch make the following selection Poll List gt A Display Clear Zx Select Clear The message Command Complete appears on the second line of the LCD to indicate that the poll list has been cleared To exit this function and remain in the PList branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the Zx key The Change function does not appear in Remote mode Change allows you to change the modem s poll list To access Change from the PList branch make the following selections Poll List A Clear Change A 8 gt Press the key until Change appears Select Change Change allows you to add modems to the Active poll list Active delete modems from both Active and Skip poll lists Delete and move modems from the Active to the Skip poll list List Chang gt A Active Delete A L8 8 gt 3 32 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Add To implement Change select the appropriate function Active Delete or Skip For Skip you will need to press the gt key until Skip appears Poll List yyyyyy cs B TXXX A
251. ke the following selection Test A Hee Ex A 2 8 Select Self All LCD cells and DCP status indicators light NOTE The test delays 15 to 30 seconds to allow any outstanding network management messages to propagate before the VF channel is interrupted by the test If the modem passes the self test Pass appears on the LCD If it fails Failed appears If the modem fails contact your service representative If Invalid Command appears the modem is operating on dial lines If OtherTestActive appears another test is in progress If another test is in progress select Abort to clear the current test and try again If the modem is operating on dial lines disconnect to clear the dial lines and then choose Self If the modem receives a ring signal during this test the test is canceled and RI Abort message appears To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the key 3 56 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Loc Analog Loop This test is not available when using V 34 modulation in Multiport mode Loc Analog Loop performs a local analog loopback CCITT V 54 Loop 3 Figure 3 4 that verifies modem operation as well as the connection between the DTE and modem The modem must be offline and in Synchronous or Asynchronous Direct mode to perform this test otherwise Invalid Command appears NOTE If
252. known as crossover cables do not work in this application Verify that the Command Character Echo configuration option is enabled Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 4 Verify that the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to AT Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 4 Verify that the Result Codes configuration option is enabled Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 4 Reload the Async Dial factory configuration area to guarantee that all configuration options are returned to their proper setting Make sure that all AT commands are terminated with a carriage return Verify that the Carriage Return Character configuration option matches what is used by the DTE Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 4 Verify that the DTE has a valid character format Valid format consists of 8 data bits with no parity or 7 data bits with even odd mark or space parity Verify that the DTE s data rate is supported by the modem Refer to the Async DTE Rate configuration option in the DTE Interface section of Chapter 4 If using a PC verify that the modem is attached to the correct communications port 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 B 3 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table B 5 1 of 2 Modem VF Connection Symptom Action The modem does not receive a dial tone Attach a telephone directly to the telephone line to verify that a dial tone exists Make sure the VF line is connected to the modem s rear jack labeled DIAL The m
253. l 3921 256 Modem DC 3920 or NMS CC 3921 0 On Until Carrier Medium Enable 00000000 Disable Call Connect amp Progress Trib tmp trib or Control tmp control 256 Disable trib or NMS CC control 0 On Until Carrier Medium Enable 00000000 Disable Call Connect amp Progress Trib 3920 or Control 3921 256 Modem DC 3920 or NMS CC 3921 On Until Carrier Medium Enable 00000000 Disable Call Connect amp Progress Trib 3920 or Control 3921 256 Modem DC 3920 or NMS CC 3921 Table F 1 9 0 10 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial ion Default Default Default Default Default Default p Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Test DTE RL Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable CT140 x DTE LL Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable CT141 X Test Timeout Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Receive Remote Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Loopback V 54 Address Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable V 54 Device Peripheral Peripheral Peripheral Peripheral Peripheral Peripheral Type Misc Straps When No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change Disconnect On Until Carrier Medium Enable 00000000 Di
254. l Connecting CNX Call Failure Indication CFI The CFI response is issued to the DTE if the modem fails a CRN or CRS command CFI is similar to the AT result codes BUSY NO ANSWER NO CARRIER NO DIALTONE and ERROR The CFI response format is CFIxx Where xx is ET Engaged tone NS Number not stored CB Local DCE busy RT Time out on ring tone AB Abort call on time out NT Answer tone not detected FC Forbidden call D 2 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 CCITT V 25bis Dialing ET is similar to the Call Failure Messages Busy Signal and Trunk Busy and the result code BUSY NS is similar to the Common Operational Message Invalid Number and the result code ERROR CB is similar to the Call Failure Messages Dial Line in Use and No Dial Test and the result code ERROR RT is similar to the Call Failure Message No Answer Tone and the result code NO CARRIER AB is similar to the Call Failure Messages No Dial Tone and No Dial DTR and the result code NO DIALTONE and ERROR NT is similar to the Call Failure Message No Quiet Answer and the result code NO ANSWER Call Connecting CNX The CNX response informs the DTE that the modem has connected to the remote modem CNX is similar to the AT result code CONNECT The CNX response format is CNX Delayed Call Indicator The DLC response is issued to the DTE if the modem is not currently allowed to call the number DLC is similar to the AT result code DELAYED The DLC
255. l disconnect since the other modem receives advance notice of a disconnection Enable Use this setting if the DTE requires that the modem be made available as soon as possible after receiving a disconnect command NOTE This abrupt method of disconnecting may cause problems with the remote modem which may interpret the disconnection as an error instead of a valid disconnect The AT command is S Register S85 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable Line Crnt Disc Enab gt 8msec Nxt Enab gt 8msec Enab gt 90msec Disable This configuration option does not appear on Models 3920 1 401 and 3921 Plus B1 001 Line Current Disconnect Determines the modem s response to short interruptions of line current The loss of line current is one method of disconnecting a call Enable gt 8 millisecond Disconnects the modems if line current is disrupted for more than 8 milliseconds Enable 90 millisecond Disconnects the modems if line current is disrupted for more than 90 milliseconds Use this setting if the modem constantly disconnects when set to Enab gt 8msec Disable Ignores any disruptions in line current such as call waiting The AT command is S Register S65 n where n is 0 for Enable gt 8 msec 1 for Enable gt 90 msec and 2 for Disable 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 47 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 9 3 of 4 Line Dialer Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt
256. l quality appears on the LCD s bottom line If the modem is not receiving a signal the message No Signal appears Press the gt key to scroll and view the VF conditions Not all conditions are available at 4800 bps NOTE SigQual RevLevel Sig Noise NrEchLvl FarEchLvl FarEchDel Signal Quality displays the condition of the VF line Possible values are Excelent Excellent Good Fair Poor or No Signal These parameters appear for V 34 V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations Receive Signal Level displays in decibels referenced to one milliwatt dBm the actual strength of the incoming signal This parameter appears for V 34 V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 and Trellis Multipoint modulations Signal to Noise Ratio displays in decibels the receive signal strength relative to noise on the line This parameter appears for V 34 V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 and Trellis Multipoint modulations Near End Echo Level displays the signal level in decibels referenced to one milliwatt dBm of that portion of the transmit signal which has been echoed back by the local line termination This parameter appears for V 34 V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations in 2 wire only Far End Echo Level displays the signal level in decibels referenced to one milliwatt dBm of that portion of the transmit signal which has been echoed back by the remote line termination This parameter appears for V 34 V 32 terbo V 32bi
257. le of transferring data to the selected port The selected port is one of the mux ports 1 2 3 or 4 or the Network Management System NMS diagnostic interface 3920Plus only For example when the selected port is Port 1 of the mux the EIA indicators for TXD RXD RTS CTS DSR DTR and LSD will indicate the status of the EIA signals on the Port 1 interface of the multiplexer For information about making this selection refer to the Control Branch section of this chapter To display the port which has been selected refer to the Quick Configuration Display section of this chapter The SDCP LEDs are listed and described in Table 3 2 Table 3 2 SDCP LEDs Label Color Indicates OK green Power is ON and the modem is capable of operating Alarm red The selected modem detects a problem with its operation For example the modem failed a self test BckUp yellow The selected modem is operating on the backup network dial or dual leased Test yellow The selected modem is involved in a test Normal operation is not possible EC green The selected modem is in V 42 MNP Error Control mode 3 6 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Diagnostic Control Panel Operation The 392xPlus modem s diagnostic control panel DCP is the user interface to all functions used to configure and control the modem In addition to the status LEDs this interface includes the liquid crystal display LCD and keyp
258. led LEASED Figure 2 1 2 Insert the other end of the modular cord into the leased line network interface 3 If the Model 3920Plus has a backup line follow the steps listed in the Dial Backup Connection section Dial Connection The telephone company provides the line termination jacks for the permissive service you request Advance coordination with the telephone company is suggested when connecting the modem to telephone dial lines PSTN In the Permissive mode the modem s transmit output level is fixed at 9 dBm The telephone company assumes that the line loss is 3 dB and no compensation is provided for additional losses A Permissive mode telephone line is usually terminated with a USOC RJ11C jack Leased Backup Connection Use the following steps to connect the modem to the 2 wire leased backup network interface 1 Insert the 8 position 8 conductor modular plug into the jack labeled DIAL Figure 2 1 2 Insert the other end of the modular cord into the leased line network interface Dial Backup Connection Use the following steps to connect the modem to the dial network interface 1 Insert the 6 position 4 conductor modular plug into the jack labeled DIAL Figure 2 1 2 Insert the other end of the modular cord into the dial network interface 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 2 5 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Network Management System Connection Use the following steps to connect the modem to the network manag
259. lone operation If the message Trib List Empty appears this indicates that a multiple download was never initiated MPtCloneResults A Nxt XXX Pass 2 a re 8 gt The address field xxx displays the network management address of one of the remote modems Pressing the F1 key allows you to select various remote modems to determine the download result for those modems Pass or Fail 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 47 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Implementing a Clone Remote Operation WARNING The modem begins a transfer of its own program to the remote modem This process takes the communication link out of service for a period of time depending on the data rate of the link If the Clone Remote process is started and then interrupted the remote modem is left in a partially programmed state in which its functional capabilities are limited to those required to initiate and complete another download attempt If the mux is enabled when the Clone Remote process is interrupted disable the mux on the source modem before you initiate another Clone Remote process Be sure to re enable the mux when cloning is complete Warning Download A Re lt m e nj gt At this point if you do not want to continue this process abort the transfer by selecting any function key This returns the modem to the DwnLoadSoftware menu However to continue with the transfer
260. lowed by pressing the Return key Answer A Answer Mode Goes off hook and attempts to establish a connection without None waiting for a ring Dn Dial Begins the dialing sequence The dial string n modifiers and telephone None 5 6 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 5 2 2 of 9 392xPlus AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence DS n Dial Stored Number Dials the number stored in Location n 1 24 To store a Call Setup Dial telephone number refer to the amp Zn x command Dial Directory En Command Character Echo Configure Edit EO Disables echo to the DTE DLE Dialer E1 Enables echo to the DTE Hn Hook Switch Control HO Call Setup HO Modem goes on hook Disconnect or Control Remove H1 Modem goes off hook Make Busy H1 Control Make Busy In Identification Status Identity 10 Displays product code 144 I Displays 3 digit firmware revision number I2 Performs an EPROM check Ln Speaker Volume Control Speaker LO Selects low volume L1 Selects low volume Be L2 Selects medium volume L3 Selects high volume Mn Speaker On Off Control Speaker MO Speaker always OFF Mes ra M1 Speaker ON until carrier signal is detected M2 Speaker always ON Return to Online or Data Mode Returns modem to Data mode from Online None Command mode P Pulse Dial Sets the modem for Pulse Dial mode Configure Edit NOTE P
261. lt codes are informational messages such as Connect and Ring sent from the modem and displayed on the asynchronous DTE terminal For a list of Result Codes refer to Table 5 1 in Chapter 5 AT Commands and S Registers Enable Modem sends result codes to the DTE Disable Modem does not send result codes to the DTE Enable in Originate For UNIX applications enable result codes only on the originating modem This prevents the DTE on the answer side from interpreting result codes as login attempts The AT command for Enable is QO The AT command for Disable is Q1 The AT command for Enable in Originate mode is Q2 ExtendResltCode Enable Nxt Enable Disable Add EC Add V42 MNP Use DTE Rate This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Extended Result Codes Informational messages such as VF data rate and Error Control appear along with the result codes For a list of Extended Result Codes refer to Table 5 1 in Chapter 5 AT Commands and S Registers Enable NO DIALTONE BUSY NO ANSWER and CONNECT xxxx xxxx VF data rate appear along with result codes listed in Table 5 1 in Chapter 5 Disable Only OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER and ERROR result codes appear Add EC Places the EC suffix after the result code text if error control is used For example CONNECT 9600 EC Add V 42 or MNP Places either the V 42 or MNP suffix after the result code text if data compressio
262. m s Access from Remote configuration option is disabled then the status message Access Disabled appears on the LCD If a connection is established but the wrong password is stored the status message Password Invalid appears on the LCD This configuration option must be enabled by the remote user Refer to the Remote Access Password configuration option in Chapter 4 The remote mode command displays Other Test Active if an Analog Loopback test is currently running 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 79 DCP Operation Diagnostic Control Panel Access NOTE This page of the manual is self supporting and can be removed to prevent unwanted knowledge of the DCP security access selections Use the DCP security access function to lock the DCP of any 392xPlus modem and prevent unwanted user access Two options are available for this function Grant and Deny Grant allows any branch of the Top Level menu to be accessed from the DCP Deny only allows access to the Status branch of the Top Level menu All 392xPlus modems are shipped from the factory with DCP access granted To access the Front Panel DCP Security Access function perform the following Press the A key three times Press 2 key twice Press the A key once Frnt Panl Acces CA ET Deny A L8 L8 Select Grant to allow access or select Deny to lock DCP access Either selection results in a return to the To
263. ms Table 5 1 2 of 2 Result Codes e jos Word Description 22 12 CONNECT 9600 EC Connection at 9600 bps with error control 23 16 CONNECT 12000 EC Connection at 12 000 bps with error control 24 13 CONNECT 14400 EC Connection at 14 400 bps with error control 25 17 CONNECT 16800 EC Connection at 16 800 bps with error control 26 15 CONNECT 7200 EC Connection at 7200 bps with error control 27 5 CONNECT 1200 EC Connection at 1200 bps with error control 28 28 CONNECT 38400 Connection at 38 400 bps 29 14 CONNECT 19200 EC Connection at 19 200 bps with error control 30 30 CONNECT 57600 Connection at 57 600 bps 37 37 CONNECT 21600 Connection at 21 600 bps 38 38 CONNECT 24000 Connection at 24 000 bps 39 39 CONNECT 26400 Connection at 26 400 bps 40 40 CONNECT 28800 Connection at 28 800 bps 41 41 CONNECT 31200 Connection at 31 200 bps 42 42 CONNECT 33600 Connection at 33 600 bps 43 43 CONNECT 21600 EC Connection at 21 600 bps with error control 44 44 CONNECT 24000 EC Connection at 24 000 bps with error control 45 45 CONNECT 26400 EC Connection at 26 400 bps with error control 46 46 CONNECT 28800 EC Connection at 28 800 bps with error control 47 47 CONNECT 31200 EC Connection at 31 200 bps with error control 48 48 CONNECT 33600 EC Connection at 33 600 bps with error control 77 77 FORBIDDEN amp Forbidden number 78 7
264. munications network protective operational and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone line and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate The Load Number is l
265. n Factory default settings are listed in Appendix E Table 4 13 1 of 2 Test Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt DTE RL CT140 Disable Nxt Disable Enable DTE Remote Loopback Controls the use of Pin 21 of the EIA 232 D CCITT V 24 interface by the DTE to initiate a remote loopback An Abort command or test time out ends this test Enable The DTE forces the modem into remote loopback when the signal on Pin 21 CCITT 140 is turned ON Remote Loop ends when the signal is dropped Disable The DTE does not initiate remote loopback in response to the signal on Pin 21 The AT command is S Register 51 where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable DTE LL CT141 Disable Nxt Disable Enable DTE Local Loopback Controls the use of Pin 18 of the EIA 232 D CCITT V 24 interface by the DTE to initiate a local loopback An Abort command or test time out ends this test Enable The DTE forces the modem into local loopback when the signal on Pin 18 CCITT 141 is turned ON Local loopback ends when the signal is dropped Disable The DTE will not initiate local loopback in response to the signal on Pin 18 The AT command is S Register S52 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable Test Timeout Disable Nxt Disable 30sec 60sec 240sec Test Time out Determines how long a test runs before aborting Disable Allows a test to run indefinitely 30 60 or 240 seconds Allows the test to run for 30 seconds 6
266. n is used For example CONNECT 9600 V42b Use DTE Rate Allows the DTE rate to be displayed in the Connect message instead of the line rate This feature is required in some modem pooling applications NOTE NO DIALTONE is valid only if Dial Tone Detect configuration option is enabled BUSY appears if Busy Detect configuration option is enabled The AT command for Disable is XO The AT commands for Enable are X1 X2 X3 or X4 The AT command for Add EC is X5 The AT command for Add V42 MNP is X6 The AT command for Use DTE Rate is X7 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 43 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 8 4 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt ResultCode Form Words Nxt Words Numbers 1 Numbers 2 This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Result Codes Format Controls whether or not result codes appear as words or as numeric codes Some DTEs do not recognize Result Codes as words therefore numbers are required The Numbers 2 format is required for some modem pooling applications For a list of Result Codes refer to Table 5 1 in Chapter 5 AT Commands and S Registers The AT command for Numbers 1 is VO The AT command for Words format is V1 The AT command for Numbers 2 is V2 AT Cmnd Mode Normal Nxt Normal No_ERROR NoStrapOrERR This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT AT C
267. nable Disable Dial Tone Detect Sets the modem for dial tone detection enable or blind dialing disable Enable Modem disconnects the call if a dial tone is not detected within 10 seconds and displays No Dial Tone on both the LCD and asynchronous DTE terminal Disable Modem dials a call whether or not it detects a dial tone on the line This is known as blind dialing The period of time the modem waits before dialing is specified in the Blind Dial Paus configuration option NOTE It may not be possible to disable Dial Tone Detect in some countries The AT commands for Disable are X1 and X3 The AT commands for Enable are X2 X4 X5 X6 and X7 Blind Dial Paus 2sec Nxt 2sec 4sec 6sec 8sec 10sec 20sec This configuration option only appears when Dial Tone Detect is configured for Disable Blind Dial Pause Determines how long the modem waits before dialing a telephone number when Dialtone Detect is disabled NOTE The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries The AT command is S Register S6 n where n is from 2 to 255 in 1 second increments 4 46 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 9 2 of 4 Line Dialer Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt BusyTone Detect Enable Nxt Enable Disable Busy Tone Detect Sets the modem to monitor for Busy Tone Enable or ignore Busy Tone Disable NOTE This configuration option is normally enabled ho
268. nal is being received Streaming DTE The modem is in an antistreaming condition The RTS input to the modem was held ON for a period exceeding the time selected by the RTS Antistream configuration option Refer to the DTE Interface section in Chapter 4 for a description of the RTS Antistream configuration option Access Security A dial access security alarm is active Refer to the Security section of this table for dial access security conditions Minor VF Threshold One or more of the analog parameter thresholds have been exceeded The probable cause is poor line conditions or improper threshold settings Thresholds may be set through the DCP or NMS commands DTE Alarm One or more of the DTE signals on one or more of the DTE ports are in alarm mode Refer to the Port 1 2 3 4section of this table for DTE alarm conditions Rate Fallback Due to poor line conditions the modem s transmit rate is below the configured rate Refer to the Leased Line and Dial Line sections in Chapter 4 for a description of configuration options affecting rate 3 18 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Table 3 6 2 of 3 Health and Status Messages Type Message Indicates Status Subtree Truncate Downstream health and status information has been truncated because it overflowed system limits There is a large amount of health and status information in the subnetwork Test Mode
269. nchronous operation over leased or dial lines networks with data rates as high as 33 600 bps Through downloading capability any 392xPlus modem is upgradable to the latest firmware requiring no new hardware investment or on site personnel with little or no downtime refer to Chapter 3 DCP Operations for more information regarding downloading options The 392xPlus modems support a wide range of modulation schemes and offer control using either AT commands the diagnostic control panel DCP or the optional COMSPHERE 6700 and 6800 Series Network Management Systems NMS The NMS performs extensive monitoring testing reporting and restoral functions to assist in managing your network The 392xPlus modems are compatible with a number of dialing methods and protocols such as asynchronous AT commands CCITT V 25bis dialing and the DCP The DCP allows you to use the 392xPlus modem in a variety of applications and environments while also providing control over modem configuration dialing and diagnostics The 392xPlus modems come with preset factory configurations that are the most often used modem settings 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 1 1 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems COMSPHERE 392xPlus Models The COMSPHERE 392xPlus modem is available in the following four models e Model 3920Plus standalone singleport modem model 3920 A1 41x e Model 3920Plus standalone multiport modem model no 3920 1 40x e Model 59
270. ndependent data streams into a single high speed data stream A circuit connecting one control modem with one or more tributary modems Multiport mode operates only in multiport modems It is determined by your modem model and the selected MUX mode configuration option Multiport mode is in effect when the MUX mode configuration option is set to TDM MSD or DTE Bridge It supports from one to four ports depending on how the modem is further configured Glossary 6 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Glossary network network management address NIM non linear distortion NMS off hook on hook Originate mode parity PBX permissive interface phase jitter physical address point to point line poll list power up self test product code protocol PSTN Quick Configuration display A communications circuit The customer assigned diagnostic address of a modem Network Interface Module The interface provided up to two per carrier for the public switched telephone network PSTN VF line distortion which is usually associated with pulse code modulation PCM compandor noise on the phone line Network Management System A set of diagnostic and configuration management tools for a data communication network consisting of software programs and dedicated computer hardware A telephone or modem is being used A telephone or modem is not being used The modem is in a state where it is ready to transmit a
271. nfiguration area The LCD displays Command Complete 7 The modem is now configured with the selected factory template Press the 2 key to return to the Top Level menu Refer to Chapter 4 DCP Configuration for more information regarding default factory configuration options 2 12 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation ils AE 3 2 Didenostic Control Panels nce detached OE A Ren pce ors 3 2 Model 3920Plus Diagnostic Control Panel 3 3 Model 3921Plus Faceplate and Shared Diagnostic Control Panelh SDCP utter mre atero Ree 3 3 Status Incl cator i see to redes ee de ese rece 3 3 Diagnostic Control Panel Operation lt s essere RR eR ne eee 3 7 CVD SG ATE 3 7 Hidden Choice Indicators etd Rer ae ae 3 7 Other Indicators cce RR mh RR Rr Ree 3 8 Keypad he RR IEEE eR E Gea 3 8 Menu SUCUS coke dee wed dew eg ede Get ease rom aeo 3 9 Top Level Menu Status and Operational Messages 3 11 Quick Configuration Display secs coke hor perpe E RRYERS 3 15 oras Bfaneli ua neben CR act E PR pcd rte 3 17 Device Health and Status DeviceHS csse bx ess 3 18 beets nals der rei ded b E 3 20 Displaymg VF Conditions 3 21 Clearing VP COUMEIS oreesy seas E ER UNS 3 22 Identity Xie ed 3 23 MERC TTE 3 24 pusr Wc MM Mcr 3 2
272. ng exception Rate Refer to Sample Port Rate Table in this section G 2 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Sample Configurations Sample Port Rate Table Cables Cable 1 Cable 2 oe Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4 28 8K 9600 9600 4800 4800 24 0K 9600 Disable 4800 4800 19 2K 9600 Disable 4800 4800 16 8K 9600 Disable Disable 4800 14 4K 9600 Disable Disable 4800 12 0K Disable Disable Disable 4800 9 6K Disable Disable Disable 4800 7 2K Disable Disable Disable 4800 4 8K Disable Disable Disable 4800 2 4K Disable Disable Disable Disable Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTF1 2 3 or 4 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Extended Point to Point Figure G 2 shows a sample configuration for extended point to point applications 28800 V34 28800 V34 9600 gt TX 9600 DTE Sync pre 2999 I j Syne 4800 3920Plus 3920Plus B 3 E ii 9600 DTE 4800 Sync
273. nication NOTE For Automatic Dial Standby to operate properly it must be enabled prior to a backup occurring The AT command is S Register S47 n where n is 0 for Disable 1 for 15min 2 for 1hr 3 for 4hrs 4 for Test 2min 5 for Adv 15min 6 for Adv 30min 7 for Adv 1 hr and 8 for TestAdv2min 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 55 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 11 4 of 5 Leased Line Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt SpecialStandby Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option only appears when Automatic Dial Standby is configured for 15min 1hr 4hr or Test 2min and Leased mode is configured for Originate mode or when Automatic Dial Standby is configured for Adv15min Adv30min Advthr or TestAdv 2min Special Standby Used to support Automatic Dial Standby configurations when a third modem is used for the dial backup When the leased line is restored the Special Standby configuration allows the leased line modems to return service to the original point to point modems NOTE When the modems are set for normal dial standby 15min 1hr 4hr or Test 2min the Special Standby configuration option allows the originate modem to test the lease connection in one direction before interrupting primary data on the dial lines NOTE When the modems are set for advanced dial standby Adv15min Adv 30min Adv1hr or Adv Test 2min the Special Standby configuration option allows a non interrupti
274. nize Tone DTMF dial Any digit 0 9 or can be dialed as tone Pulse dial Only the digits 0 9 can be dialed in Pulse Dial mode Once a dialing method tone or pulse has been specified it will only remain active until the end of that dial string The modem defaults to the value set by the Dialer Type configuration option Pause Causes the modem to pause before processing the next character in the dial string The length of this pause is determined by the setting of the Pause Time configuration option refer to the Line Dialer configuration option group or by the value held in S Register S8 Wait for tone dial The modem waits for a second dial tone before processing the dial string This can be the initial dial tone or can be used when dialing through a tandem PBX Reverse Dial mode Causes the originating modem to send out an answertone once it no longer detects ringback Ringback is the ring you hear at the originating site when making a call The R modifier must be the last character in the dial string Quiet answer Wait for five seconds of silence after dialing the number If the silence is not detected the modem sends the NO ANSWER result code to the DTE or displays the No Quiet Answer LCD status message Hook flash Causes the modem to go on hook for 0 5 seconds then return to off hook Return to Command mode Causes the modem to return to Command mode after dialing a number without disconnecting the call Ignored by
275. nnect N3 MNP or Buffer N4 V 42 MNP or Disconnect N5 V 42 MNP or Buffer N6 LAPM or Disconnect N7 LAPM or Buffer Qn Flow Control of DTE Flow Control of Modem Configure Edit V42 MNP Buffer Flow Control Flow Control of DTE of Modem Q0 Disable Disable XON XOFF XON XOFF Q2 CTS to DTE Disable Q3 CTS to DTE RTS to Mdm Q4 XON XOFF Disable Q5 Disable XON XOFF Q6 Disable RTS to Mdm Tn No Data Disconnect Timer Configure Edit Disable Pile Dialer Tn Where nis a value from 1 to 255 in 1 minute increments NOTE The factory default value is country dependent Xn XON XOFF Passthrough Flow Control Configure Edit X0 Disable V42 MNP Buffer X1 Enable Error Control Fallback Character Configure Edit An Where nis an ASCII value from 0 to 127 Factory default is 013 NENT BUNCE ASCII MNP5 Data Compression Configure Edit Disable V42 MNP Buffer C1 Enable Hn V 42bis Compression Configure Edit Disable V42 MNP Buffer H1 Enable Transmit TX only H2 Enable Receive RX only H3 Enable Transmit TX and Receive RX 5 14 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 AT Command Set and S Registers S Register List S Registers affect the operating parameters of the 392xPlus modems S Registers are only applicable when the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set for AT Refer to the amp Mn and amp Qn commands Table 5 3 lists all S Registers supported by the
276. ntistreaming control takes effect CTS Control Stndrd RS232 Nxt Stndrd RS232 Forced On WinkWhenDisc Follows DTR Follows RTS Clear to Send Control CTS is a signal from the modem to the DTE indicating that it can accept data from the DTE Standard RS232 In Synchronous mode forces the state of CTS to follow the state of RTS in normal EIA 232 D operation The minimum time that elapses between CTS and RTS is determined by the RTS CTS Delay configuration option Use this setting for most synchronous applications Forced On CTS is forced ON at all times Use this selection for most asynchronous applications Wink When Disconnect CTS is normally forced ON but is turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect Follows DTR The state of CTS follows the state of DTR When DTR turns ON CTS turns ON When DTR turns OFF CTS turns OFF Follows RTS The state of CTS follows the state of RTS When RTS turns ON CTS turns ON When RTS turns OFF CTS turns OFF 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 15 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 1 7 of 9 DTE Interface Configuration Options Multiport Mode x RTS CTS Delay Omsec Nxt Omsec 10msec 50msec 150msec 600msec 5 Request to Send Clear to Send Delay RTS CTS Delay sets the delay time between the modem receiving RTS from the DTE and the modem sending CTS to the DTE NOTE This delay is only valid in applications when it is necessary to have a short delay between the t
277. ntrol at 7 2 kbps tributaries at 7 2 or 4 8 kbps control at 4 8 kbps tributaries at 4 8 or 2 4 kbps control at 2 4 kbps tributaries at 2 4 kbps Tributary rates will never exceed control rates If tributary and control rates are equal reducing the control rate will automatically reduce the tributary rate 2400 V22bis This modulation scheme is available on 2 wire and 4 wire leased lines 14400 V33 12000 V33 These modulation schemes are only available on 4 wire leased lines 9600 V29 7200 V29 4800 V29 These modulation schemes are only available on 4 wire leased lines 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 53 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 11 2 of 5 Leased Line Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt LeasedLine Rate 28800 V34 Cont 4800 V27bis 2400 V27bis This modulation scheme is available on 2 wire half duplex and 4 wire leased lines NOTE It is recommended that both modems use the same fixed data rate NOTE The modem must be in Direct mode before the modulation scheme can be changed from V 32bis V 34 family or TMp to another leased line modulation V 33 V 29 or V 22bis See Err Contrl Mode configuration option for more about Direct mode On leased lines V 42 error control and Buffer mode are only supported by V 32bis V 34 family or TMp An error occurs if the modem is not in Direct mode when the modulation is changed from V 32bis V 34 family or TMp The AT command is S
278. numbers stores in directory locations 1 24 amp VO Active Operating configuration options amp V1 Active Saved configuration options amp V2 Customer 1 configuration options amp V3 Customer 2 configuration options amp V4 Directory locations 1 24 amp Wn Write Save to Memory Saves the current configuration options in Active Configure Save Operating to one of three configuration areas amp WO Saved to Active Save amp W1 Saved to Customer 1 amp W2 Saved to Customer 2 amp Xn Transmit Clock Source Configure Edit amp X0 Internal Modem provides transmit clock source for synchronous data 15 amp 1 External Modem derives external transmit clock source provided Pin 24 for synchronous data amp X2 Receive Clock Loop Modem derives transmit clock source from 5 12 November 1996 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 5 2 8 of 9 392xPlus AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence amp Zn x Store Telephone Numbers Modem saves the telephone numbers and dial Call Setup command modifiers if any entered for x up to 40 characters in length in Change Directory Directory Location n 1 24 For example the command AT amp Z1 5551234 stores the telephone number 555 1234 into directory location 1 To clear a telephone number from a memory location issue the amp Zn x command without entering a telephone number
279. o the Speaker Control and Speaker Volume configuration option settings Speaker Volume Medium Nxt Medium Low High Speaker Volume Controls the level of speaker volume NOTE Speaker Volume can also be temporarily set using the Control branch however a reset or power cycle will restore the modem to the Speaker Control and Speaker Volume configuration option settings Access frm Remt Enable Nxt Enable Disable Access from Remote Determines if your modem s DCP can be accessed by a remote modem via the VF line CAUTION If this configuration option is disabled the modem cannot be accessed by another modem Enable Allows access from a remote modem Disable Does not allow access from a remote modem NOTE The remote modem must be a 392xPlus modem or a 391x Series modem RemAccssPasswrd 00000000 Nxt 1 00000000 Remote Access Password Allows the entry of a password for establishing control of a remote modem from the DCP of a local modem The same password must be used in both the local and remote modem CAUTION A remote access password should be selected for security purposes NOTE If the Access from Remote configuration option is set to Disable the password has no effect 4 28 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 6 2 of 3 Miscellaneous Configuration Options Multiport Mode gt Dir 1_Callback Disable Nxt Disable Enable Directory Location 1 Callback This confi
280. o the modem whether the DTE is using ASCII code or EBCDIC code for V 25bis commands The modem responds to the DTE using the same coding The AT command is S Register S62 n where n is 0 for ASCII or 1 for EBCDIC 4 44 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 8 5 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt V25bis IdleFill Mark Nxt Mark Flag This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer is configured for V 25bis HDLC V 25bis Idle Fill Determines whether a mark or flag is used as an idle fill character for the DTE The modem responds to the DTE using the same idle fill The AT command is S Register S63 n where n is 0 for Mark or 1 for Flag V25b NewLineChr CR LF End CR LF CR LF This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer is configured for V 25bis Async V 25bis New Line Character Sets the modem for the command line terminator used by the DTE in V 25bis Async mode The modem responds to the DTE using the same line terminator The AT command is S Register S64 n where n is 0 for carriage return and line feed 1 for carriage return or 2 for line feed 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 45 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Line Dialer Singleport Mode lt The Line Dialer configuration options establish parameters used by the modem to answer or originate calls Table 4 9 shows each Line Dialer configuration option as it appears
281. oblem occurs on the primary leased line the modems establish a connection over the backup network Call Setup A Dial Standby A Fs gt When this occurs the Dial Standby function appears on the LCD If you select Dial Standby the modem switches back to the primary leased line while still maintaining the backup connection As a result the Return_to_Dial function appears on the LCD instead of Dial Standby Call Setup A CENT L8 85 If the primary leased line is unacceptable select Return to Dial which switches the modem back to backup network operation LCD displays Dial Standby If however the primary leased line is operating properly you can select Disconnect from the Call Setup branch to drop the dial backup connection Also if the primary leased line operation is maintained uninterrupted amount of time specified in the Dial Standby configuration option the dial backup network disconnected To access Dial Standby or Return to Dial from the Call Setup branch make the following selections Call Setup A Es Standby CA 2 n gt Press the gt key until Dial Standby or Return to Dial appears Select the appropriate function Dial Standby A Command Complete A nj If the modem is operating in a Dial Backup mode the Dial Standby function forces the modem
282. odem does not go off hook and answer an incoming call Verify that the Auto Answer Ring Count configuration option is set to a value other than 0 disable Refer to Line Dialer in Chapter 4 Verify that the DTE is providing DTR to the modem If the DTE does not provide DTR to the modem verify that the modem s DTR Action configuration option is set for Ignore Refer to DTE Interface in Chapter 4 Verify that all cables are attached to the correct connectors on the rear of the modem The modem goes off hook answers but does not connect Perform a Local Analog Loopback test and verify that data entered at the DTE is echoed back to the DTE Verify that the originating modem is compatible with your receiving modem Verify that the originating modem recognizes your modem s answer tone Verify that the originating modem supports your modem s modulation schemes The 392xPlus modem recognizes CCITT V 34 V 32bis V 32 V 22bis V 22 V 21 Bell 212A and Bell 103J The 392xPlus modem does not support other vendors proprietary modulation schemes Force your modem to operate at the same modulation scheme as the originating modem to see if they connect The Originate Mode does not function properly Verify that the modem s DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to the correct setting either AT DTR Dialing V 25bis Async V 25bis Bisync or V 25bis HDLC Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 4 The modem does not go off hook
283. ommand Mode Determines how the modem responds to valid and invalid AT commands Normal Allows normal operation of the AT command set The modem acts upon all valid AT commands and issues the ERROR result code for invalid commanas If a string with multiple commands is entered then an invalid command within that string will prevent the execution of subsequent valid commands No ERROR Operates similar to Normal mode however the modem does not issue an ERROR result code for invalid commands When an invalid command is encountered the modem ignores it and issues the OK result code If a string with multiple commands is entered then an invalid command within that string will not prevent the execution of subsequent valid commands No Strap or ERROR Ignores all AT commands including valid commands that cause a configuration option to change Only non configuring commands for example ATD ATA and ATI are executed the ERROR result code is never returned NOTE Since this configuration option affects AT commands it cannot be changed by the AT amp F command However it can be changed by selecting a factory preset configuration via the DCP The AT command is S Register S84 n where n is 0 or 231 for Normal 1 or 232 for No ERROR and 2 or 233 for No Strap or ERROR V25bis Coding ASCII Nxt ASCII EBCDIC This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer is configured for V 25bis HDLC or V 25bis Bsync V 25bis Coding Identifies t
284. on linear Dist The non linear distortion exceeded the threshold Retrains The number of retrains exceeded the threshold Signal Quality The signal quality is less than the threshold Far Echo Threshd The far end echo level exceeded the threshold Near Echo Thresh The near end echo level exceeded the threshold Phase Jitter The phase jitter level exceeded the threshold Phase Hit Thresh The number of phase hits has exceeded the threshold Impulses Hit The number of impulse hits exceeded the threshold Gain Hit Threshld The number of gain hits exceeded the threshold Drop Outs Thresh The number of drop outs exceeded the threshold Frequency Offset The frequency offset level exceeded the threshold Not supported in every modulation 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 19 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 3 6 3 of 3 Health and Status Messages Type Message Indicates Security Database Reset The security database has been reset passwords erased Password Protect Security password protection is enabled Mode Change There has been a change in security mode Refer to Chapter 6 Dial Access Security Password Change A security password has been changed Database Change The security database containing passwords has been changed Ports 1 Rx Data Alarm The alarming DTE port s RXD signal is
285. on only appears when the Extended Main Channel is enabled Upstream Port When an extended control modem s main primary channel is connected to a tributary modem that is one link above it in the diagnostic network this configuration option is set to the port number to which it is connected on the tributary modem 4 40 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration DTE Dialer Singleport Mode lt The DTE Dialer configuration options establish the DTE to modem protocol for call establishment and control Table 4 8 shows each DTE Dialer configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Table 4 8 1 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt q DTE Dialer Type Disable Nxt Disable AT V25bis Async V25bis Bsync V25bis HDLC DTR Directi1 AT amp T Exclusv Data Terminal Equipment Dialer Type Identifies to the modem the type of dialing method and protocol used by the DTE Disable Disables any type of DTE dialing method Dialing can only be performed using the DCP s Dial command or attached telephone AT Allows AT command protocol to be used as a method for entering commands
286. on options are provided for Port 1 only Port 2 cannot be configured e Ports 3 and 4 are not available e Port related tests such as digital loopbacks and Pattern tests are available for Port 1 e DTE Status Health and Status and LED control are available for both Ports 1 and 2 The V 34 modulation capability is available in all 392xPlus modems In Singleport mode the V 34 modulation is compatible with other vendors modems that support the CCITT V 34 modulation The two top rates of 31 200 and 33 600 bps Paradyne however only function with other 392xPlus modems In Multiport mode the V 34 modulation will not operate at line rates of 31 200 26 400 and 21 600 bps and is only compatible with other 392xPlus modems 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 1 9 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Multiport Backup The CCITT standard for V 34 modulation includes dial or leased line operation For proper leased line operation one modem must be designated as the answer modem while the other modem must be designated as the originate modem The V 34 standard also includes asymmetric rates automatic adjustment of the transmit power level and automatic adjustment of the symbol baud rate for optimal data throughput These automatic adjustments are made during the training or modem synchronization phase via special line probing techniques that establish the top most viable rate of operation Due to these techniques true fixed rate operation of th
287. on options currently in use by the modem Any time a power cycle occurs or a reset is performed or a save is issued using the DCP this area is updated with the contents of Active Saved A nonvolatile configuration area containing the most recently saved configuration options Advanced Diagnostic protocol An enhanced diagnostic communication protocol used with the 6800 Series NMS and with certain DCP diagnostic functions See local analog loop A signal such as a voice that varies continuously The modem is in a state where it is ready to receive an incoming call This code American Standard Code for Information Interchange is a 7 bit code which establishes compatibility between data services ASCII is the standard for data transmission over telephone lines The ASCII code consists of 32 control characters nondisplayed and 96 displayed characters Refer to Appendix E A data transmission that is synchronized by a transmission start bit at the beginning of a character five to eight bits and one or more stop bits at the end A group of commands issued from an asynchronous DTE that allow control of the modem while in Command mode All commands must begin with the characters AT and end with a carriage return A prefix issued before every AT command except A and which identifies the DTE s data rate parity and character length The modem automatically determines the asynchronous DTE data rate when using AT commands
288. on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Table 4 9 1 of 4 Line Dialer Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt AutoAnswerRing 1 Nxt 1 Disable 2 4 6 8 10 Auto Answer Ring Count Determines the number of rings necessary before the answering modem answers an incoming call For example if this option is set to 2 then the answering modem answers after the second ring Disable If selected the modem must be answered using either the DCP s Answer command or Tlk Data function or via AT commands Refer to Talk Data in Chapter 3 DCP Operation for more on Manual Answer NOTE Although DCP selections are limited 1 2 4 6 8 or 10 values set by AT commands can display from 1 to 255 rings NOTE The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries The AT command for Disable is SO 0 The AT command is S Register SO n where n is a ring count from 1 to 255 Dialer Type Tone Nxt Tone Pulse Dialer Type Selects either tone DTMF dialing or pulse rotary dialing mode NOTE Pulse Mode is disabled in Denmark and Sweden The AT command for Tone is T The AT command for Pulse is P DialTone Detect Enable Nxt E
289. ondition To exit this function and remain in the Status branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key 3 24 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation V 34 When running V 34 modulation this function displays information about the modem s receiving and transmitting data rate symbol rate transmitting level and asymmetric rate The V 34 status display is available only when the modem is configured for V 34 modulation NOTE To access V 34 from the Status branch make the following selection CA Status Select V 34 CA Status V 34 TxRate xxxx Kbps Zx 2 8 gt If the modem is receiving a signal the signal quality appears on the second LCD line Press the key to scroll and view the V 34 modem receive rate symbol rate transmit rate and asymmetric If the modem is not receiving a signal the message No Sync appears TxRate RxRate SymbolRate TxLevel AsymRate Modem Transmit Rate indicates the rate at which the modem is transmitting data Possible values are 2400 4800 7200 9600 12 0 12 000 14 4 14 400 16 8 16 800 19 2 19 200 21 6 21 600 24 0 24 000 26 4 26 400 28 8 28 800 31 2 31 200 or 33 6 33 600 bps Modem Receive Rate indicates the rate at which the modem is receiving data Possible values are 2400 4800 7200 9600 12 0 12 000 14 4 14 400 16
290. ons Each TMp tributary modem must have a different network management address Refer to the Misc section in Chapter 4 for a description of the network management address NetMngmtAddress configuration option Over a diagnostic channel a tributary modem can communicate with control modems by using the control modem s network management address for polling In the poll list modems are listed as either Active or Skip Downstream modems in the Active poll list are polled by the modem Modems in the Skip poll list are passed over during the polling process but not deleted from the poll list Display allows you to view the modem s poll list To access Display from the PList branch make the following selection Poll List A 2 L8 8 8 gt Select Display NOTE If there are no modems in the poll list when you select Display the message Poll List Empty appears on the second line of the LCD d List Disp a Nxt XXX yyyyyy A 8 gt If there are modems in the poll list when you select Display XXX Displays the network management address of the modem in the poll list yyyyyy Displays either Active or Skip to indicate the poll list in which the network management address is included 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 31 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Clear Change Select Nxt to scroll through the entries in the Active or Skip poll l
291. ons of multipoint cloning operations Viewing DC Broadcast Clone Results Choose DLL Type E DC CloneResults 2 L8 L8 From the Choose DLL Type screen press the gt key until DC CloneResults appears to view the results of the last Broadcast clone operation If the message Trib List Empty appears this indicates that a multiple download was never initiated DC Clone Results A Nxt XXX A a re n The address field xxx displays the network management address of one of the remote modems Pressing the F1 key allows you to select various remote modems to determine the download result for those modems Pass or Fail 3 44 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Clone Remote in Multipoint Configurations A Trellis Multipoint TMp control modem can be used to download firmware to just one tributary modem Single or to all of its tributary modems Multiple NOTE A Trellis Multipoint TMp tributary modem cannot download firmware to its control modem To download firmware to a TMp control modem use a point to point dial connection an NMS or a PC controller Before using Clone Remote in multipoint configurations Single or Multiple perform the following e Make sure the 392xPlus modems have an established leased line connection using the Trellis Multipoint TMp modulation refer to the Leased Line section in Chapter 4 e Make su
292. ontrol or Buffer mode are enabled with V 32bis V 34 family or TMp on leased lines 4 58 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 12 2 of 6 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt Err Contrl Mode V 42 MNPorBfr Cont The AT command for Buffer Mode is NO The AT command for Direct Mode is N1 The AT command for MNP or Disconnect is N2 The AT command for MNP or Buffer is N3 The AT command for V42 MNP or Disconnect is N4 The AT command for VA2 MNP or Buffer is N5 The AT command for LAPM or Disconnect is N6 The AT command for LAPM or Buffer is N7 V42bis Compress Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is configured for VA2 MNPorBfr or V42 MNPorDsc V 42bis Data Compression Enables or disables V 42bis data compression Enable Data compression operates in both the transmit and receive directions This is the recommended setting for all applications Disable V 42bis data compression is disabled This is rarely needed because V 42bis data compression does not cause data expansion for compressed data The AT command for Disable is HO The AT command for Enable is H1 H2 or H3 MNP5 Compress Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is configured for
293. op Async DTE Rate BusyTone Detect V32bis Override V54 Address Asyn Data Bits Pause Time Leased Tx Level V54 Device Type Asyn Parity Bit NoAnswer Timout Asymmetric Rate Asyn Stop Bits Fast Disconnect Auto Dial Back DTR Action Line Crnt Disc AutoDialStandby DSR Control Long Space Disc SpecialStandby RTS Action No Carrier Disc DialStandbyTime RTS Antistream No Data Disc CarrierOn Level CTS Control Auto Make Busy V27bis Train RTS CTS Delay MakeBusyVia DTR V29 TrainOnData LSD Control V29 Retrain Tx Clock Source V29 Link Config Bakup TXCIk Src TMp Train Time XTXC Clamps TXC TMp TxPreemphis CT111 Rate Lease Lookback DTE Rate VF Dual Leased Ln Extend Main Ch BackupLine Check Upstream Port DTE Dial V 42 Misc Dialer Line MNP Buffer Dialer Dial Modulation Err Contrl Mode StrapsWhenDisc AT Escape Char Escape GuardTim BreakForceEscap CommandCharEcho CarriageRtn Char Backspace Char Linefeed Char Result Codes ExtendResltCode ResultCode Form AT Cmnd Mode V25bis Coding V25bis IdleFill V25b NewLineChr Does not appear on Singleport modems Dial Line Rate Automode Autorate V32bis Override Dial Tx Level V22b Guard Tone Train Time Asymmetric Rate V42bis Compress MNP5 Compress EC Negotiat Bfr EC Fallbck Char Flw Cntl of DTE Flw Cntl of Mdm XON XOFF Psthru Mdm Mdm FlowCtl Break Buffr Ctl Send Break Ontl BuffrDiscDelay Max Frame Size CellularEnhance RdcdAsyncBufSiz Speaker Control Speaker Volume
294. ort operational mode Operates only on the multiport modems Multiport mode is in effect when the MUX mode configuration option is set to TDM MSD or DTE_Bridge It supports from one to four ports DTE 1 4 depending on how the modem is further configured Using Table 1 1 identify your modem s operational mode based on the 392xPlus modem model and its selected MUX mode configuration option Table 1 1 392xPlus Operational Modes MUX Mode 392xPlus Modem Configuration Option Operational Mode Singleport n a Singleport Multiport MUX Mode Disabled Singleport MUX Mode set to TDM MSD Multiport DTE_Bridge Multiport Use the identified operational mode Singleport or Multiport to choose the configuration options that are appropriate for your application Refer to Chapter 4 DCP Configuration for more information on configuration options 392x Plus Features The 392xPlus modems share a wide variety of features e Additional VF parameters under the V 32 family modulations in 4 wire mode e International Support to correctly detect the call progress signals dial tone busy fast busy ringback for a variety of countries e Channel adaptive Trellis Coded Modulation Paradyne s advanced Trellis Coded transparent forward error correction for Trellis multipoint and high speed point to point applications e Convenient migration to new or optional features through software downloading e Extended data circuits with
295. p Level menu 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 81 DCP Configuration wee be Da d e 4 1 Omi Sire ore dod rario arc pa egeta ca Ros 4 3 Editing and Saving a Configuration Option 4 4 SUMMALY s c s Cece cess EEG Seige RENE CE 4 7 Comfistiration Tables e 4 8 Multipart 4 8 DIE dGterfaee UD PURUS 4 10 SUP E See taser dans tone Meet lines af hen stale poke eae dd 4 19 Dial TM yt cach ss acc Ie Oe ak pi eget te qas Da tele ete gd aae 4 22 Leased Eine ois meer e bed eda IE bes adeeb 4 24 pc p LEER 4 27 Utah eee sese etude 4 28 Singlepart Mode ccelis eee RR RUE P RERO CUR D bee EE 4 31 DUE Interface Aw CH RU ERES 4 33 DIE DISSE ie nonet aT re e pese aces N 4 41 Lime Dialer RE Re DER RR E Rr e 4 46 Dial LiBe CES pe REL PIG E BR Rex 4 50 Leased EIE pesce ters We Send bees ones eee Re 4 53 VI2 MNPIBUFIeE iocos soi seek ae ad EN Dep Re br Cede 4 58 OT 4 64 hip MEINE DC TT 4 66 cic quis MAE EE 4 68 Overview After installing a 392x Plus modem its software configuration options must be set using the diagnostic control pan
296. password Any value from 00 to 99 is valid For Misc example if the remote access password is 12345678 then S56 1 and 2 S57 Remote Access Password Register allows entry of the second pair of digits of Configure Edit a remote access password Any value from 00 to 99 is valid Misc S58 Remote Access Password Register allows entry of the third pair of digits of a Configure WEdit remote access password Any value from 00 to 99 is valid Misc S59 Remote Access Password Register allows entry of the fourth pair rightmost Configure Edit of digits of a remote access password Any value from 00 to 99 is valid Misc 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 5 21 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 5 3 7 of 12 392x Plus S Registers S Register Description DCP LCD Command Sequence S61 CT111 Rate Control Register determines if CT111 Rate is disabled set for Fallback 1 or Fallback 2 CT111 Rate allows the DTE to control modem rate via Pin 23 of the EIA 232 D interface This configuration option determines the effect of the DTE Rate Control signal It is only valid in Async Direct mode and Synchronous mode For proper operation disable the V 32bis Autorate and V 32bis Automode configuration options Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Fallback 2 Fallback 2 The factory setting is Disable Configure Edit DTE Interface S62 V 25bis Coding Register identifies to the modem the type of coding used by t
297. password has no effect The AT command equivalent is S Registers S562n S57 x S58 y and S59 z where nis the leftmost pair of digits x is the second pair of digits y is the third pair of digits and z is the rightmost pair or fourth pair of digits For example if the remote access password is 12345678 then the value for S56 is 1 and 2 and the value for S59 is 7 and 8 Dirz1 Callback Disable Nxt Disable Enable Directory Location 1 Callback This configuration option controls whether or not the modem s single number callback function is used Disable Modem does not use the single number callback function Enable Modem answers a call disconnects and dials the number stored in directory location 1 NOTE This function is disabled if dial access security is enabled The AT Command to Disable is S Register S67 0 The AT Command to Enable is S Register S67 1 NMS Call Msgs CallCnct amp Prg Nxt CallCnct amp Prg Disable CallCnctOnly CallProgOnly NMS Call Messages Determines if the modem status and or call summary information is sent to the NMS The modem can itemize status such as CallProgress messages or it can report a summary of activity such as Call Connect messages to the NMS Call Connect amp Progress Enables both Call Connect and Call Progress information to be transmitted to the NMS Disable Modem status and call summary information is not sent to the NMS Call Connect Only The modem accumulate
298. pe is configured for AT Command Character Echo Controls whether or not characters are echoed back to the DTE when the modem is in Command mode The AT command for Disable is EO The AT command for Enable is E1 CarriageRtn Char 013 ASCI Nxt 013 ASCI This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Carriage Return Character Allows you to change the ASCII character used to terminate an AT command to any ASCII value from 0 to 127 The AT command is S Register S3 n where n is a value from 0 to 127 Backspace Char 008 ASCI Nxt 008 ASCI This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Backspace Character Sets the character used to perform a backspace in Command mode The AT command is S Register S5 n where n is a value from 0 to 127 4 42 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 8 3 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt Linefeed Char 010 ASCI Nxt 010 ASCI This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Line Feed Character Sets the character used to perform a line feed in Command mode for responses from the modem The AT command is S Register S4 n where n is a value from 0 to 127 Result Codes Enable Nxt Enable Disable EnablelnOrig This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Result Codes Resu
299. perations 4 wire operations w o TEK leads 4 wire operations with leads TEK leads are for loopback purposes A 50 pin version is being considered for multiple line connections 8 POSITION PLUG PIN NO 6 POSITION PLUG PIN NO oa Figure C 3 Wiring Diagram 8 Position to 6 Position Crossover Cable 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 C 5 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems To connect a Model 3920Plus port to another modem s ETA 232 D interface use a 25 pin crossover cable Figure C 4 25 POSITION 25 POSITION PLUG PIN NO PLUG PIN NO 1 1 2 2 TXD RXD 3 3 RXD RIS 4 4 RTS 5 5 DSR 6 6 DSR sa 7 7 SG LSD 8 8 LSD 9 9 10 0 11 12 13 14 15 16 RXC 17 RXC 18 19 DTR 20 DTR CT140 21 CT140 22 23 24 XTXC CT142 25 CT142 TEST TEST Figure C 4 Wiring Diagram 25 Pin Crossover Cable C 6 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 CCITT V 25bis Dialing Command and Responses CONEDVIEW chin ies eque e enge e bed ned hate bia tad eta D 1 Call BequescC Omnis we Pearce teu Ea e pon D 2 Call Request with Number Provided CRN D 2 Call Request with Stored Memory Address Provided CRS D 2 CCAMIRESPOUSE iicet e sesh aco rtp ta ene dU Per D 2 Call Failure Indication GI ao uou putet ue Aw ots pa des D 2 Call Connecting CNX
300. port Mode x Extend Main Ch Disable Nxt Disable Enable Primary data can only be extended one link Extend Main Channel Supports extended diagnostics Specifies whether there is main primary channel connectivity between the modem s DTE ports and the DTE ports of modems one level below downstream or above upstream in the diagnostic network Enable If this configuration option is set to Enable on a port of a tributary modem test mode is propagated to the modems downstream when test mode goes ON for that port Disable If this configuration option is set to Disable on a port of a tributary modem test mode is not propagated for that port and primary channel data is clamped when in test mode NOTE For an extended control modem this configuration option is used along with the upstream port number where the main primary channel is extended NOTE For an extended port using V 34 modulation only a single port rate is used for all the modem s line rates Refer to the Extended Point to Point section in Appendix G Upstream Port Port1 End Porti Port2 Port3 Port4 Port5 Port6 Port7 Port8 This configuration only appears when the Extended Main Channel is enabled Upstream Port When an extended control modem s main primary channel is connected to a tributary modem that is one link above it in the diagnostic network this configuration option is set to the port number to which it is connected on the tributary modem
301. ppears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is configured for V42 MNPorBfr V42 MNPorDsc or Disc or Cellular Enhancement When enabled the modem uses non standard techniques to enhance V 42 operation for cellular applications It is still compatible however with modems which do not have the cellular enhancement implemented or enabled The AT command is S Register S91 n where nis 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable RdcdAsyncBufSiz Disable End Disable Enable This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is configured for BufferMode Reduced Asynchronous Buffer Size When enabled the modem s buffer size is limited to a maximum of 20 characters The AT command is S Register S97 n where nis 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 4 63 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Test Singleport Mode lt The Test configuration options determine specifics such as the duration of a test for the various diagnostic tests available to the modem Table 4 13 shows each Test configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration optio
302. press the gt key to display the value of the delay in minutes The delayed and forbidden conditions can be cleared by power cycling the modem This is actually the only way to re enable a forbidden number Deleting a number from a directory location and reentering it into another directory location will not change the delayed or forbidden condition of this number Talk Data Branch The Talk Data function is not available in TMp Control mode The Talk Data branch of the Top Level menu allows you to switch the modem between Talk mode and Data mode when manually dialing using either the DCP or an externally attached telephone To add an external telephone to your modem use an external Y cable to connect the phone line to both the modem and the telephone refer to Appendix C This cable is not supplied with your modem On initial power up the modem is in Data mode When in Data mode the modem is connected and data can be transmitted or received When in Talk mode the modem is disconnected and you are free to use the external telephone This function is not available for Model 3921Plus modems TIk Data 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 73 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems The following sections describe the uses of the Talk Data function Manual Dialing When the Remote Modem is Configured for Auto Answer NOTE On the remote modem the Line Current Disconnect configuration option refer to the Line Dialer section in Ch
303. ps ERROR CONTROL CCITT V 42 MNP 4 2 DATA COMPRESSION CCITT V 42bis MNP Class 5 1 14 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Modem Installation OVERVIEW ilzrsiesame e he we BE ER RR RE ER IR RACE RR RUE S 2 1 Modemi Package usc qot SO E ee testis tes 2 1 Customer Supplied Equipment lt perrons 0 cece cece ee ee eee 2 2 Model 3920Pius Modem Installation 0 5 ee Rm 2 3 Connecting Cables to the Model 3920 Modem 2 3 DIE Connection eiie ts doe qe or aie S 2 4 Power Supply Connection RR EROR RR CERE SE 2 5 Ledsed Line Connection susce bentes een deoa eee 2 5 Dial Conn lO odas oun valeo Pri une Archaea dena 2 5 Leased Backup Connection 2s sir hme eee erts 2 5 Dial Backup Connection sese ehem Re m RE neg 2 5 Network Management System Connection 2 6 Removing and Replacing the Model 3920Plus Modem 2 6 Model 3921Plus Modem Installation eem remm ERIS 2 6 Removing and Replacing the Model 3921Plus Modem 2 11 392xPlus Modem Power Up he Rr tsitu hg 2 11 Selecting Factory Configuration Options for 392xPlus 2 11 Using the Diagnostic Control Panel DOP 2 12 Overview This chapter provides a list of equipment supplied with 392xPlus modems as well as a list of customer supplied equipment In addition it describes how to install
304. r PS parameter syntax error PV parameter value error Table D 1 lists V 25bis commands supported by the 392xPlus modems Table D 1 1 of 2 V 25bis Commands V 25bis Command Description Saeed oe lent Call Request Commands CRN Call Request with Number Provided ATD CRS Call Request with Memory Address ATDS Call Answer Commands INC Incoming Call Indication RING DIC Disregard Incoming Call NONE CIC Connect Incoming Call ATA Program Command PRN Program Normal AT amp Z D 6 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 CCITT V 25bis Dialing Table D 1 2 of 2 V 25bis Commands V 25bis Command Description E ent List Request RLD Request to List Delayed Numbers NONE RLF Request to List Forbidden Numbers NONE RLN Request to List Stored Numbers NONE List Response LSD List Delayed Numbers NONE LSF List Forbidden Numbers NONE LSN List Stored Numbers NONE Table D 2 lists V 25bis response messages supported by the 392xPlus modems Table D 2 V 25bis Response Messages V 25bis Command Description AT Command Result Code Equivalent Call Response CFI Call Failure Indication BUSY NO ANSWER NO CARRIER NO DIAL TONE ERROR CNX Call Connecting Indication CONNECT List Response LSN List Stored Number NONE Command Response VAL Valid Command OK INV Invalid Command ERROR 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 No
305. r 4 DCP Configuration for additional information lt q Not applicable when MUX Mode is disabled F 2 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Default Configuration Options Table F 1 20f10 Factory Default Configuration Options Confi ti Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial Onion Default Default Default Default Default Default prion Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Port Rate Sub group Cont d Rate at 14 4 K Rate at 12 0 K Rate at 9600 Rate at 7200 Rate at 4800 Rate at 2400 14400 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 12000 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 9600 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 7200 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4800 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 2400 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 14400 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 12000 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 9600 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 7200 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4800 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 2400 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 14400 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 12000 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 9600 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 7200 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4800 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 2400 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 14400 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 12000 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3 4 4 9600 Port1 or Disable Ports 2 3
306. r Size RTS to Modem Disable Disable Keep Data Data First 10 sec 256 Disable Disable RTS to Modem Disable Disable Keep Data Data First 10 sec 256 Disable Disable RTS to Modem Disable Disable Keep Data Data First 10 sec 256 Disable Disable RTS to Modem Disable Disable Keep Data Data First 10 sec 256 Disable Disable RTS to Modem Disable Disable Keep Data Data First 10 sec 256 Disable Disable RTS to Modem Disable Disable Keep Data Data First 10 sec 256 Disable Disable tt Not applicable when Async Sync mode is set to Sync Refer to Chapter 4 DCP Configuration for additional information Not applicable when MUX Mode is enabled 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 F 9 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Speaker Control Speaker Volume Access from Remote Remote Access Password Directory Location No 1 Callback NMS Call Messages Network Position Network Management Address Diagnostic Connection Link Delay Sec On Until Carrier Medium Enable 00000000 Disable Call Connect amp Progress Trib 3920 or Control 3921 256 Modem DC 3920 or NMS CC 3921 0 On Until Carrier Medium Enable 00000000 Disable Call Connect amp Progress Trib 3920 or Contro
307. ranch make the following sections Status A ES EE A lt J Rm gt Press the key until Options appears Select Options Options Status gt aN V 29 V 33 2 fre em If optional features are installed in the modem they appear on the LCD s bottom line If other features are installed press the key to scroll other features into view To exit this function and remain in the Status branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key Record Record is a troubleshooting tool used in conjunction with support personnel This function retrieves and reports any sequence faults to support personnel A sequence fault is an irregular or unexpected event There are two selections under Record Display and Clear Display allows up to eight sequence fault messages that are recorded by the modem and displayed on the LCD in descending order If no sequence faults have occurred then Modem O K appears Clear is used to remove all sequence fault messages from nonvolatile memory and the LCD To access Record from the Status branch make the following selections Status A Options Record A An Press the key until Record appears Select Record 3 28 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Record Status A rep Clear A D e nj To display sequence faults select Display Record Number 1 E
308. ration the following is true e The Clone Remote function only operates properly if the remote modems are connected to the local modem via a leased line or an established dial line network e The Clone Remote will not appear on the LCD if the modem is not configured for leased lines and a dial line connection does not exist For more information on Clone Remote operation refer to Implementing a Clone Remote Operation later in this section The second selection appearing on the LCD is To Local via DTE This function permits firmware upgrades to be transferred to a 392xPlus modem This type of download requires a locally attached PC controller to be connected to the modem s DTE port as well as special download software Any downloads using this selection are intended to be performed by service representatives only Selecting Clone Remote NOTE Clone Remote operations are not supported unless both local and remote modems 392xPlus modems The 3800 or 391x Series modems cannot be used in cloning operations with 392xPlus modems To access DwnLoadSoftware from the Control branch make the following selections 3 42 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Control A TEN A Lm e nj Press the gt key until Download Code appears Press any function key to select Download Code The DwnLoadSoftware screen appears DwnLoadSoftware ZN A
309. re the remote modem s Access From Remote configuration option is enabled refer to the Misc section in Chapter 4 e For Single download configurations know the remote access password and the network management address of the remote tributary modem that will receive the download Refer to the Misc section in Chapter 4 for a description of the remote access password RemAccssPasswrd configuration option and the network management address NetMngmtAddress configuration option For Multiple download configurations ensure that the tributaries are responding properly to polls this may take several minutes after the control modem powers up Refer to the Sub Network Health and Status Branch section in this chapter for more information the control modem s active poll list contains all the network management addresses for the remote 392xPlus tributary modems that will receive the download refer to the Poll List Branch section in this chapter all 391x modems are removed from the active poll list 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 45 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Cloning a Single TMp Remote Choose DLL Type gt 2 Single Multiple A lt 9 e nj mJ Press the F1 key to select Single Clone Remote Choose Address CR Ew ee CZ lt e 8 m The address field xxx displays the network management address of the modem that receives the download The valid address
310. reaming function and sets the maximum ON time for RTS before antistreaming control takes effect The AT command is S Register S72 n where n is 0 for Disable 1 for 10 sec 2 for 30 sec 3 for 1 min 4 for 2 min 5 for 3 min and 6 for 5 min 4 36 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 7 5 of 8 DTE Interface Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt CTS Control Stndrd RS232 Nxt Stndrd RS232 Forced On WinkWhenDisc Follows DTR Follows RTS Clear to Send Control CTS is a signal from the modem to the DTE indicating that it can accept data from the DTE Standard RS232 In Synchronous mode forces the state of CTS to follow the state of RTS in normal EIA 232 D operation The minimum time that elapses between CTS and RTS is determined by the RTS CTS Delay configuration option Use this setting for most synchronous applications In AT Command mode CTS goes low just prior to DSR going active and goes high when the modem enters Data mode This operation prevents losing data in applications which begin transmitting as soon as DSR and CTS are both active Forced On CTS is forced ON at all times Use this selection for most asynchronous applications Wink When Disconnect CTS is normally forced ON but is turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect Use this for most UNIX applications Follows DTR The state of CTS follows the state of DTR When DTR turns ON CTS turns ON When DTR turns OFF
311. rectory locations or RLNx Where x is a directory location List Delayed Numbers Response LSD LSD is a response to an LSD command issued by DTE LSDx n d Where is a sequence number not a directory location n is the telephone number d is the delay in minutes List Forbidden Numbers Response LSF The LSF response format is LSEx in Where X is a sequence number not a directory location n is the telephone number List Stored Number Response LSN LSN is a response to RLN command issued by the DTE If a directory location is specified then the telephone number for that location appears If no directory location is specified then all telephone numbers stored in memory appear The LSN response format is LSNx n Where x is the directory location n is the telephone number 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 D 5 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Command Response A Command Response indicates that the command entered was a valid or invalid entry Valid VAL Invalid INV Command Response includes Valid VAL and Invalid INV The VAL response indicates that the modem has accepted the V 25bis command issued by the DTE VAL is similar to the AT result code OK The INV response indicates that the modem has received an incorrect V 25bis command from the DTE INV is similar to the AT result code ERROR The INV response format is INVxx Where xx 15 CU command unknown MS message syntax erro
312. release tab is exposed Figure 2 4 2 Press down on the release tab and pull the modem away from the carrier s backplane 392xPlus Modem Power Up Once your modem is properly connected to the power supply leased and or dial lines and the DTE press the modem s back panel power switch to the ON position The modem begins a power up self test in which all DCP LEDs light This test takes several seconds to perform and verifies the operation of most hardware components within the modem If successful the LCD displays Power on Selftst Passed and continues to the Top Level menu screen Power On Selftst A Passed 2 lt re 8 If a failure occurs during the self test the LCD displays Power On Selftst Failed for several seconds The LCD then displays the Top Level menu screen with the message Power on Fail appearing on the top line of the LCD Although a failure has occurred the modem will attempt to operate This allows you to activate a more thorough self test using the Test branch Refer to the Test section in Chapter 3 Selecting Factory Configuration Options for 392xPlus After the modem passes the power up self test configure it for operation using one of the six factory preset configurations The 392xPlus modems have six factory preset templates that contain the most commonly used configuration options straps for Synchronous Leased Answer or Originate Asynchronous Leased Answer or Origina
313. remote digital loopback to simulate data passing through the modem You will need to start the local analog or remote digital loopback test before you start the pattern test For this test to operate properly the modems must be online and in Synchronous or Asynchronous Direct mode Otherwise the message Invalid Command appears when this test is started Figures 3 7 through 3 9 TRANSMITTER GENERATOR 511 PATTERN DTE INTERFACE NETWORK INTERFACE COMPARATOR 511 PATTEHN RECEIVER 491 13075a Figure 3 7 Pattern Test and Local Analog Loopback Test 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 61 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems RECEIVER TRANSMITTER 511 PATTERN DTE DTE INTERFACE NETWORK INTERFACE GENERATOR ERRD 511 PATTERN TEST TRANSMITTER RECEIVER PATTERN LOCAL MODEM REMOTE MODEM 491 13075b Figure 3 8 Pattern Test and Digital Loopback Test RECEIVER TRANSMITTER COMPARATOR GENERATOR 511 PATTERN 511 PATTEHN DTE NETWORK DTE INTERFACE INTF GENERATOR COMPARATOR TRANSMITTER RECEIVER LOCAL MODEM REMOTE MODEM 491 13075 Figure 3 9 End to End Pattern Test To access Pattern from the Test branch make the following selections Test lt A Pattern A lt Em e 8 Press the key until Pattern appears Select Pattern to start this test 3 62 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Pick Test Port gt A Port Port2 A D e
314. rmine the Health and Status alarm conditions for the VF parameters Refer to Table 3 8 in this section for VF thresholds and their valid ranges and default values To access VF_Thresh_Update from the Control branch make the following selections Control lt A VF_Thresh_Update CA lt tm Press the gt key until VF_Thresh_Update appears Press any function key to select VF_Thresh_Update VF Thresholds i Save A cm B9 85 Select Edit In the following example the RSL High threshold is changed from 09 dBm to 10 This example demonstrates VF threshold editing and saving With the exception of Signal Quality all VF thresholds may be modified in this manner Signal Quality uses a menu selection with possible values of Excelent Excellent Good Fair Poor or No Signal Editing and saving a VF threshold is similar to editing and saving a configuration option For another example of editing and saving refer to the Editing and Saving a Configuration Option section in Chapter 4 RSL High dBm CA Ra t 09 A lejl In the example shown above 09 is the upper High RSL threshold in dBm To change the 09 to 10 make the following selections RSL High dBm ZA Nxt 19 A Select the F2 1 key to increment the number above the cursor 0 to 1 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 51 COMSPHERE
315. rom the Control branch make the following selection Control gt A cee m 5 le Cm Select Reset The message Reset appears momentarily before the modem performs the power up diagnostic test sequence Use Data Stream to enable or disable the modem s data transmitter function on a specific port or on all ports The Data Stream function is not available in Async mode in Singleport mode To access Data Stream from the Control branch make the following selections Control A uw A Em Press the key until Data Stream appears Select Data Stream F1 Select DS Port gt ZN Port1 Port2 A lt Ee gt If the mux is enabled press the gt key to scroll the available ports into view You may see Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4 or All For information on selecting All refer to Selecting All Ports later in this section To select a port press the appropriate function key F1 or F3 This screen does not appear if in Singleport mode or the DTE Bridge configuration option is enabled Now go to the next screen Data Stream 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 37 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Data Stream A Disable A Celle mj The port field for example Port1 displays the selected port The available Data Stream action Disable or Enable appears on the second line of the LCD be
316. ronic Industries Association s standard defining the 25 position interface between data terminal equipment and data communications equipment An Electronic Industries Association s standard defining the 25 position interface between data terminal equipment and data communications automatic calling equipment An algorithm used to correct data transmission errors Default setting is This sequence lets you switch your modem from Data mode to Command mode See extended network The extension of a circuit where the tributary DCE is connected to a downstream extended control DCE An asynchronous message in either numbers or words that includes VF data rate and error control information the modem sends to the DTE after executing or trying to execute a command Retraining at a lower rate or speed Federal Communications Commission Board of Commissioners that regulates all interstate and foreign electrical communication systems that originate from the United States Forward Error Correction A method of error control for data transmission where the receiving device can detect and correct a character or block of code containing a predetermined number of erroneous bits Front End Processor A communications computer associated with a host computer that manages the routing of data through the network Simultaneous two way communications Any one of three keys on the DCP that allows you to select or increment an LCD entry Func
317. rposes The following customer supplied equipment is required for the installation of a Model 3921Plus modem e COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier e 50 mass termination cable One or more of the following modular or 50 pin leased or dial network interfaces for single line dial permissive configurations RJ21X for multiple line dial permissive configurations 66 punchdown block e One Network Interface Module NIM for modems installed Slots 1 8 and NIM for modems installed in Slots 9 16 required for dial line configurations For installation of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier into a cabinet refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual 2 2 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Modem Installation Model 3920 5 Modem Installation Before installing your standalone modem make sure your installation site is clean and well ventilated Allow space around the modem for installing cables and telephone cords and make sure the modem is located within reach of the ac power outlet The distance between your modem and DTE should be minimized if DTE data rates exceed 19 200 bps Also low capacitance cables may be necessary for speeds greater than 19 200 bps or distances greater than 50 feet The back panel of the Model 3920 modem Figure 2 1 has the following switches and connectors An ON OFF power switch e An 8 pin DIN type power receptacle PWR for the
318. rs and remote modem access Table 4 6 shows each Misc Miscellaneous configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Table 4 6 1 of 3 Miscellaneous Configuration Options Multiport Mode StrapsWhenDisc No Change Nxt No Change Reload Straps When Disconnected Determines whether or not configuration options in the Active Saved configuration area are reloaded to Active Operating when a disconnect occurs This is appropriate in Async Dial Mode only No Change Configuration options do not change if a disconnect occurs Reload The Active Operating configuration area which controls modem operation is reloaded from the Active Saved configuration area when a disconnect occurs This is useful in modem pooling applications where it is desirable to start the modem from a known condition after every call Speaker Control OnUntilCarr Nxt OnUntilCarr Off On Speaker Control Determines if the speaker is OFF ON until carrier signal is received by the modem or ON all the time NOTE Speaker Control can also be temporarily set using the Control branch however a reset or power cycle will restore the modem t
319. rs when the modem does not recognize the downstream health and status information or device communication is not established Normal appears if no alarms are present NO RSP appears when the downstream modem does not respond to the poll Select Nxt to scroll through the entries in the poll lists To exit this function and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key Call Setup Branch The Call Setup function is not available in TMp Control mode For dial backup applications the Call Setup branch of the Top Level menu allows you to dial disconnect and answer telephone calls For leased backup applications the Call Setup branch allows you to switch between the primary leased line and the backup leased line In leased backup operation a 2 wire leased line is used as the backup facility instead of the normal 2 wire dial line Plug the leased line into the jack labeled DIAL on the rear panel of the modem see Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 and enable the Dual Leased Ln configuration option Refer to the Leased Line section in Chapter 4 for configuration options Except for dialing ring indication and call progression functions you control the backup function as if it were a normal dial backup E Sees AT Backup only Dial 1 Disconnect Answer Dial_Standby Change Directory or Does not appear Return to Dial in North America Directory Locations 1 24
320. s V 32 9600 and 4800 bps Applications Multipoint Multipoint is available in all 392xPlus modems It utilizes leased line circuits for time sharing the same front end processor FEP port with multiple remote locations The FEP via the control modem regulates traffic on the line by continuously polling the tributary DTE s in a predefined sequence Only one tributary can communicate with the control modem at a given time Modems configured for Trellis Multipoint TMp cannot be used in a point to point constant carrier application Refer to the Multiport Mode Leased Line or the Singleport Mode Leased Line section in Chapter 4 for configuration options 1 8 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Introduction Dual Leased Backup MSD Digital Bridge V 34 Modulation Dual Leased Backup is available in all 392xPlus modems It enables a 2 wire leased line to be used as the backup facility instead of the normal 2 wire dial line Plug the leased line into the jack labeled DIAL on the back panel of the modem see Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 and enable the Dual_Leased_Ln configuration option Refer to the Multiport Mode Leased Line or the Singleport Mode Leased Line section in Chapter 4 for configuration options Except for dialing ring indication and call progression functions you control the backup function as if it were a normal dial backup The Modem Sharing Device MSD is only available in 392xPlus multiport modem
321. s It allows from 2 to 4 physical ports to share a communication channel When the MUX mode option is set to TDM MSD on a tributary and at least one port has the MSD mode setting enabled then MSD is enabled For more information refer to the Multiport Mode section of Chapter 4 for configuration options or the Point to Point MSD and Multipoint MSD sample configurations in Appendix G When MSD mode is enabled e The MSD Control configuration option is added at the end of the Mux Sub Group e The EIA Port Sub group includes the RTS Antistream configuration option The Digital DTE Bridge application is only available in 392xPlus multiport modems It provides the ability for dial backup of a multipoint configuration by bridging the signal on the digital side of the FEP end modems In this configuration only two ports both on the FEP side are used on the control and backup modems Data received on Port is transmitted across the communication link as well as looped back out of Port 2 Data received across the communication link and on Port 2 is sent out of Port 1 For more information refer to the Multiport Mode section of Chapter 4 or the Digital Bridging sample configuration in Appendix G for sample configurations When the Digital Bridge is enabled a new menu is present with the following conditions e TDM capability is disabled when DTE Bridge mode is enabled therefore the rate of Port 1 is forced to run at the line rate e Configurati
322. s and V 32 modulations in 2 wire only Far End Echo Delay displays the roundtrip delay in milliseconds of the far end echo This parameter appears for V 34 V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations in 2 wire only 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 21 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems EchoFreqOff Echo Frequency Offset displays the frequency offset of the far end echo This parameter appears for V 34 V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations in 2 wire only Phase Hts Phase Hits reports the total hit count of sudden uncontrolled changes in the phase of the receive signal for the past 15 minutes This parameter appears for V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations in 4 wire only Impul Hts Impulse Hits reports the total hit count of large burst or spikes that are larger than normal peaks of random white noise for the past 15 minutes This parameter appears for V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations in 4 wire only DropOuts Drop Outs reports the total number of large reductions in channel gain for the past 15 minutes This parameter appears for V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations in 4 wire only Retrains Retrains displays the number of retrains over the last 15 minutes of operation The total 15 minute accumulation is updated every minute This parameter appears for V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 and Trellis Multipoint modulations in 4 wire only Phas Jtr Phase Jitter is the non constant variation in the phase of the re
323. s S Register S412n where n is 1 14 400 V 32bis 2 12 000 V 32bis 3 9600 V 32bis V 32 4 7200 V 32bis 5 4800 V 32bis V 32 ps 2400 V 22bis 1200 V 22 1200 212A 10 0 300 V 21 11 0 300 103J 12 1200 75 V 23 13 75 1200 V 23 18 600 75 V 23 19 75 600 V 23 20 19 200 V 32 terbo 21 16 800 V 32 terbo 22 33 600 23 31 200 24 28 800 V 34 25 26 400 V 34 26 24 000 V 34 27 21 600 V 34 28 19 200 V 34 29 16 800 V 34 30 14 400 V 34 31 12 000 V 34 32 9600 V 34 33 7200 V 34 34 4800 V 34 35 2400 V 34 4 50 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 10 2 of 3 Dial Line Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt Automode Enable Nxt Enable Disable System 85 This configuration option only appears when Dial Line Rate is configured for V 32 or V 34 families data rate Automode The modem automatically adapts to the modulation scheme and line rate of the remote modem However the maximum data rate the modem uses is determined by the Dial Line Rate configuration option System 85 Enables the full automode function with special provisions which are needed to work reliably in a System 85 or similar PBX modem pool NOTE When the V 32bis Automoding configuration option is enabled the V 21 protocol 0 300 bps is excluded from the Automoding sequence Instead the modem use
324. s an XOFF character over the VF line An XON character will enable data transmission Also the modem will transmit an XOFF character to the remote end if its receive buffers are full Select this setting if the DTE rate is less than the VF line rate or if the DTE must frequently stop the flow of data to process it The AT Command for Disable is GO The AT Command for Enable is G1 Break Buffr Ctl Keep Data Nxt Keep Data Discard Data This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is not configured for DirectMode Break Buffer Control Determines if data stored in the modem s buffer is saved or discarded when the DTE issues a break sequence Keep Data Nondestructive mode Saves the data in the buffer in both the local and remote modems Discard Data Destructive mode Empties the data buffer Only buffers in the same direction of travel as the break are discarded NOTE This configuration option is ignored if the Break Forces Escape configuration option refer to the DTE Dialer configuration options group is enabled The AT commands for Discard Data are KO and K1 The AT commands for Keep Data are K2 K3 K4 and K5 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 61 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 12 5 of 6 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt Send Break Cnil Data_First End Data First Break First This configurat
325. s call statistics over a period of time and then transmits a summary of these statistics to the NMS The NMS uses this data to produce utilization reports Call Progress Only The modem transmits detailed modem status information to the NMS These messages include any events that can display on the LCD NOTE For 6800 Series NMS applications Disable must be selected The AT commands are S Register S66 n where n is 0 for Call Connect amp Progress 1 for Disable 2 for Call Connect Only and 3 for Call Progress Only Modem Selects the Diagnostic Channel NMS Selects the Control Channel Disable Prevents messages being sent from the diagnostic port 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 67 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 14 3 of 3 Miscellaneous Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt NetworkPosition Tributary End Tributary Control Network Position Identification Each modem must be identified either as a control modem or a tributary modem NOTE Changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset NOTE This configuration option is only applicable for leased line network management applications For the Model 3920Plus Tributary is the factory default For the Model 3921 Plus Control is the factory default The AT command for Tributary is 574 0 The AT command for Control is 87421 NetMngmtAddress 256 Nxt 1 256 This configuration option is not available in point to point
326. s is carrier mounted multiport modem Figure 1 3 equipped with an integral time division multiplexer TDM with a modem sharing device MSD The modem installs into the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier occupying two slots The modem s faceplate covers two slots in the carrier It has twenty 20 LED status indicators for displaying modem activity and an audio speaker jack for the carrier s optional speaker The modem s back panel has four edge card connectors that mount into two connector plates Each connector plate has two DB 25 S connectors providing four EIA 232 DTE interfaces Both the singleport and multiport Model 3921Plus modems derive ac power from the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier s backplane which is a common bus to all devices installed in the carrier The user interface to any Model 3921Plus modem is through the shared diagnostic control panel SDCP an optional feature which operates in a manner similar to the DCP on the Model 3920Plus modems For a better understanding of DCP operation refer to Chapter 3 DCP Operation 1 4 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Introduction FACEPLATE Status Pwr Alrm 142 D Test Q Dial 125 Q RI Busy Serv Front Panel O 3921 Plus EIA232 V 24 EDGE CARD a FUTURE USE BACK CONNECTOR PLATE EIA232 V 24 CONNECTOR a gt 96 a 86 5888 9
327. s that what is displayed on the LCD is the current setting If you scroll left or right Nxt disappears and reappears if a new value is selected End appears when you have scrolled down to the last configuration option available in that group Selecting End returns you to the top of the configuration group You are free to enter that group again or scroll left or right to the next configuration options group The 4 key takes you one step up in the Configure branch each time it is pressed The 2 key causes you to exit the Configure branch and return to the Top Level menu If any changes are made to configuration options the DCP allows you to save these changes to either the Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration areas The and gt keys move selections across the LCD The F2 key selects the setting for the configuration option 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 7 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Configuration Tables Each modem operates in either the Multiport or Singleport mode depending on the modem s configuration refer to 392xPlus Operational Modes in Chapter 1 The modem s configuration options are arranged into six groups in the Multiport mode and nine groups in the Singleport mode When using configuration option tables be sure you are referencing the correct group Multiport or Singleport mode Failure to do this may lead to erroneous assumptions about the functionality of certain configuration opt
328. s the Bell 103J protocol for 0 300 bps operation The AT command is S Register S78 n where n is 0 for Enable 1 for Disable and 2 for System 85 Autorate Enable Nxt Enable Disable StartAt48 StartAt96 This configuration option only appears when Dial Line Rate is configured for V 32 or V 34 families data rate Autorate Once connected the modem automatically lowers the line rate if line conditions become impaired When line conditions improve the modem automatically shifts up to the highest data rate the line can support This autorating only occurs between 19 200 bps and 4800 bps during V 32 V 32bis and V 32 terbo connections and 33 6 and 2400 bps for the V 34 family Start at 48 and Start at 96 Set the maximum connect rate for V 32 V 32bis and V 32 terbo connections The AT command is S Register S76 n where n is 0 for Enable 1 for Disable 2 for Start at 48 and 3 for Start at 96 V32bis Override Disable Nxt Disable 2400 This configuration option is ignored unless Dial Line Rate is 4800 V32b V 32bis Override Activates the Paradyne Point to Point Diagnostic 2400 bps modulation Allows the modem to use a non standard point to point modulation capable of secondary channel diagnostics while running at 2400 bps NOTE This configuration option must be the same in both the local and remote modems Dial Tx Level Permissv 9 Nxt Permissv 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
329. sable Call Connect amp Progress Trib 3920 or Control 3921 256 Modem DC 3920 or NMS CC 3921 Refer to Chapter 4 DCP Configuration for additional information Not applicable when MUX Mode is enabled Not changed by loading factory default configuration options November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Default Configuration Options Table F 1 10 0f 10 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial o Gallen 9 Default Default Default Default Default Default Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Security X Entry Wait Time 20 sec 20 sec 20 sec 20 sec 20 sec 20 sec VF Prompt Type 2nd Dial Tone 2nd Dial Tone 2nd Dial Tone 2nd Dial Tone 2nd Dial Tone 2nd Dial Tone DTE Password 1 1 1 1 1 1 Tries DTE Password 013 013 013 013 013 013 Termination Character DTE Password 008 008 008 008 008 008 Backspace Character Get User Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable NMS 000 000 000 000 000 000 Reporting Answer Security No Answer No Answer No Answer No Answer No Answer No Answer Mode Security Security Security Security Security Security Originate Security No Originate No Originate No Originate No Originate No Originate No Originate Mode Security Security Security Security Security Security Not applicable when MUX Mode is enabled Not changed by
330. sconnecting a call NOTE The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries 2 5 10 20 sec Modem disconnects if carrier turns OFF for more than 2 seconds 5 seconds 10 seconds or 20 seconds Disable Modem does not disconnect if carrier turns OFF No Data Disc Disable Nxt Disable 10min 30min 60min No Data Disconnect Forces the modem to disconnect if no data is transmitted and received within a specified amount of time NOTE The factory default value is country dependent Disable Modem remains connected despite the lack of data flow 10 30 60 min Modem disconnects if data is not received and transmitted within 10 minute 30 minute or 60 minute intervals Auto Make Busy Disable End Disable Enable This option is only valid Model 3921 Plus Automatic Make Busy Forces the modem to go off hook under the following conditions if a local analog loopback is performed a self test is performed or if the modem is switched to the service line NOTE This configuration option should only be used when the modem is located behind a user s Private Branch Exchange PBX The Make Busy Network Interface Module NIM must be installed on the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 4 21 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Dial Line Multiport Mode gt lt The Dial Line configuration options ar
331. selected by this configuration option Disable or 7200 to 1200 The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 7200 bps Rate at 4800 Nxt Disable 4800 2400 1200 Rate at 4800 When the modem rate is 4800 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option Disable or 4800 to 1200 The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 4800 bps Rate at 2400 End Disable 2400 1200 Rate at 2400 When the modem rate is 2400 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option Disable or 2400 to 1200 The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 2400 bps Port Async Sub Group One for Each Port Async Sync Mode Sync Nxt Sync Async Asynchronous Synchronous Mode Determines whether the port operates in Asynchronous mode or Synchronous mode Async DTE Rate Sync Nxt zSync 150 300 600 1800 This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Asynchronous DTE Data Rate Identifies the asynchronous DTE s operating rate to the modem The asynchronous rate must be less than or equal to the synchronous port rate NOTE When using 150 300 or 600 bps line rates the port rate must be set to a minimum of 1200 bps NOTE When using 1800 bps line rate the port rate must be set to 2400 bps zSync The asynchronous data is equal to the synchronous rate Asyn Data Bits 8 Nxt 8 7 9 6 This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mo
332. side the port field If the modem s data transmitter is enabled the word Disable appears to indicate that you may disable the data transmitter by selecting this action To change the modem s data stream press the F2 key When the message Command Complete appears press the A key to clear the message Data Stream a E Enable A To change the data stream for the selected port again press the F2 key or To exit this function and remain in the Control branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key Selecting All Ports Selecting AII will enable or disable the modem s data transmitter function on all ports Select DS Port gt A EE All A a e En gt From the Select DS Port screen press the key to select Data Stream All Enable Disable A Em To enable or disable the modem s data transmitter function on all ports press the appropriate function key F1 Enable or F3 Disable When the message Command Complete appears press the A key to clear the message 3 38 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation EIA LEDs Select DS Port A A CA Em To change the data stream on all ports again press the F1 key Or To exit this function and remain in the Control branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top
333. ss Add from the Plist branch make the following selections S List A Change Add A m Press the gt key until Add appears Select Add Poll List Add A ENS JN A a re 8 gt 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 33 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Acquire The message Command Complete appears on the LCD to indicate that the tributary modem will be added to the control modem s poll list To exit this function and remain in the PList branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key The Acquire function does not appear in Remote mode Acquire allows you to acquire an active poll list consisting of all modems that are one tier downstream A modem adds to its poll list all downstream modems that respond to a poll To access Acquire from the Plist branch make the following selections Poll List A EL m A jle Press gt key until Acquire appears Select Acquire NOTE If an error message OtherTestActive or Unable To Acquir appears on the second line of the LCD move up one level in the menu tree to clear the message and return to the PList Acquire branch The OtherTestActive message indicates that a test is running which blocks the Acquire function The Unable To Acquir message indicates that the diagnostic network is in a busy state Poll List A
334. ss the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the Z3 key Configure Branch The Configure branch of the LCD allows you to change and save the modem s configuration options For configuration options and DCP configuration procedures refer to Chapter 4 DCP Configuration Poll List Branch The Poll List function is not available in e Multipoint tributary modems e Modems with the Diag Connection configuration option disabled e Modems using modulations that do not support the secondary channel e Point to point control modems The Poll List Plist branch of the Top Level menu allows you to identify downstream modems in order to support health and status polling and download broadcasting The maximum number of devices is 32 on the secondary channel and 64 on the diagnostic channel Tributary only Display Clear Change Add Acquire Active Delete Skip To access PList from the Top Level menu make the following selections Point to point control modems only poll address 01 and point to point tributary modems are always set to address 01 3 30 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Display Leased 28 8 x A PList Control A Lm e nj Press the key until PList appears Select PList Within a network link a control modem can communicate with a tributary modem by using the tributary modem s network management address for polling functi
335. standard for modems operating over leased lines at 2400 or 4800 bps A CCITT standard for modems operating over leased lines at 4800 7200 or 9600 bps A CCITT standard for modems operating full duplex with asynchronous or synchronous data over leased lines or dial networks at 4800 or 9600 bps A CCITT standard for modems operating full duplex with asynchronous or synchronous data over leased lines or dial networks at 4800 7200 9600 12 000 or 14 400 bps A modulation that adds the 19 200 bps and 16 800 bps data rates to the V 32bis data rates It is a Paradyne proprietary modulation not a CCITT standard A CCITT standard for modems operating full duplex with asynchronous or synchronous data over leased lines or dial networks at 28 800 26 400 24 000 21 600 19 200 16 800 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps A CCITT standard for error control protocol A CCITT standard for data compression A CCITT standard for local and remote diagnostic loopback tests 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 Glossary 9 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems VF Voice Frequency The part of the audio frequency range used to transmit voice sound usually 300 Hz to 3400 Hz This band is used by the modem for its modulated signal XOFF A character that tells the DTE or modem to stop transmitting data XON A character that tells the DTE or modem to start or resume transmitting data Glossary 10 November 1996 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 Index Abort
336. swer Ring Count configuration option is disabled Refer to the Line Dialer section in Chapter 4 For leased backup applications Answer allows the modem to begin a handshake process with the remote modem To access Answer from the Call Setup branch make the following selections Call Setup Answer IDOS Press the key until Answer appears Select Answer Answer aX men A L8 The modem goes off hook and attempts to establish a connection in Answer mode The Command Complete status message appears on the LCD To exit this function and remain in the Call Setup branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key Dial Standby Return to Dial When the modem is operating in Dial Backup mode DialBckUp Dial Standby and Return to Dial allow the modem to switch between primary leased line and primary leased line backup operation while still maintaining the backup connection Figure 3 10 Switching between backup and primary leased line operation can be performed manually or automatically Refer to the Leased Line section in Chapter 4 to enable the Automatic Dial Backup configuration option DIAL BACKUP LINE DIAL N RETURN A STANDBY TO DIAL LEASED LINE FAILURE 496 13081 01 Figure 3 10 Dial Backup 3 68 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Operation Under normal backup conditions when a pr
337. t a time or in strings Strings can have up to 40 characters after the AT prefix You can use spaces hyphens and parentheses as fillers to make the commands easier to read the modem ignores these fillers and they are not counted among the characters which make up the command string Commands must be entered on one line and end with the carriage return character Enter key e Commands with the suffix n have several options associated with them For example in the Ln command 1 1 sets the speaker volume to Low and L3 sets the speaker volume to High If no value is entered for the n suffix the modem assumes a zero 0 value e The A command without pressing the Enter key causes the modem to repeat the last command entered e Valid commands are acknowledged with numeric or word result codes unless the result codes have been disabled using the Q1 command Table 5 1 lists all available result codes with numeric and word equivalents 5 2 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Result Codes Table 5 1 lists all valid result codes for the 392xPlus modems Table 5 1 1 of 2 Result Codes ic rdi ju ubi Word Description 0 0 OK Command executed 1 1 CONNECT Modem connected to line 2 2 RING Modem receiving a ring voltage from the VF line 3 3 NO CARRIER Modem lost carrier signal does not detect carrier signal or does not detect answer
338. t have its Auto Answer Ring Number configuration option enabled Refer to the Line Dialer configuration option group for information regarding Auto Answer NOTE When this configuration option is enabled the originating modem will attempt the dial backup for a maximum of 10 call attempts with a 2 minute delay between calls This function can be reset with a completed manual dial backup a power cycle or using NMS Fast Backup Only used in special applications requiring a shortened delay time from the failure of the leased lines to the initiation of the automatic dial backup The AT command is S Register S46 n where n is 0 for Disable 1 for Enable and 2 for FastBackup AutoDialStandby Disable Nxt Disable 15min ihr 4hr Test 2min Adv 15min Adv 30min Adv 1 TestAdv2min Automatic Dial Standby Permits a modem operating on dial lines regardless of the method of dialing origination to check the quality of the leased lines periodically and if they are good to disconnect from the dial lines and resume operations on the leased lines The time interval that the modem uses to check the quality of the leased lines is determined by the configuration option These intervals are 15 minutes 1 hour and 4 hours The Test 2min and TestAdv2min selections are for testing purposes only The Adv 15min Adv 30min and Adv 1 hr selections cause the modem to evaluate the leased lines continuously in a manner which is non disruptive to the dial line commu
339. te Trellis Multipoint Control or Tributary Asynchronous Dial Synchronous Dial and UNIX Dial hardware network configurations Your modem ships from the factory with the Synchronous Leased Answer default configuration options stored in memory If Synchronous Leased Originate Asynchronous Leased Answer or Originate Trellis Multipoint TMp Control or Tributary Async Dial Sync Dial or UNIX Dial is more appropriate for your 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 2 11 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems configuration then you must change the factory setting using either the modem s DCP as described in the following sections or the AT command set The purpose of having preset configurations is so that you can have a head start in getting your modem operating and reducing the amount of time required to configure your modem For a better understanding of DCP operation and factory preset configuration options refer to Chapter 4 DCP Configuration Using the Diagnostic Control Panel DCP The DCP s liquid crystal display LCD consists of two 16 character lines which display modem status control functions and configuration options as well as indicating your location in the Top Level menu tree Appendix A To change a factory template from the Sync Leased preset configuration using the DCB perform the following steps 1 Press the function key below Configure to select the Configure branch The LCD now displays Ld EditArea frm
340. tempts to connect in MNP mode If this fails the modem disconnects This is also known as Reliable mode MNP or Buffer Modem attempts to connect in MNP mode If this fails the modem connects in Buffer mode This is also known as MNP Autoreliable Mode MNP or Disconnect Modem attempts to connect in MNP mode If this fails the modem disconnects This is also known as Reliable mode Buffer Mode Modem does not use error control and allows the DTE rate to differ from the communications line rate This mode should only be used if the DTE provides its own error control or if errors in data can be tolerated This setting is also known as Normal mode and is valid even if the remote modem is set to Direct mode Direct Mode Modem connects at a data rate equal to or less than the initial DTE interface rate The modem never connects at a data rate greater than the initial DTE rate If the modem connects at a data rate lower than the DTE rate the DTE must then adjust its data rate to equal the modem rate Ultimately the modem speed and DTE speed must be the same Direct mode does not support error control or data buffering LAPM or Disconnect Modem attempts to connect in LAPM mode If this fails the modem disconnects LAPM or Buffer Modem attempts to connect in LAPM mode If this fails the modem connects in Buffer mode NOTE The modem must be reconfigured for Direct mode before changing the leased line modulation if V 42 error c
341. tern Test s sete bee Go eee o eda a 3 62 3 10 Dial Baekup Gk Hte e te etie at 3 68 4 1 DCP Configuration PIOCeS8 DH RE 4 2 C I VE Pin QOuentaloh ee IUe Utt etse dept Meade ape C 3 C 2 Wiring Diagram Y Cable for External C 4 C 3 Wiring Diagram 8 Position to 6 Position Crossover Cable C 5 C 4 Wiring Diagram 25 Pin Crossover Cable C 6 G 1 Sample Configuration Point to Point G 2 G 2 Sample Configuration Extended Point to Point G 4 G 3 Sample Configuration Extended G 6 G 4 Sample Configuration Point to Point with Automatic Dial Backup G 8 G 5 Sample Configuration Point to Point with Network Management G 10 G 6 Sample Configuration Carrier with Network Management G 12 G 7 Sample Configuration Extended Diagnostics G 14 G 8 Sample Configuration Digital Bridge G 16 G 9 Sample Configuration Point to Point MSD G 18 G 10 Sample Configuration Multipoint MSD G 20 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 iii COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems B 5 List of Tables Page 392xPlus Operational Modes ce
342. the modem Always store the Model 3921 Plus in an antistatic bag when it is removed from the carrier The Model 3921 Plus modems are designed for installation in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier which supplies both the operating power and the leased and or dial network connections For additional information about the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual The COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier has 17 slots that hold up to 8 Model 3921 multiport modems or 16 Model 3921Plus singleport modems and one shared diagnostic unit SDU The 2 6 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Modem Installation SDU is required when the modems in the carrier are controlled by an NMS or when multiple carriers in a cabinet configuration are to be controlled by a single shared diagnostic control panel SDCP The SDCP of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier is the user interface to the Model 3921Plus modem A single SDCP can control up to eight carriers The installation of a Model 3921Plus modem varies slightly if an SDCP is installed on the front of the carrier To install a Model 3921 modem into the carrier without SDCP perform the following steps 1 At the back of the carrier install the connector plates Figure 2 2 Make sure the plate s use the same slot positions as that intended for the modem Loosely fasten the plate s This allows for slight adjustments later when inst
343. ting In both cases 10 sec and 60 sec the modem disconnects much sooner if it can empty its buffers NOTE This configuration option is not available if Error Control Mode configuration option is set to Direct Mode The AT command is S Register S49 n where n is 0 for Disable and any value from 1 to 255 in 1 second increments Max Frame Size 256 Nxt 256 192 128 64 32 16 This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is not configured for BufferMode or DirectMode Maximum Frame Size Sets the maximum frame size for V 42 and MNP For V 42 operation 128 is the maximum value Any value which exceeds this will automatically default to 128 for V 42 For MNP operation 64 is the minimum value Any value less than that will automatically default to 64 For cellular applications at least one of the sides should be set to a low value A setting of 32 is recommended Only one modem needs this setting both modems will automatically default to the greatest common value The AT Command for 256 is A3 The AT Command for 192 is A2 The AT Command for 128 is A1 The AT Command for 64 is VAO The AT Command for 32 is A4 The AT Command for 16 is A5 4 62 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 12 6 of 6 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options Singleport lt CellularEnhance Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option only a
344. ting when a disconnect occurs This is useful in modem pooling applications No Change Configuration options do not change if a disconnect occurs Reload The Active Operating configuration area which controls modem operation is reloaded from the Active Saved configuration area when a disconnect occurs This is useful in modem pooling applications where it is desirable to start the modem from a known condition after every call This allows multiple users to issue AT commands to change the modem s operation for their particular call NOTE If Reload is selected the following AT commands are disabled although the OK result code appears when the following commands are issued AT amp FO AT amp F1 AT amp F2 AT amp F3 AT amp F4 AT amp F5 AT amp F6 AT amp F7 AT amp F8 AT amp WO AT amp W1 AT amp W2 and AT amp Zn x The AT command for the Straps When Disconnected configuration option is S Register S88 n where n is 0 or 231 for No Change and 1 or 232 for Reload Speaker Control OnUntilCarr Nxt OnUntilCarr Off On Speaker Control Determines if the speaker is OFF ON until carrier signal is received by the modem or ON all the time NOTE Speaker Control can also be temporarily set using the Control branch however a reset or power cycle will restore the modem to the Speaker Control and Speaker Volume configuration option settings The AT command for Off is MO The AT command for On Until CD is M1 The AT command for On is M2
345. tion at the data rate selected 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b The modem operates using V 32bis or V 32 terbo modulation at the data rate selected Autorate Enable Nxt Enable Disable StartAt48 StartAt96 Autorate Once connected the modem automatically lowers the line rate if line conditions become impaired When line conditions improve the modem automatically shifts up to the highest data rate the line can support This autorating only occurs between 19 200 bps and 4800 bps during V 32 V 32bis and V 32 terbo connections and 33 6 to 2400 for V 34 Start at 48 and Start at 96 Set the maximum connect rate for V 32 V 32bis and V 32 terbo connections V32bis Override Disable Nxt Disable 2400 This configuration option is ignored unless Dial Line Rate is 4800 V32b V 32bis Override Activates the Paradyne Point to Point Diagnostic 2400 bps modulation Allows the modem to use a non standard point to point modulation capable of secondary channel diagnostics while running at 2400 bps NOTE This configuration option must be the same in both the local and remote modems 4 22 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 3 2 of 2 Dial Line Configuration Options Multiport Mode Dial Tx Level Permissv 9 Nxt Permissv 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
346. tion keys are labeled F1 F2 and F3 Two way data communications allowed in only one direction at a time The exchange of predetermined codes and signals tones to establish a connection between two modems High Level Data Link Control A communications protocol defined by the International Standards Organization ISO A computer attached to a network that shares its information and devices with the rest of the network A unit of frequency Hertz that equals one cycle per second 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 Glossary 5 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems idle JM8 keypad LCD leased line LED local analog loopback long space disconnect loopback test menu tree mixed inbound rates MNP modem modulation MSD multiplexer mux multipoint line Multiport mode A state in which the modem s operating parameters can be modified or commands can be issued to the modem using either AT commands or the DCP A jack used for leased line networks Pins 1 and 2 are the transmit pair and Pins 7 and 8 are the receive pair A set of seven keys surrounding the DCP s LCD These keys are used to select configuration options and to maneuver through the DCP menu Liquid Crystal Display A thin sandwich of two sealed glass plates containing liquid crystal material When voltage is applied the amount of light able to pass through the glass plates is altered so that messages may be written on the display
347. to AT or V 25bis Async then the total character size must equal 10 bits Total character size consists of start data parity and stop bits V 25bis Async must use 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit The total character size for Error Control mode Direct mode or Buffer mode must be 11 bits or less The AT prefix determines parity of the async character Asyn Stop Bits 1 Nxt 1 2 This configuration option only appears when Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Asynchronous Number of Stop Bits Selects 1 or 2 bits to signal the end of an asynchronous character NOTE If the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to AT or V 25bis Async then the total character size must equal 10 bits Total character size consists of start data parity and stop bits V 25bis Async must use 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit The total character size for Error Control mode Direct mode or Buffer mode must be 11 bits or less The AT prefix determines the number of stop bits via autobauding 4 34 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 7 3 of 8 DTE Interface Configuration Options Singleport Mode lt DTR Action Ignore Nxt Ignore Stndrd RS232 CntrisOnHook CntrisTxMute Data Terminal Ready Action DTR is a signal from the DTE to the modem indicating that the DTE is connected and ready for operation Ignore Modem assumes DTR is always ON This is used when the DTE does not pro
348. tors may turn on depending on existing conditions such as error detection informational alerts and warnings These indicators appear on the top or bottom line of the LCD Remote Mode Indicator If the local 392xPlus modem establishes a connection with the remote 392xPlus modem via the Remote branch then appears in the upper right corner of the LCD top line on both modems For more information on the Remote Mode indicator refer to Remote Branch in this chapter Out of Range Indicator If an invalid threshold out of range is selected in the VF Threshold update process then appears in the lower right corner of the LCD bottom line For more information on the Out of Range indicator refer to VF Thresholds Update in this chapter The DCP on the Model 3920Plus has seven keys while the optional SDCP of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier has eight keys The additional key on the carrier is the Select key used to connect the SDCP to a specific slot in the carrier A Key The X key returns you to the Top Level menu display from anywhere in the menu tree Pressing Zx while changing configuration options displays the message Save Straps Yes No If No is selected changes made to configuration options are not saved and the Top Level menu appears If Yes is selected then changes are saved to either Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration areas Key The zx key moves you up one level in the menu tr
349. two operating modes Command mode and Data mode Before a modem goes online establishes a successful connection with a remote modem it is considered to be in Command mode an idle state where you can modify its operating parameters or issue modem commands Any command issued is acknowledged with a response in either words or digits known as Result Codes Refer to Table 5 1 for a listing of result codes Once the modems are online either by answering or originating a call they automatically switch to Data mode Data mode is a state where any entries made from the DTE are considered data and are transmitted and received between modems The modems remain in Data mode until the connection is broken or until they are forced into online Command mode using the escape sequence Switching Between Data Mode and Online Command Mode Sometimes it is necessary to change operating parameters while the modems are online The Escape Sequence allows you to toggle the modem between Data mode and online Command mode while maintaining a connection with the remote modem This is accomplished using the escape sequence to exit Data mode and the command to return to Data mode 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 5 1 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Escape Sequence and Escape Guard Time The escape sequence is only issued when the modem is online and in Data mode The 392xPlus modems use three consecutive plus characters as the escape sequence To c
350. two types of Remote Clone operations It can clone the upstream VF connected control modem SC_Clone or it can clone all the 392xPlus modems attached to its downstream Diagnostic Channel DC_Broadcast Choose DLL Type gt A ee A BAR 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 43 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems From the Choose DLL Type screen press the F1 key to select SC_Clone to request the transfer of an exact copy of the tributary modem s firmware to the VF connected control modem Proceed to the section titled Implementing a Clone Remote Operation which follows the descriptions of multipoint cloning operations Cloning DC Broadcast Remote Before using Clone Remote in DC Broadcast configurations make sure the tributary modem s active poll list contains all the network management addresses for the control modems that receive the download refer to the Poll List Branch section in this chapter and ensure that the control modems are responding properly to polls refer to the Sub Network Health and Status branch section in this chapter Choose DLL Type gt A DC_Broadcast A From the Choose DLL Type screen press the gt key until DC_Broadcast appears Press F1 or F2 to transfer an exact copy of the tributary modem s firmware to the DC connected control modem s using the Active Poll list Proceed to the section titled Implementing a Clone Remote Operation which follows the descripti
351. ulse Mode is disabled in Denmark and Sweden Line Dialer Qn Result Codes Configure Edit Q0 Enables modem to send result codes to the DTE DTE Dat Q1 Disables modem from sending result codes to the DTE Q2 Enables in Originate mode only for modem to send result codes to the DTE Required for most UNIX applications Sn r Change S Register Changes contents of S Register where nis the S Register None and ris the new value Sn Display S Register Displays value of S Register where n is the S Register None number T Tone Dial Sets the modem for tone dial mode Configure WEdit Line Dialer Vn Result Codes Format Configure WEdit DTE Dialer VO Displays result codes in Number 1 format digits V1 Displays result codes as text V2 Displays result codes in Number 2 format digits 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 5 7 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 5 2 3 of 9 392xPlus AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence Xn Extended Result Code Dial Tone Detect and Busy Tone Detect Configuration Extended Result Options Code Configure Edit Extended Dial Tone Busy Tone DTE Dialer Result Code Detect Detect Dial Tone Detect Disable Disable Disable Configure Edit Enable Disable Disable Line Dialer X2 Enable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Busy Tone X4 Enable Enable Enable Detect X5 Add EC Enable Enable Configure WEdit X6 Add V42 MNP Enable Enable L
352. ult with the appropriate regulatory agencies and inspection authorities to ensure compliance A rare phenomenon can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or more buildings If products installed in separate buildings are interconnected the voltage potential may cause a hazardous condition Consult a qualified electrical consultant to determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and if necessary implement corrective action prior to interconnecting the products In addition if the equipment is to be used with telecommunications circuits take the following precautions Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 B COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Notices WARNING THIS EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN TESTED AND FOUND TO COMPLY WITH THE LIMITS FOR A CLASS A DIGITAL DEVICE PURSUANT TO PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES THESE LIMITS ARE DESIGNED TO PROVIDE REASONABLE PROTECTION AGAINST H
353. umber REN 1 11 S Register list 5 15 5 28 Security access messages 3 14 branch 3 10 6 4 6 13 configuration options 6 13 6 14 database tables 6 2 6 3 6 16 6 17 passwords 6 2 6 4 6 15 6 16 Security configuration options group 4 68 Select key 2 9 3 8 3 9 self test 3 56 self test 2 11 serial number Ser 3 23 service line 3 41 3 42 Service Log Status branch 3 29 3 30 shared diagnostic control panel SDCP 1 4 3 3 Singleport mode 4 31 configuration options Dial Line 4 50 4 52 DTE Dialer 4 41 4 45 DTE Interface 4 33 4 40 Leased Line 4 53 4 57 Line Dialer 4 46 4 49 Misc 4 66 4 68 Security 4 68 Test 4 64 4 65 V 42 MNP Buffer 4 58 4 63 singleport modem 1 2 1 7 model 3921Plus 1 4 soft straps See configuration options software download 3 42 3 49 speaker 3 36 specifications technical 1 13 1 14 standalone multiport modem 1 2 singleport modem 1 2 Status branch 3 10 3 17 3 30 status indicators LEDs 3 3 3 6 straps See configuration options SubHS Sub Network Health and Status branch 3 10 3 64 3 65 synchronous operation 2 11 4 2 4 13 4 33 Talk Data branch 3 10 3 73 3 75 telephone external 3 73 C 4 TDM MSD 1 2 1 7 1 10 4 10 technical specifications 1 13 1 14 telephone external 3 73 C 4 telephone numbers display 3 66 storage 3 71 Test branch 3 10 3 54 3 63 Abort 3 55 Local Analog Loopback 3 57 3 58 Local Digital Loopback 3 6
354. uration option is only applicable for leased line network management applications For the Model 3920Plus Tributary is the factory default For the Model 3921 Plus Control is the factory default NetMngmtAddress 256 Nxt 1 256 This configuration option is not available in point to point tributaries which are always set to address 01 Network Management Address Determines the address used when accessing a modem from the NMS or when using DCP functions that require network management addresses Within a network link a control modem can communicate with a tributary modem by using the tributary modem s network management address Each TMp tributary modem must have a different network management address Address values range from 001 to 256 NOTE Changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 29 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 4 6 3 of 3 Miscellaneous Configuration Options Multiport Mode gt lt Diag Connection Modem DC Nxt Modem DC NMS CC Disable This configuration option does not appear when the LeaseLine Rate is configured for TMp and NetworkPosition is configured for Tributary Diagnostic Connection Allows the configuration of the serial diagnostic port of the modem to be either a diagnostic channel that is connected to another modem DC or a control channel that is connected to a network management device CC NOTE Changes to this conf
355. ut controls the remote modem s LSD signal This is used for DTEs that require Line Signal Detect LSD to toggle ON and OFF to simulate half duplex operation If RTS Action is set to simulated control carrier then the remote modem s LSD Control configuration option must be set to Simulated Control Carrier Simulated Control Carrier conforms to V 13 specifications This setting is ignored when the modem is configured for Asynchronous mode and RTS CTS flow control is selected NOTE Simulated Control Carrier is not available on point to point MSD ports NOTE Simulated Control Carrier is available on TMp tributary ports for dial backup purposes RTS Antistream Disabled Nxt 10msec 30msec 1 2min 3min 5min This configuration option only appears when MSD is enabled or when RTS Action is set to Sim Cntl Car Request to Send Antistreaming If enabled the operation of the antistreaming function is as follows If RTS is ON for a period exceeding the selected time the modem will take over control of the carrier and will force the carrier OFF The modem will also force CTS OFF during this time This condition will stay in effect until the DTE turns RTS OFF After this the next time the DTE turns RTS ON carrier will be turned ON and the RTS timer will start again Disable The antistreaming function is not in effect 10 sec 30 sec 1 min 2 min 3 min 5 min Enables the antistreaming function and sets the maximum ON time for RTS before a
356. various levels of the Configure branch Le Configure Ld EditArea frm Activ Operating Active Saved 1 Customer2 Factory Sync_Leased TMp Sync_Dial Async_Leased Async_Dial UNIX_Dial h M Choose Mode Suas Mode Control Trib Answer Originate Choose Function Edit StrapGroup Save Active Saved Customer Customer2 DTE_Interface Line_Dialer Leased_Line Test Security DTE_Dialer Dial_Line V42 MNP Buffer Mlsc MUX Copy Portt Port2 Port3 Port Rate Async EIA Not shown when the DTE Bridge configuration option is enabled 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 3 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems The Configure branch consists of the following three levels Ld EditArea frm Allows the selection of the Active Operating Active Saved Customer 1 Customer 2 and Factory configuration areas e Choose Function Allows you to make changes Edit to existing configuration options or write Save these changes to either the Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 e Edit Strap Group Contains the eight software configuration option groups that determine how the modem operates plus the Security group which can be viewed but not changed using this branch Editing and Saving a Configuration Option The following example shows how to change the Remote Access Password using the DCP If
357. ve algorithm to test the original point to point lease connection in both directions before interrupting primary data on the dial lines NOTE For proper operation of Special Standby ensure that the Automode configuration option is set to Enable The AT command is S Register S98 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable DialStandbyTime 10min Nxt 10min 5min 1min Dial Standby Time Selects the amount of time that a dial circuit is held after returning to the leased lines CarrierOn Level 43dbm Nxt 43dbm 26dbm Carrier On Level Controls the carrier detection threshold for leased lines When the power level of the receive carrier signal drops 2 dBm below this level either C26 dBm or 43 dBm LSD turns OFF When the carrier signal is greater than this level LSD turns ON For TMp Control 26dbm is the factory default The AT command is S Register S48 n where n is 0 for 43 dBm and 1 for 26 dBm V27bis Train Short Nxt Short Long This configuration option only appears when Leased Line Rate is configured for V27bis V 27bis Train Controls the train time for V 27bis operation The AT command is S Register S70 n where n is 0 for Short and 1 for Long V29 TrainOnData Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option only appears when Leased Line Rate is configured for V29 V 29 Train On Data When enabled the modem receiver can train based upon the incoming data or a training sequence from the distant
358. vember 1996 ASCII Character Table d Toa somre hb aie Blea EEUU ee ORs E 1 Overview Table E 1 in this appendix provides the ASCII character table Table E 1 1 of 4 ASCII Characters Hexadecimal Decimal Control Key ASCII Value ASCII Value Character 00 000 NUL CTRL 01 001 SCH CTRL A 02 002 STX CTRL B 03 003 EXT CTRL C 04 004 EOT CTRL D 05 005 ENQ CTRL E 06 006 ACK CTRL F 07 007 BEL CTRL G 08 008 BS CTRL H 09 009 HT CTRL I 0A 010 LF CTRL J 011 VT CTRL K 0C 012 FF CTRL L 013 CR CTRL M OE 014 SO CTRL N OF 015 Sl CTRL O 10 016 DLE CTRL P 11 017 DC1 CTRL Q 12 018 DC2 CTRL R 13 019 DC3 CTRL S 14 020 DC4 CTRL T 15 021 NAK CTRL U 16 022 SYN CTRL V 3920 A2 GN3 1 30 November 1996 E 1 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table E 1 2 of 4 ASCII Characters Hexadecimal Decimal Control Key ASCII Value ASCII Value Character 17 023 ETB CTRL W 18 024 CAN CTRL X 19 025 EM CTRL Y 1A 026 SUM CTRL Z 1B 027 ESC CTRL 1C 028 FS CTRL 1D 029 GS CTRL 1E 030 RS CTRL Ax 1F 031 US CTRL 20 032 spacebar 21 033 22 034 23 035 24 036 25 037 26 038 amp 27 039 28 040 29 041 2A 042 b 2B 043 2 044 2D 045 2b 046 2 047 30 048 0 31 049 1 32 050 2 33 051 3
359. vember 1996 5 23 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Table 5 3 9 of 12 392xPlus S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence S74 Network Position Identification Register identifies each modem as either a Configure WEdit control or tributary modem Misc Register has the following values 0 Tributary 1 Control The factory setting is Tributary 75 Network Management Address Register determines the modem s network Configure Edit address This address is used when accessing the modem from the 6700 Dial Series NMS Enter a value from 0 network address 001 to 255 network address 256 The factory setting is 0 S76 V 32bis Autorate Dial Line Register determines if Autorating is used on dial Configure Edit lines when connected in V 32bis mode Dial Line Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable S78 V 32bis Automode Dial Line Register allows the modem when operating on Configure Edit dial lines to automatically detect and connect to the remote modem s Dial Line modulation scheme Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable S82 V 32bis Autorate Leased Line Register determines if Autorating is used on Configure WEdit leased lines when connected in V 32bis mode Leased Line Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable S84 A
360. vide DTR Standard RS232 Allows the DTE to control DTR to the modem as specified in EIA 232 D and CCITT V 24 specifications If this signal is not present the modem will not answer or dial Controls On Hook Required for applications in which the host processor must reset itself for the next session before the current session is terminated When selected the modem does not disconnect from the VF line during an active call until DTR is lowered by the attached DTE This setting is ignored if the modem is commanded to disconnect from its own front panel or by the COMSPHERE 6700 Series Network Management System Controls Transmitter Mute Mutes the transmitter whenever DTR drops on the DTE interface This selection is valid only in the V32bis modulation and can be used on the answer side modem to force the originate modem to initiate a dial backup NOTE If V 25bis mode is used then this configuration option must be set to Stndrd_RS232 The DTE must provide DTR to dial or answer a call NOTE When operating over the dial network this selection forces DTR Action to behave as CT108 2 Data Terminal Ready If DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to DTR Direct 1 then DTR Action behaves as CT108 1 Connect Data Set to Line The AT command for Ignore is amp DO The AT commands for Standard RS232 are amp D1 amp D2 or amp D3 The AT command for CntrlsOnHook is amp D4 The AT command for CntrlsTxMute is amp D5 DSR Control
361. wever if the modem receives false busy tones this configuration option can be disabled and the modem ignores all busy tones The AT commands for Disable are X0 X1 and X2 The AT commands for Enable are X8 X4 X5 X6 and X7 Pause Time 2sec Nxt 2sec 4sec 6sec 8sec 10sec 20sec Pause Time Determines the number of seconds the modem pauses when it encounters a comma in the dial command string NOTE Although DCP selections are limited 2 4 6 8 10 or 20 values set by the AT commands can display from 0 to 255 seconds The AT command is S Register S8 n where n is from 0 to 255 in 1 second increments NoAnswer Timout 45sec Nxt 45sec 30sec 60sec No Answer Abort Time out Determines the number of seconds an originating modem waits before abandoning a call attempt when no answer tone is received NOTE Although DCP selections are limited 30 45 or 60 values set by AT commands can display from 1 to 255 seconds NOTE The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries The AT command is S Register S7 n where n is from 1 to 255 in 1 second increments Fast Disconnect Disable Nxt Disable Enable Fast Disconnect Allows the modem to disconnect immediately after receiving a disconnect command from a local DTE or its own diagnostic control panel Disable The modem follows its normal disconnect sequence by issuing a cleardown sequence or long space disconnect This is also known as a gracefu
362. when MUX Mode is enabled F 6 November 1996 3920 A2 GN31 30 Default Configuration Options Leased Line Rate Leased Mode Autorate V32bis Override Leased Tx Level Asymmetric Rate Auto Dial Backup Auto Dial Standby Special Standby Dial Standby Time Carrier On Level 28800 V34 4 wire Ans or 4 wire Orig Enable Disable 0 Disable Disable Disable Disable 10 min 43 dBm 28800 V34 4 wire Ans or 4 wire Orig Enable Disable 0 Disable Disable Disable Disable 10 min 43 dBm 19200 control or 14400 trib 4 wire Orig trib or 4 wire Ans control Enable Disable 0 Disable Disable Disable Disable 10 min 26 dBm Control or 43 dBm trib 28800 V34 6 Disable Enable 6 Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable 10 min e 43 dBm 28800 V34 Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable 10 min 43 dBm Table F 1 6 0f 10 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial 9 Gaile 9 Default Default Default Default Default Default P Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Dial Line Dial Modulation V 34 V 34 V 34 V 34 V 34 V 34 Dial Line Rate 28800 V34 28800 V34 28800 V34 28800 V34 28800 V34 28800 V34 Automode X Enable Ena
363. xt Internal External RXC Loop This configuration option only appears in customized installations in which the Dual Leased Ln is configured for Enable and Async Sync Mode is Sync Backup Transmit Clock Source Selects the clock reference source when operating in the Dual Leased Line Mode This is a special mode in which one leased line is used to back up another Internal The transmit data s clock source is derived from the modem s internal clock This clock is available as an output on Pin 15 TXC of the EIA 232 D interface External The transmit data s clock source is provided by the DTE on Pin 24 XTXC on the EIA 232 D interface Receive Clock Loop The modem s transmit clock is derived from its received analog signal The derived clock is available as an output on Pin 15 TXC of the EIA 232 D interface XTXC Clamps TXC Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option only appears when TX Clock Source is configured for External External Transmit Clock Clamps Transmit Clock Allows the modem s TXC output Pin 15 on the EIA 232 D interface to be clamped OFF when TX Clock Source is configured for External Enable TXC is clamped off when TX Clock Source is configured for External Disable TXC continues to be provided when TX Clock Source is configured for External The AT command is S Register S71 n where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable CT111 Rate Cntl Disable Nxt Disable Fallback1 Fallback2
364. y branches are not available in Multiport mode 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 4 9 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems DTE Interface Multiport Mode gt lt The DTE Interface configuration options contain EIA 232 D CCITT V 24 and asynchronous character format information essential for maintaining a connection and for transmitting data between the DTEs and the modem Table 4 1 shows each DTE Interface configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is newly installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix Table 4 1 1 of 9 DTE Interface Configuration Options Multiport Mode gt lt MUX Sub Group MUX Mode TDM MSD Nxt TDM MSD Disable DTE Bridge Mux Mode Determines the operating mode of the multiplexer mux NOTE If the MUX mode configuration option does not appear under the DTE Interface branch refer to Table B 7 in Appendix B Troubleshooting TDM MSD Enables the modem as a time division multiplexer TDM and a modem sharing device MSD When the Mux mode configuration option is set to TDM MSD and at least one port has the MSD Mode setting enabled then the MSD is enabled Only the lowest numbered port in an MSD group allows strapping of the port rate
365. you are performing a Local Analog Loop test on a TMp modulation that is running a test pattern with a constant flow of data you must toggle the RTS switch off and then on to allow the modem to train up SENDS TEST MESSAGE TRANSMITTER gt DTE DTE INTERFACE NETWORK RECEIVER VERIFIES TEST MESSAGE LOCAL MODEM 491 13076 Figure 3 4 Local Analog Loopback To access Loc Analog Loop from the Test branch make the following selections Test ra eS Loc_Analog_Loop ZA cm B9 8 Press the gt key until Loc Analog Loop appears Press any function key to start this test Test Local Loop Started 3920 A2 GN31 30 November 1996 3 57 COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems Rem Digital Loop DTE DTE INTERFACE NETWORK NOTE The test delays 15 to 30 seconds to allow any outstanding network management messages to propagate before the VF channel is interrupted by the test The message Started appears on the LCD and the Test LED lights for the duration of the test If OtherTestActive appears on the LCD another test is in progress Select Abort to clear the current test and try again If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the test If it is disabled the test operates until aborted For more information on the Test Timeout configuration option refer to the Test section in Chapter 4 A Ring Ind

Mercedes-Benz 2008 CL63 AMG Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents